JP2020039974A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing decrease in game amusement.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: sound volume adjustment means for adjusting the sound volume of a game sound corresponding to a game performance period, on the basis of operation of a specific operation unit in a game performance period which is started in response to a result of a lottery; adjustment restriction means for restricting adjustment of the sound volume by the sound volume adjustment means; adjustment content display means, when a specific operation unit is operated and the sound volume is adjusted, displays an adjusted content image indicating the sound volume after the adjustment, and deletes the adjustment content image when a predetermined period is elapsed after reception of the final adjustment; and post-restriction display continuation means for continuously displaying the adjustment content image displayed when the adjustment restriction condition is satisfied even after the adjustment restriction condition is satisfied, when a predetermined adjustment restriction condition is satisfied in which the adjustment restriction means restricts adjustment of the sound volume, while a specific operation unit is operated in the game performance period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  As this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that variably displays a plurality of symbols and gives a predetermined gaming value when a stop result of the symbol becomes a predetermined mode. In such a gaming machine, the volume of the effect sound output from the speaker can be adjusted by the player during the game (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent No. 5849129

  In the above-mentioned gaming machine, the volume can be adjusted in parallel with the progress of the game, so that the game can be smoothly advanced compared to the conventional gaming machine in which the volume can be adjusted only in the demonstration state where the game is not progressing. In addition, the degree of satisfaction of the player for the game can be increased. However, in the case where the volume adjustment is performed in parallel with the progress of the game in this manner, the effect of the progress in the game is affected, and the effect intended by the game designer may not be sufficiently exhibited, which may cause a decrease in the game entertainment. was there.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

In order to achieve the above object, in the invention according to claim 1,
Performing a symbol variation game in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and when a winning result is derived as a result of the symbol variation game, a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is performed. A controllable gaming machine,
Operation effect execution means for executing a specific operation effect capable of accepting a predetermined effect operation during the symbol change game,
Volume changing means for changing the volume of the effect sound corresponding to the symbol fluctuation game, based on a predetermined volume adjusting operation being performed,
Light amount changing means for changing the light amount of the predetermined light emitting member based on the predetermined light amount adjustment operation being performed;
A volume change based on the volume adjustment operation, and a change disable unit that disables the light amount change based on the light amount adjustment operation,
The production operation accepted in the specific operation production is an operation on a special operation unit that is not operated when the volume adjustment operation is performed and when the light amount adjustment operation is performed,
While the light amount change based on the light amount adjustment operation is disabled over the entire period during the symbol change game,
The volume change based on the volume adjustment operation, while using a different operation unit from the special operation unit, during the symbol fluctuation game, during the execution period of the specific operation effect, before and after the execution period It is not possible to do so within a special period including the period.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine at the time of the press operation part of an effect operation unit being in an ascent position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine at the time of the press operation part of an effect operation unit being in an ascent position from the front right. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which opened the door frame from the main frame and opened the main frame from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for every main member and looked at from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, each of which is exploded and viewed from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame from the front and disassembled. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 as viewed from the upper front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit from the back. FIG. 3A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 2B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after the rear case and the fraud prevention member are removed. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. FIG. 3A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as exploded and viewed from the front, and FIG. 3B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit exploded and viewed from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and looked from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in the plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in the plate unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit for every main member and looked from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in the dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for every main member and looked from behind. It is the top view which looked at the production operation unit in the plate unit from the advancing and retreating direction of the production operation unit button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rendering operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rendering operation unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the effect operation unit disassembled for every main member from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring from the lower front. FIG. 2A is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotary drive unit from the back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the rotation drive unit from the left front. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit from the front and the upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation button unit and looked from the front lower part. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lower position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the upper position. It is an explanatory view showing the relation between the production operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration board in the top view which looked at the effect operation unit from the press direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is at the raised position, and (c) is a center pressing operation unit of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the plate unit when is pressed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, and (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked from the front lower part. It is a front view of the door frame shown with each decorative board. It is a front view of a main part frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main-body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member and looked at from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left front corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device viewed from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit of the main body frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit in the main body frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. FIG. 5 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit, which is cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (A) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). . It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full tank path unit. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball in a main part frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the board unit from the lower back. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit, which is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and looked at from behind. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine cut | disconnected in the horizontal direction center. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a plan view of the body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows an upper part in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the upper front in a state where the tank rail and the like are assembled to the ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the lower front in (a). FIG. 101 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the exploded view of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area | region where the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of a main body frame distribute | circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the upper part of a main body frame. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball to a detour passage in an upper part of a main part frame. It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the tank rail vicinity in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the hinge side back. In a pachinko machine, it is a front view of a game board showing an inside of a game area where game balls circulate with a game panel being opaque. It is a front view which expands and shows the vicinity of an attacker unit in a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from behind. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member and looked from behind. It is a front view of the game board in the state which made the game panel transparent. It is a front view of the game board which shows the decoration pattern of the game panel and the obstacle nail. It is a front view of a front component and a game panel in a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the front component and the game panel from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front component and the game panel from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the front component member and the game panel from the front by disassembling. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the front component member and the game panel and looked from behind. (A) is a front view showing a panel board and an upper left panel decorative board and a lower left panel decorative board in a game panel, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the panel board at a specific obstacle nail part, and (c) is It is a fragmentary sectional view of a panel board in a part of an obstacle nail which overlaps with a decoration pattern. It is a front view of the game board which shows the relationship between the decorative pattern and the obstacle nail in the game panel. (A) is a front view showing the relationship between the decoration pattern on the panel board of the game panel and the back decoration board of the back production unit in the back unit, and (b) is the panel decoration LED of the panel board and the panel decoration board. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the center role of the front unit of the game board and the display effect unit, which is exploded and viewed from the front. It is a front view which shows the state which made the 1st design light-emitting decoration in the presentation effect unit. It is a front view which shows the state which made the 2nd design light-emitting decoration in the presentation effect unit. It is a front view of the back unit of the game board which emphasizes the back front decorative board and the back front right decorative board. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main member and looked at from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the back rear production unit in the back unit from the front. It is a front view of the back rear production unit which shows the back rear movable decoration in a normal position and emphasizes the back rear movable mechanism. FIG. 146 is a front view of the back effect unit, showing a state where the back movable ornamental body is locked by the lock member from the state of FIG. 133. FIG. 135 is a front view of the back rear production unit, showing a state where the slide guide is moved downward from the state of FIG. 134 to near the lower end. FIG. 135 is a front view of the back rear effect unit, showing a state where the lock member is rotated to the release position by the slide guide from the state of FIG. 135 and the back movable ornamental body is dropped. It is a front view of the back back effect unit which shows the state where the back movable ornament is moved up and down by the slide guide. It is a front view of the back back effect unit which shows the state where the lock member has rotated from the lock position to the release position side by the upward movement of the back movable decorative body by the slide guide. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the back-side decoration effect unit in the back-side effect unit viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the back-side decoration effect unit in the back-side effect unit. It is an exploded perspective view. It is a front view which shows the state which made the 5th design light-emission decorated in the back back decoration effect unit. It is a front view which shows the state which made the 6th design light-emitting decoration in the back back decoration effect unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the back-side production unit of the back unit as viewed from the front by disassembling it for each main member, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the back-side production unit of the back unit for each main member. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from behind. It is a front view which shows the state which made the 3rd design light emission decoration in the back middle production unit. It is a front view which shows the state which made the 4th design light-emitting decoration in the back middle effect unit. It is a front view of the back right production unit in a back unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back right production unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the back right production unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is a front view of the back right effect unit which emphasizes the back right movable mechanism in the normal state where the tip of the back right movable decorative body is rotated upward and the bearing slider is located at the rising end. FIG. 147 is a front view of the back-right effect unit, showing a state in which the bearing slider is located at the lower end while the back-right movable decorative body remains as it is from the state of FIG. 147. FIG. 148 is a front view of the back-right effect unit, showing a state in which the tip of the back-right movable decorative body is rotating downward from the state of FIG. 148. FIG. 149 is a front view of the back-right effect unit, showing a state where the bearing slider is located at the rising end with the back-right movable decorative body remaining as it is from the state of FIG. 149. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the back movable decoration in the back unit of the back unit has been moved from the retracted position to the standby position. FIG. 152 is a front view of the game board, showing a state in which the back movable ornament is dropped from the state of FIG. 151 to the lowered position. FIG. 152 is a front view of the game board, showing a state in which the back movable movable body is moved in the vertical direction between the standby position and the descending position by the slide guide from the state of FIG. 152. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state where the back right movable decoration of the back right production unit in the back unit was moved from the initial state to the first state. FIG. 154 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the back right movable decorative body has been moved from the state of FIG. 154 to the second state. FIG. 155 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back right movable decorative body has been moved from the state of FIG. 155 to a third state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the back upper movable decoration of the back upper production unit in the back unit was moved from the evacuation position to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the lower back movable decoration of the back lower production unit in the back unit was moved from the lowered position to the raised position. The movable decorative body behind the back production unit in the back unit is moved to the lowered position, the back right movable decorative body of the back right production unit is placed in the second state, the upper movable movable body of the back production unit is brought to the appearance position, and It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the lower back movable decoration of the back lower production unit was moved to the ascending position, respectively. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which made the 1st pattern light-emission-decorated in the front light guide plate of a table effect unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the 2nd design was made to light-emission decoration in the front light guide plate of the table production unit. It is a game board front view which shows the state which made the 3rd pattern light-emission-decorated in the back 1st light guide plate of the back middle effect unit. It is a game board front view which shows the state which made the 4th design light-emitting decoration in the back 1st light guide plate of the back middle effect unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which made the 5th design light-emission-decorated in the back 2nd light guide plate of the back back decoration production unit in the back back production unit. It is a front view of the game board in which the 6th design was made to luminously decorate the back 2nd light guide plate of the back back decoration production unit in the back back production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the animation-like light emission effect by a several pattern using a front light guide plate, a back 1st light guide plate, and a back 2nd light guide plate. It is a front view of the game board in which the first pattern is illuminated and decorated on the front light guide plate of the front effect unit and the back right movable decorative body of the back right effect unit is moved to the second state. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a back exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a front view of a peripheral control unit. It is a block diagram showing roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure showing composition of a frame earth board. (A) is a flowchart showing a procedure of a main process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, and (b) is an interrupt process periodically executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the prior judgment processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used in a lottery process for a big hit, and (B) is a symbol determination table used in a lottery process for a big hit type. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design change processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit control process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big winning opening opening and closing process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd reception opening / closing process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passage process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub main process performed by the peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about 16ms regular processing performed by peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a gray scale effect. FIG. 210 is an explanatory view following FIG. 194. FIG. 210 is an explanatory diagram following FIG. 195. It is a time chart which shows a prohibition period of volume adjustment at the time of performing an operation effect using a rotation operation part. It is a time chart which shows a prohibition period of volume control at the time of execution of a drive production using a rotation operation part. It is a time chart which shows a prohibition period of volume adjustment at the time of performing an operation effect using a press operation part. It is an example of the effect display of the effect display device at the time of volume adjustment by the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine of another embodiment from the right front. FIG. 3 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is at the ascending position, and FIG. is there. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the device as viewed from behind after being disassembled.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is mounted on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is driven.

  The outer frame 2 is formed as a rectangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 with the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 extending vertically and separated from each other. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other, and the outer frame upper member 30 And an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the upper outer frame assembly 40.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility of a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the upper frame hinge assembly 50 and the lower frame lower hinge member 60 allow the outer frame 2 to be connected to the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported coaxially, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in front view.

  Also, when the main frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 is inverted in phase and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper sound.

  The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by a player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player separately from the handle 182. When the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates the effect operation unit 301. Thus, the player can participate in the effect, and the player can be entertained by operating the effect operation unit 301 in addition to the game using the game ball B.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. A main frame upper hinge member 510 and a main frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launching device 540 for hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and a game board attached to the main frame base 501 A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of, and includes an outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, a.

  The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side, and uses the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front left side front end, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the open front side is closed. Is mounted so that it can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component 1000 that divides an outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in a front view, A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 attached to a lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and a board attached to a rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game situation based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral arranged behind the game panel 1100 A control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) and an effect display device arranged at the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image 600, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 includes various effect units that can perform a movable effect or a light emitting effect according to a game state.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game balls B and are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege ( For example, a general winning opening 2001 for giving out a predetermined number of game balls B), a first starting opening 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 are provided. The obstacle nail N is implanted in the front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate unit 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  In the gaming area 5 a of the gaming board 5, the player can hit the game ball B by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. Thereby, the game ball B is received or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate unit 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the like in the game area 5a. In addition, the player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state that is changed by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a, or the front effect unit 2600 and the rear effect. The unit 3100, the back middle production unit 3200, the back right production unit 3300, the back top production unit 3400, the back bottom production unit 3500, the back production unit 3600, etc. perform a movable production or a luminous production, etc. You can entertain.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 is a front view of an outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 is formed as a rectangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically.

  As shown, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 that are vertically separated and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. An outer frame upper member 30 connecting upper ends thereof, an outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and an upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

  The outer frame 2 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 when the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 when the main frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward with its phase inverted.

  The outer frame 2 allows the outer frame hinge assembly 50 to detachably support the body frame upper hinge member 510 of the body frame 4. The outer frame 2 supports the upper body frame hinge member 510 and the lower body frame hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 coaxially and rotatably by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, as viewed from the front, respectively. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, and are disposed apart from each other left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 support the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 so as to be rotatable coaxially. This is for mounting the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 extending vertically in a front-rear direction with a constant width (depth), and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to an upper right end of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flatly depressed rightward in a rear portion of the left side surface obtained by dividing the front-rear direction into three equal parts, and a right portion from a portion opposite to the concave portion 11a in the right side surface. It has a bulging portion 11b bulging to the right and a hollow portion 11c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 are increased by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

  The outer frame left member 11 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of the upper portion 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 allows the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c of the rear side to be inserted into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, and causes the horizontal fixing portion 12a to abut on the upper end of the outer frame left member 11; By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 with the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c abutting on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 makes the horizontal fixing portion 12a abut on the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30 and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the cutout portion 30a on the left side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (the outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat upper and lower side extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. A fixing portion 13b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b behind the horizontal fixing portion, and a right side from a rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. And a flat contact portion 13d extending short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 causes the rear surface of the contact portion 13d to contact the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. In contact with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, so that the outer side is fixed. It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41 and causes the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the left side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  Next, an outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically in a front-rear direction with a constant width (depth), and an upper right connecting member attached to an upper left end of the outer frame right member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side of the outer frame right member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and an outer frame right member 21. A lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a which is flatly depressed to the left at a rear portion of the right-side surface where the front-rear direction is divided into three equal parts, and a left portion which is leftward from a portion opposite to the concave portion 21a on the left side surface. It has a bulging portion 21b bulging in the upward direction, and a hollow portion 21c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

  The outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a flat horizontal fixing portion 22a extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the rear lower fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21 and makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the upper end of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from outside the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c abutting on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. The upper right connecting member 22 causes the horizontal fixing portion 22a to abut on the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30 and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout portion 30a on the right side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (the outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b behind the horizontal fixing portion, and a left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. And a flat contact portion 23d extending shortly toward the right side. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 causes the rear surface of the contact portion 23d to abut on the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21 and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. By contacting the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from outside the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. The lower right connecting member 23 makes the horizontal fixing portion 23a abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout portion 41a on the right side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, whereby the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

  The upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 are used to hook an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hooking member 24 extends up and down with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is a flat attachment portion 24a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 24a. And a plate-shaped hooking piece 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the cage is hooked.

  The lower hook member 25 extends up and down with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is a flat attachment portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 25a. And a flat-shaped hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 penetrates forward and backward through the hooking piece 25b. And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with cutouts 30a that are respectively depressed toward the center in the left-right direction while penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides. The upper left and right fixing members 12b and the upper and right fixing members 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutouts 30a at both left and right ends, respectively.

  Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b in which the upper surface and the front surface are depressed from the general surface at the left end. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 described later is attached to the attachment step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right, and extends left and right, and an outer frame lower member 41, A box-shaped front panel member 42 that is disposed in front of the member 41, extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41, and has an open rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42. A left and right box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and is open frontward, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43 And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by The length of the outer frame lower member 41 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame lower member 41 includes cutouts 41a which are respectively depressed toward the center in the left-right direction while being vertically penetrated at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides. The lower horizontal connecting portion 13c and the lower horizontal connecting portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutouts 41a at both left and right ends, respectively, in a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c and the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is concave from the upper surface, and has a concave portion 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and escapes to the front end side from a rearward position at the center in the front-rear direction. The concave portion 41b maximizes the capacity of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The curtain plate front member 42 has a length in the left-right direction extending to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height, The entire rear side is open. The front panel 42 is closed by the rear panel 43 so that the open rear side cooperates with the rear panel 43 to become a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 has a long hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends right and left on the front surface near the right end.

  The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front panel 42 to the front surface of the rear panel 43, the front panel 42 cooperates with the front panel 42 to form a panel internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The rear part 43 of the curtain plate has a tubular connection tube part 43a extending left and right and projecting upward at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicating with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The connection cylinder portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end is located upward as it goes rearward from the front end side, which coincides with a general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is about ３ of the entire length of the rear plate 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the whole rear member 43. Are also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection tube portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to an upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43 a, The enclosure 624a is in communication with the internal space of 620a.

  The ball-meshing preventing mechanism 44 causes the game ball B to stay between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 by staying the game ball B at the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. This is for preventing the pinching.

  The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and has a mounting portion 44 a formed flat so as to be touched by an outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later; A first discharge port 44b opening upward at the left end of 44a, a second discharge port 44c opening upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b of the mounting portion 44a, A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placing portion 44a; and an upper end protrusion projecting forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and being inclined so that the upper surface is located upward as going backward. A portion 44e.

  The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game balls B to pass. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the inner space 40a of the curtain plate, and open to the rear surface of the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is used when an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d that rises from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent unauthorized entry of a tool. Even if the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the upright wall portion 44d, even if it bends upward, it comes into contact with the forwardly projecting upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d, and further intrusion occurs. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, in the case where the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game sphere B which has fallen on the placing portion 44a for some reason becomes the standing wall portion. Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game balls B easily stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game balls B are staying on the placing portion 44a, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B are sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4. As a result, there occurs a problem that the main frame 4 cannot be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is moved to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first hole. Through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the rear panel member 43 (the rear of the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes the pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the front panel 42 and the rear panel 43 so as to be separated from each other, and the opening 42a of the front panel 42 from the rear side. A grill member 46 having a flat plate shape, and a port member 47 having two cylinders that are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween and have two cylinders extending in the front and rear directions. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43.

  When the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the pair of guide members 45 abuts on the lower ends of the door frames 3. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material having a low frictional resistance, makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 easy to slide, and facilitates opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having countless small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate inner space 40 a (enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies a low sound emitted rearward (in the enclosure 624) from the main frame speaker 622 by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, a rich bass can be radiated to the front of the outer frame 2 (the player side). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear heavy bass.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the seal member 48 is sandwiched between the upper end of the connection tubular portion 43 a and the lower end of the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 and is compressed. This is to prevent sound in the enclosure of the speaker from leaking from between the connection tube portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 as viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 21 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame 2 as viewed from the lower front. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinged. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the concave portion 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. And an attachment screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b, and an upper fixing portion; A flat horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and a lower portion extending from the edge extending from the left side to the front side of the front extension portion 51b to a portion where the bearing groove 51c is open. And a flat edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 described later in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending forward and backward, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from a rear end of the lock body 52a, and a lock member 52 extending leftward from a rear end of the lock body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending diagonally left forward and a mounting hole 52d vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is formed of a synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably mounted on the lower surface of the front extension portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by a mounting screw 53 at a position rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

  When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock body 52 a can block the bearing groove 51 c in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The edge wall portion 51e extends forward so as to be able to contact a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. The distal end of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall 51e of the outer frame hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 is in contact with the edge wall 51e. In this state, a space is formed in the bearing groove 51c at a position on the front side of the lock body 52a so as to accommodate the hinge pin 512 on the body frame of the hinge member 510 on the body frame.

  By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end moves to the left, whereby the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c Can be in a state of being all over. Thus, the upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under outer frame]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like rising portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a behind the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d sized to penetrate vertically through the horizontal portion 60a and allow only one game ball B to pass therethrough. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoid with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated conical shape in which the upper end is narrower at the upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a position near the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 60b and to extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a in an inverted U-shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60 a is mounted on the mounting portion 44 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. Thus, it is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain. The rising portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a of the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge holes 60 d coincide with the first discharge ports 44 b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) behind the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main frame are closed as the main frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually narrows, so that the rolling is performed to the rear side with a large interval, and the air can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling backward from the main body frame 4, and It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the position of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 22 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind.

  The door frame 3 is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extending vertically when viewed from the front. The inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Have been. The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by a player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 includes a quadrangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having an outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that closes the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover a lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear, and a door frame base unit 100 A handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the tray, a dish unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper side of the dish unit 200 attached to the left front of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400 and the upper side of the plate unit are attached to the right front part of the door frame base unit 100. A frame right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a square (rectangular) shape whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically and having a door window 101a that penetrates forward and backward, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. A handle mounting member 102 mounted below, a speaker duct 103 mounted on the rear lower right corner on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and mounted near a rear right lower end on the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101. Door frame main relay board 104, a door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view of the door frame main relay board 104, and a door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view of the door frame sub relay board 105. The relay frame 106 after the handle, the door frame relay substrate cover 107 that covers a part of the door frame main relay substrate 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay substrate 105 from the rear side, A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. An under-frame hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached behind the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the lower right portion of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view.

  The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 to provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

  The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) fired by the ball firing device 540 and not reaching the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by a player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved by the ball launching device 540 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is for playing a game to drive into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is mounted on the left side of the main frame 4 so as to be hinged rotatable with respect to the main frame 4, closes the front surface of the main frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, and has a game board mounted on the main frame 4. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a quadrangular flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 having an outer shape extending vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right of the front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, And a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view at a rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 and a door frame main relay at a rear lower portion of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the board 104 in rear view, and a handle rear relay board mounted on the rear view of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the rear lower portion of the rear side of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to cover a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and a door frame base 101. And a cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. An under-frame hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached behind the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the lower right portion of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view.

  The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is mounted on the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is mounted on the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

  A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1-1. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates back and forth, and whose inner peripheral shape in a front view is formed in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically. The upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery of the door window 101a are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively. The lower side forming the inner periphery is vertically It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. As described above, the entire door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed at the lower right corner in front view of the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b whose left end is inclined slightly forward from the right end side, a handle mounting seat surface 101b, and a door window 101a. Between the front side and the right end in the front view, from the rear side to the front side, and into the insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b, which penetrate back and forth on the front left side in front view, and pass through the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 in front. And a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the ball.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is located to the left from the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the ball for the lower plate that faces the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 forward. A passage opening 101f, a ball passage opening 101g for an upper plate that penetrates back and forth so as to be adjacent to a lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in a front view and that faces a through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150; A glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

  The door frame base 101 has a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i formed at the lower left corner in front view (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) and penetrating back and forth. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, the plurality of slits 101i are provided such that the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is located forward and the body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the body frame 4 is located rearward when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main frame speaker 622 can be emitted forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth above the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the door window 101a. The through hole 101j is a hole through which a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted, and penetrates the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1-2. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting a handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a, A plurality (three in this example) of ridges 102c protruding into the portion 102a and extending over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a and arranged at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a; And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

  The handle mounting member 102 is mounted to the handle mounting seat surface 101b with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

  The inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper part of the cylindrical part 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower part of the cylindrical part 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base 181a of the handle base 181 into the cylindrical portion 102a only in a state where the three protrusions 102c and the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotation position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be regulated.

  The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 because the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicular to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a state of being similarly inclined.

[3-1-3. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the tubular portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Accordingly, the sound (sound) emitted (output) from the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101 i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker opening 211b of the plate unit base 211, it is possible to satisfactorily guide the pachinko machine 1 to the front (player side).

  Further, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on a rear surface below the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103a is disposed on the left side in front view of the door frame relay board cover 107, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end.

[3-1-4. Door frame main relay board / door frame sub relay board / handle relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the post-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner in rear view at the lower rear portion of the door frame base 101. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the relay board 106 after the handle and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and has a connection cable 503 (FIG. 83) extending from the main body frame 4. And FIG. 84).

  The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L-shape in which an external shape is combined with a rectangular shape extending left and right on the right side in a front view of an upper part of a rectangular shape extending vertically and extending vertically. The frame main relay board 104 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side in rear view. The door frame auxiliary relay board 105 includes a handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the in-window decorative part decorative board 413, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 such that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are assembled with the door frame base unit 100 in such a manner that a portion extending up and down of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 is a door. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150 on the rear side.

  The handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangular shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear of the handle attachment seat surface 101b below the ball feed opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The relay board 106 after the handle is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the handle rotation sensor 189, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-button operation sensor 194 of the handle unit 180, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. Is for relaying. The relay board 106 after the handle is in a state where the rear side is covered by the relay board cover 108 after the handle in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1-5. Door frame relay board cover, relay board cover after handle, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the relay board cover after the handle 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board (a vertically extending portion in an inverted L-shape) are provided. It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape that is open at the front and at the left in front view. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107, and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side and connected to these terminals.

  The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and connects a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed near the left end on the front surface and in the center in the left and right direction on the lower surface.

[3-1-6. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and to provide the door frame base unit 100 with rigidity. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 includes a left reinforcement frame 111 and a right reinforcement frame 112 that are vertically separated and are disposed at right and left sides and a left reinforcement frame 111 and a right reinforcement frame 112 that connect upper ends of the left reinforcement frame 111 and the right reinforcement frame 112 to each other. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end is attached to a position closer to the upper side from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extends rightward to near the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 connecting the right reinforcement frame 112 and a plurality of cylinders are vertically mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcement frame 112 so as to be vertically separated from each other. And a hook member 116 to be provided.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend up and down with a length substantially equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are vertically separated from each other and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes. The upper reinforcement frame 113 has a constant width in the up-down direction, and extends left and right with a length substantially equal to the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends left and right in a vertical direction that is wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a cut squarely downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b penetrating back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position that matches the upper plate ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the through portion 114b is formed at a position that matches the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is spaced apart left and right and has a pair of rear pieces formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear pieces facing each other. A pair of side pieces extending in a flat shape from the sides to the front, and a flat front piece connecting the sides of the front ends of the pair of front extensions are provided. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that projects forward when viewed in plan. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole that penetrates forward and backward. The hook members 652 of the locking unit 650 are locked by these hook members 116.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are formed by punching a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcement unit 110, the left reinforcement frame 111, the right reinforcement frame 112, and the upper reinforcement frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 is And the door frame base 101 is located below the door window 101a.

  The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 match the upper plate ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. And the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1-7. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in a front view. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 movably in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat mounting piece 121a having a rectangular shape in a front view, and a flat protruding piece 121b extending forward from upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has a mounting piece 121 a mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. In the state where the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, a vertically extending part penetrates from below near a front end of the pair of protruding pieces 121 b of the hinge bracket 121, and an upper end is an upper end. A portion that extends above the protruding piece 121b and extends horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame is rotatably inserted into the upper hinge hole 511 a for the door frame of the upper hinge body 511 of the upper frame body hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

  The flange member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is covered between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121 around a portion extending vertically of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is urged upward by the lock spring 124 via the flange member 123.

  The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by a lock spring 124, and a horizontally extending portion at the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower projecting piece. By abutting on the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame projects a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b.

  When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the hinge assembly 120 moves the entire upper hinge pin 122. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 allows the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to be inserted into or pulled out of the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the main frame upper hinge member 510 from below. it can. By inserting the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the body frame upper hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 in the front view can be hinged with respect to the body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

  Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with a door frame lower hinge pin 126 of a door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thus, the door frame 3 can be hinged in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1-8. Hinge member under door frame]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The hinge member 125 below the door frame is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a rectangular flat plate-like mounting piece 125a, a flat protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. And a hinge pin 126 below the door frame (see FIG. 22) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of the front end 125b.

  The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The hinge pin 126 below the door frame is a cylindrical metal rod, and a tapered chamfer is applied to the outer periphery of the lower end. The hinge pin 126 below the door frame, when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, is coaxial with a portion of the protruding piece 125b that extends vertically above and below the hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame. Installed.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main frame side lower hinge member. Can be.

[3-1-9. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The cylinder lock 130 is mounted on the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locking. The cylinder lock 130 has a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a regular A rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from behind, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and moves forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches cut out. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed such that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the rotation of the rotation transmission member 133 is achieved by inserting a pair of projections of the transmission cylinder 654 into a pair of notches. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder main body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252 h of the plate unit main body 252 in the plate unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1-10. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and play the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate pull button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game balls B are supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b opening below the entrance 141a. Is a box-shaped front cover 141 having an open front end, and a game ball which has entered a front cover 141 which is formed in a box shape having a front end opened and closed at the rear end thereof, which penetrates in a front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a hit ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball firing device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. At the rear side of the ball 141, a ball removing member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b, and the game balls B on the partition portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 are provided one by one in the rear cover 14. The ball feeding member 144 is rotatably supported around a vertically extending axis between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. And a ball feeding solenoid 145.

  As shown in the drawing, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 disposed on the right side of the entrance 141a when viewed from the front, and a ball ejection member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball ejection member 143 on the left side of the ball outlet 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 described later extends forward from 141c. The front cover 141 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit for removing the upper bowl ball 240 is provided. Further, a portion that is open rearward on the upstream end side of the ball guide path 241c is formed to be closed from the rear side.

  The ball removing member 143 has a partition part 143a below the entrance 141a and between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b, the upper surface of which is lower in the direction of the ball feeding member 144, and a partition part 143a. Around the axis extending downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bent in a V-shape from near the center in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod portion 143b rotatably supported by the rotating rod portion 143b, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from an upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b below the operating rod 143c. And a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side to the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34A). The operating rod 143c is connected to the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray removing slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper tray removing button 222 of the tray unit 200 via the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 (see FIG. (Upper surface).

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking portion 144a having a fan shape in a plan view centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction and facing the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removing member 143, and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a. The ball holder 144b includes an arc-shaped recess 144b extending from the end toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holder 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the sphere holding portion 144b of the sphere feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size that can hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod 144c disposed at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation in the left-right direction.

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and a ball holding portion 144b in a direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and a ball holding portion 144b in which the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is designed to pivot between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is at the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball firing device 540, and enters the partition 143a from the entrance 141a. The movement of the game ball B toward the ball holding unit 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) is blocked by the blocking unit 144a, and the game ball B stays on the partition unit 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partitioning portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the hit ball supply port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition 143a is held in the ball holding unit 144b.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip swings up and down by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip that swings up and down in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 for rotating the ball feeding member 144 about an axis extending in the up-down direction while rotating about an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the movement of the ball.

  The ball feeding operation rod 146 includes an iron plate 146 a at a position below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward. Have been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is drawn toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the magnetic force generated when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven. The left end portion near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. Thereafter, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears, and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, so that the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves around the right end part downward. To return to the initial state. As a result, the ball feeding operation rod 146 causes the ball feeding solenoid 145 to swing the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 in the vertical direction.

  The ball feeding crank 147 is engaged with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and is engaged with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft 147b that is disposed on the opposite side to the side and that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extending upward from the shaft 147b. And a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35 (b)) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

  The ball feeding unit 140 drives the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 moves the ball feeding operating rod 146 away from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip thereof is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 144 is located at the supply position. Also, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is sucked by the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145, and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held at the holding position. To rotate. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball firing device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 168) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is configured to apply a moment such that it rotates in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the ball removing member 143 rotatably supported by the shaft or the weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removing member 143 contacts the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper ball removing slider 242 operated by pressing the upper ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. In the normal state, the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removing portion 141b to partition the ball. The game ball B does not invade.

  Then, when the player presses the upper plate removing button of the plate unit downward, the upper plate removing slider slides downward together with the operation transmitting portion, and the operating rod 143c moves with the downward movement of the operation transmitting portion. Also move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball removing member 143 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the partition 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to partition. Is released. As a result, the game ball B entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball guide path 241c of the unit 240 after the upper plate ball is removed from the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

  In addition, since the upper countersunk ball removing slider 242 in which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the operating member 143c of the removing member 143 contacts is formed by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition 143a. , The impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball punching member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B can be separated from the partitioning portion. At 143a, it is possible to prevent bouncing.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) which is recessed forward and to the upper right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142. A fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

  The anti-fraud member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape in a front view extends left and right, and is separated vertically at a substantially vertical center at a predetermined distance from the right side to the left, and It has a lower piece 148b and an inclined section 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the opposing sides of the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. . The upper piece 148a of the anti-fraud member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-fraud member 148 so that the right end in front view projects rearward. The lower piece 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. Thus, in a plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that spreads rightward.

  The anti-fraud member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

  According to this fraud prevention member 148, the illegal game ball B with the string attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140, and is attached to the illegal game ball B. When an illegal action is performed such that the illegally operated game ball B is put into and taken out of the first starting port or the like by operating the string, the illegal game ball B fired (hit by the ball launching device 540) is momentum. Thus, after the string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, the V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b is formed. Can be cut by the narrowed portion, and it is possible to prevent the illegal use of the illegal game ball B to which the string is attached from being performed.

[3-1-11. Foul cover unit]
Fail cover unit 150 of door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which has been fired by the ball firing device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As illustrated, the foul cover unit 150 is mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and has a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 with an open front side, and a flat lid member mounted on the front surface of the unit main body 151. 152.

  Fail cover unit 150 penetrates forward and backward at the upper left corner in front view, and penetrates a sphere passage 150a that communicates the normal guide path of the lower full tank path unit of main body frame 4 with the upper tray ball supply port of the plate unit; The through-hole passage 150a has a full-filled ball receiving port 150b that opens rearward on the lower right side in front view of the through-hole passage 150a and can communicate with the full-filled guide path of the lower full-filled ball path unit of the main body frame 4. .

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 opens upward on the right side in front view of the full tank receiving port 150b and does not reach the gaming area 5a despite being fired by the ball firing device of the main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving port 150c for receiving a game ball B (a foul ball) and a game ball B that is opened forward near the lower right corner in front view and received by the full tank receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c. And a ball discharge port 150d that discharges forward and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port of the plate unit.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharging port 150d by the unit body 151 and the cover member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passage 150e having a possible area is provided.

  The through ball passage 150a is formed so as to extend over both the unit body 151 and the cover member 152. The full tank receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150 e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  Further, foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of storage passage 150e, and has a flat movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to unit body 151 and lid member 152, and movable piece 153. And a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

  When the inside of the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 moves into the storage passage 150e to some extent. Game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. Then, the movable piece 153 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. This makes it possible to determine that the lower plate 202 is full with the game balls B, and stops the further payout of the game balls B when the full tank is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. At the same time, the fact can be notified to a player, a staff member of a game hall, or the like, and a prompt can be made to cancel the fullness of the lower plate 202.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through ball passage 150a. 613 is provided with a door opening / closing contact portion 150f with which the operating protrusion 613a can contact (see FIG. 91). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined such that the rear surface moves forward as the rear surface goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 abuts on the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b ( Front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is detachably mounted. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and The front of the area 5a is closed.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-like glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attaching portion 101h, and the inside of the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to the door frame base 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. And a mounting member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending in a flat plate shape outward from a position below the upper left and right corners in front view, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the projection 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into a space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161 respectively, and are separated from each other so as to form a space between each other (see FIG. 97).

  The glass unit mounting member 163 includes a disk-shaped base 163a rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes from the base 163a in a rod shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. Projecting portion 163b. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

  In order to attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is positioned above the base 163a. I do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking pieces 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 are inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated such that the protrusion 163b is positioned below the base 163a, and the protrusion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thus, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, it can be removed in the reverse procedure. Thus, the glass unit 160 is detachable from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is at a rotational position located below the base 163a, the protruding portion 163b regulates the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit attachment member 163, the projection 163b does not rotate to a position above the base 163a. Therefore, the regulation of the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not released naturally, and the glass unit 160 does not naturally come off the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 29 and FIG. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 has a flat main body 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat rear protruding piece 172 projecting rearward shortly along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed such that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. The upper end of the main body 171 is formed along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002, an out guiding part 1003, a part of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000 described later. The pachinko machine 1 is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear projecting piece 172 also projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. A rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state where the rear projecting piece 172 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  The rear protruding piece 172 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state where the rear protruding piece 172 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, the game ball B (the game ball B fired by the ball firing device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not abut on the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the game area. The hitting of the game ball B into 5a is not inhibited.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  In the state where the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a portion where the front surface of the main body 171 contacts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161) and projects rearward from the lower side of the main body 171. The removed rearward projecting piece 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 has a state in which the rear protruding piece 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009 prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as exploded from the front, and FIG. 38B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit exploded from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by a player to drive the game ball B in the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Things.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182. A cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181, a handle decoration board 184 mounted on the front side of the cover base 183 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the handle decoration board 184. And a handle cover 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183.

  The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 behind the handle 182 and a handle 182 attached to the front end, and is rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181 to the outer periphery. A handle member 181 having a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 188; A handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base and the base 186.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to an initial rotation position (a counterclockwise rotation end in front view). The urging handle return spring 190 and one end side attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 urged in the direction.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end side projecting outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single button 193 whose end side is rotatably mounted on an axis extending back and forth on the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a single button mounted on the handle base 181 by detecting a pressing operation of the single button 193. An operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 has a cylindrical base 181a extending forward and backward, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding in the radial direction from the front end of the base 181a, and a depression from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three grooves 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. The three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a in the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, the base 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102, and the ridges 102c are respectively formed in the three grooves 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

  The handle 182 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d, which protrude outward from the outer peripheral surface in a circumferential direction, and a rotating shaft (a shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, and the other end of the handle return spring 190 is locked. And a locking projection 182f.

  The four first projections 182a, the second projections 182b, the third projections 182c, and the fourth projections 182d are sequentially provided in a clockwise direction in a front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a is formed such that a side surface in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front of a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulges outward, and the first protrusion 182a is the opposite side. Side is concave (gouge) so as to curve inward. The second projection 182b is such that a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first projection 182a by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees in a clockwise direction. It protrudes slightly lower. The second protrusion 182b has a side surface in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front of the most protruding portion bulging outward, and the opposite side surface in the counterclockwise direction curves inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

  The third protrusion 182c is such that a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from a most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees in a clockwise direction. It protrudes at about half the height. The side surface of the third protrusion 182c is substantially linearly inclined on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is more gradually inclined than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction, which is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c by a clockwise rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and It protrudes slightly higher. The side surfaces of both sides of the fourth protrusion 182d are substantially linearly inclined, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle cover 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and round, and has translucency. The handle cover 185 has a lens member formed three-dimensionally of a transparent member inside. The handle cover 185 is illuminated and decorated by appropriately illuminating the LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184.

  The handle unit 180 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle mounting member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined such that the right end side is located behind the left end side in plan view and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 180 that is attached via is also inclined outwardly in plan view (in other words, its tip end is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). To be fixed to the door frame 3. This makes it easy for the player to grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the rotation operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor. When the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball firing device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player contacts the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting from the player, and the player touches the handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is activated with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 by some method without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. For this reason, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and cannot hit the game ball B. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 in a different manner from the original and playing the game, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  In addition, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while the player rotates the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the handle control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 controls the handle unit 180. The driving of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thus, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and the operation before the operation of the single-shot button 193 is performed by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

  Further, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 is most rotated clockwise in a front view. Then, when the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 182d is pressed by the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, the handle 182 can be maintained in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state by changing the handle 182 by using the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, The player's feeling of fatigue can be reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

[3-5. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The plate unit 200 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball provided below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 or the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 mounted on the front surface of the plate base unit 210. , And an effect operation unit 300 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

  The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending in the left and right directions, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having the upper plate 201, and a right side of the upper plate main body 212. A mounting base 213 mounted on the mounting base 213 and protruding forward, a plate unit relay board 214 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213, a ball rental operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213, The unit includes an upper tray removing unit 230 attached below the mounting base 213, and an upper tray removing unit 240 attached behind the upper tray removing unit 230.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to a lower part of the front of the dish unit base 211 and has a lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202, and is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252, a lower dish ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, an upper left dish decoration unit 270 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit main body 252 with a left and right space therebetween, and A dish upper right decoration unit 275, a dish lower left decoration unit 280 and a dish lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The rendering operation unit 300 includes, as the rendering operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 for rotatably mounting the transmission ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to a lower surface of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 for decorating the effect operation ring 330 with light, a decorative substrate cover 353 for covering the upper side of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and the operation unit base 320. Vibration speaker 354, an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330, and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And

  The plate unit 200 is entirely bulged forward, and the effect operation unit 300 is disposed so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 faces obliquely upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. A ball rental operation unit 220 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300 with the upper plate 201, and a lower plate 202 is disposed on the left side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5-1. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212. The upper plate 201 is formed in a container shape that bulges forward to a large extent on the left side from the left and right center in front view and opens upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion which is about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges forward most. The upper plate 201 has a front end receding rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in a front view, and a depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 46). ). The upper plate 201 is inclined so that the entire bottom surface including the guide passage portion 201a is lower on the right end side, and the right end side in front view of the guide passage portion 201a is sunk below the ball lending operation unit 220.

  In a state where the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface thereof is positioned at a position below the upper plate ball supply port 211 a of the plate unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211 e. B is inclined so as to be lower toward a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. Thereby, the game balls B released forward from the upper dish ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper dish 201, and the received game balls B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper dish feeding port 211e.

  The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal grounding member 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B contacts (rolls), thereby causing the game ball B to contact (roll). It is possible to remove static electricity charged to B.

[3-5-2. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game balls B, and has a lower plate ball hole 202a which penetrates up and down the bottom wall so that the game balls B can be discharged. The lower bowl 202 is closed by a lower bowl removing unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially square shape having a plan view extending left and right, and a front end on the left side from the center in the left and right direction projects forward from the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate hole 202a penetrating vertically, which is disposed near the front end near the right end. The lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate hole 202a. The lower bowl 202 of the lower bowl 202 is located below the effect operation unit 300 in front of the lower bowl supply port 211c in a state where the lower bowl 202 is assembled to the pan unit 200.

  The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c while the lower plate hole 202a is closed, and open the lower ball hole 202a. Can be discharged below the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). In addition, in a state where the lower dish ball hole 202a is opened, the lower dish ball hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. The released game balls B can be promptly discharged downward from the lower bowl extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5-3. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 of the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there. The dish base unit 210 is mounted below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are mounted on the front surface.

  The plate base unit 210 is a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having the plate 201. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 which is mounted on the upper right side of the upper plate main body 212 in the upper front part of the plate unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and which is mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213 on the front side of the plate unit base 211. And a dish unit relay board 214.

  The plate base unit 210 includes a ball rental operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213, and an upper plate ball removal unit 230 mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. And a unit 240 for removing an upper tray ball attached to the rear of the tray unit base 211 behind the unit 230 for removing the upper tray ball.

[3-5-3a. Dish unit base]
The plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the right and left direction over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (a shallow open rear portion). (Box shape).

  The plate unit base 211 penetrates forward and backward near the upper left corner in a front view, and extends rearward and downward under the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b having a punched metal mounted on the front side, a lower tray ball supply port 211c penetrating back and forth at a lower portion on the left side with respect to the right and left center in front view, and extending rearward in a tubular manner; A cutout portion 211d, which is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass therethrough, on the right side wall of the portion that extends cylindrically behind the ball supply port 211c, and front and back at the upper right side in front view of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. And an upper plate ball feed port 211e which extends vertically and has an upper portion located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

  Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward to the right of the upper plate ball feed port 211e, and has a mounting protrusion 211f on which the mounting base is mounted, and an upper portion at the left of the upper plate ball feed port 211e. A slider insertion opening 211g through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray ball removing slider 242 of the upper tray removing unit 240 penetrates forward and backward below the tray body, and penetrates forward and backward at the lower right corner in front view. A handle insertion opening 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates back and forth near the right corner in front view. Port 211i.

  The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is opened to the rear wall of the upper plate 201 in a state where the upper plate ball supply port 211a is assembled to the door frame 3, and the cylindrical rear end thereof passes the upper plate ball for the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g penetrates from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 are supplied (paid) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

  In a state where the lower dish ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end is opened to the rear wall of the lower dish 202, and the cylindrical rear end is connected to the lower dish ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball outlet 150 d of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game balls B flowing in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The downstream end of the ball guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after the upper ball is removed is connected to a notch 211d formed at a portion of the lower ball supply port 211c that extends in a cylindrical shape. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 are moved to the upper plate ball outlet 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feed unit 140, by operating the upper ball drain button 222. The ball is discharged from the lower bowl supply port 211c into the lower bowl 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 after the tray is removed.

  The upper bowl feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper bowl removing unit 240 when assembled to the bowl base unit 210. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5-3b. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211, and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper part and the rear part opened. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and the left side is larger than the left and right center in front view and bulges forward. The upper plate main body 212 has a front end that is receded rearward from the part that swells most forward to the right in front view, and a depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined such that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 has its upper part near the right end closed.

  The upper plate main body 212 is attached so that a portion near the right end, which is closed at the top, is sunk below the ball rental operation unit 220 in a state where the upper plate main body 212 is assembled to the plate unit 200. The upper plate main body 212 has an effect operation unit attachment portion 212a formed at an upper middle portion in the left-right direction, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5-3c. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the plate unit base 211, and the ball rental operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape whose upper part is open. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion hole 213a vertically penetrating near the left end, and a through hole 213b vertically penetrating at the rear right corner.

  The front slider 232 of the unit for removing upper and lower balls 230 is inserted through the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. In addition, a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted into the through hole 213b.

[3-5-3d. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 includes the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the upper left decorative board 273, the upper right decorative board 278, the lower left decorative board 283, and the lower right decorative board 288. , And for relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The plate unit relay board 214 is attached to the front of the plate unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f. When the plate unit relay board 214 is attached to the plate unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211.

[3-5-3e. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The ball rental operation unit 220 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 via the mounting base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, and sends cash to a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After a predetermined number of game balls B are inserted into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 after the player or the prepaid card is inserted, the remaining amount of cash or the prepaid card inserted into the ball rental machine is displayed, or the ball rental machine is used. To return the cash or the prepaid card inserted in the game ball B after renting out the game ball B.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper flat ball removal button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper flat ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is disposed to the right of the extraction button 222 and has a translucency, a ball lending button 224 that is disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation It includes a return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the base 223, and a ball rental display unit (not shown) disposed below the rear of the ball rental operation base 223.

  The upper bowl removing button 222 protrudes upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221 and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display section is constituted by three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 while emitting light.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. When a ball rental button 224 is pressed after a prepaid card with cash or balance is inserted into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game ball B that has been lent is deducted and returned to the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine. The ball lending display section displays the amount of cash or prepaid card remaining in the ball lending machine. An error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5-3f. Unit for removing the upper plate ball and unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit 230 for removing the upper tray ball and the unit 240 for removing the upper tray ball in the tray base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. When the upper ball removing button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, the upper ball removing unit 230 and the upper ball removing unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to form the upper plate 201. This is for discharging the game balls B stored therein to the lower plate 202.

  The upper bowl removing unit 230 is attached to the front of the bowl unit base 211 to the left of the mounting protrusion 211f and below the ball lending operation unit 220. The unit for removing the upper tray ball 240 is attached to a rear portion of the unit for removing the upper tray ball 230 on the rear surface of the tray unit base 211.

  The upper bowl removing unit 230 is attached to the front of the bowl unit base 211 and has a vertically extending tubular front base 231, and a front barrel 231 that is vertically movably inserted into the barrel of the front base 231. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 near the front of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically and has an upper end abutting on the lower end of the upper counter ball removing button 222 and a lower end of the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper counter ball removing slider 242 of the upper counter ball removing unit 240. It is in contact with the upper surface.

  The unit 240 for removing the upper tray ball is provided with a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball feed port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. A slider 242 that is slidably mounted on the upper plate, a spring 243 that urges the slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 that is mounted on the rear side of the rear base 241. It has.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion to which the upper ball removing slider 242 is slidably attached and opens forward, and has a ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving port 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward at the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides the ball backward, and a game at a position lower than the ball feeding guide path 241b at the rear surface of the rear base 241. And a guiding path 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in rear view.

  The ball receiving port 241a is assembled with the plate base unit 210, and forwardly passes through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at the position where it opens. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed such that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower portion in a state where the ball feeding guiding path 241b is assembled to the door frame 3. Thereby, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

  The portion extending to the left and right of the ball guide path 241c protrudes rightward in rear view from the portion where the upper plate ball slide slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. And is open on the right side in rear view. A portion extending left and right of the ball guide path 241c is closed by a rear cover 244 on the rear side. In a state where the ball guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper portion of a portion extending vertically below the ball feed guide path 241b is located in front of the ball outlet 141b of the ball feed unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending left and right in the rear view is formed so as to be connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c in the dish unit base 211. Thereby, the game ball B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202 via the ball guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

  The upper bowl removing slider 242 has a square shape in a front view, and has an operation receiving portion 242a protruding forward from the upper left corner, and protruding rearward from a rear surface on the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. And an operation transmission unit 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined such that the upper surface is positioned downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  In the state where the slider 242 for removing the upper tray ball is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242 a penetrates the slider insertion opening 211 g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the operation receiving portion 242 a The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper bowl removing unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the head. Further, in the state in which the upper plate ball removing slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242 b protrudes rearward of the rear base 241, and the operation of the ball removing member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface. The rod 143c is in contact.

  The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper countersunk slider 242, and urges the upper counterslider 242 upward. Therefore, the slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by opposing the urging force of the spring 243.

  The unit for removing the ball from the upper ball 230 and the unit after removing the ball from the upper ball 240 are positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the slider for the upper ball from the ball is removed. The upper ball removing button 222 is positioned at the moving end upward through the front slider 232 in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. In addition, since the upper countersunk ball removing slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c abutting on the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition 143a of the ball removing member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b to partition between them.

  Accordingly, in a state where the upper plate ball removing button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and are sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving portion 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 through the entrance 141a and the ball feed member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper disc removing button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper disc removing slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the operation of the upper disc removing slider 242 is performed. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball removing member 143 rotates by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removing member 143, and the partitioning portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. Thereby, the game ball B which has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b opened below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball ejection guide path 241c, and is then lowered from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. The game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the plate 202 and is discharged into the lower plate 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper tray removing button 222 is released, the upper tray removing slider 242 is moved upward by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is removed via the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball pullout button 222 is raised, the ball pullout member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c abutting on the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the partition 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball dropout 141b. It will return to the original state.

  In this manner, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is sent to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feed unit 140 by the unit for removing the upper plate ball 230 and the unit for removing the upper plate ball 240, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5-4. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 of the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has the lower dish 202, is attached to the front of the dish base unit 210, and has the effect operation unit 300 attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to a lower part of the front of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish 202, and a dish unit base 251 covering the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the dish 211, a lower dish emptying unit 260 attached to the lower face of the lower dish body 251, and a dish attached to the upper part of the front face of the dish unit body 252 while being left and right apart from each other. The upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275, and the lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit attached below the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 on the entire surface of the main unit 252, respectively. 285.

[3-5-4a. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that extends left and right and that is open at the top and rear. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a lower left portion of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 from the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

  The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in plan view and extends left and right, and a front end on the left side from the center in the left and right direction projects forward from the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball hole 202a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the right front end in plan view. The lower plate main body 251 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate hole 202a. The lower bowl removing hole 202a is openably and closably closed by a lower bowl removing unit 265.

  The lower plate main body 251 is in a state where the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252 in a state where the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250. When the lower dish main body is assembled to the dish unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211, and the lower dish ball outlet hole 202a is connected to the lower dish ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5-4b. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front of the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210, and decorates the front of the plate unit 200. The plate unit body 252 protrudes so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and protrudes forward on the left side in the left-right direction on the lower side. The upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape opened rearward.

  The plate unit main body 252 bulges forward from the left and right ends to the center in the left and right direction at the upper part and extends downward and is separated to the left and right. Has a lower front decorative portion 252b bulging forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251; and a bottom plate portion 252c extending rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. .

  The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with an open rear, and have a dish upper left decorative unit 270, a dish lower left decorative unit 280, a dish upper right decorative unit 275, and a dish lower right decorative unit on the front surfaces thereof. 285 are attached. The right side of the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower end of the right upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  The plate unit main body 252 has a lower plate opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging portion 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows a player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed such that the top and bottom become wider toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending forward and backward by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

  Further, the plate unit body 252 includes a front notch 252e cut out upward from a lower front end of a portion of the lower front decorative portion 252b covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. And a bottom notch 252f which is cut out at a portion below the bottom. In the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f, the lower tray removing unit 260 is inserted.

  Further, the plate unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and has a handle insertion opening 252g through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion opening 252g. The effect operation unit is formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b back and forth and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side swelling portions 252a that are located at the center in the left-right direction. And a production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which the attachment 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width that is approximately １ ／ of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

  The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the plate base unit 210 when assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. . Further, in a state where the lower plate removing unit 260 is assembled with the lower plate removing unit 260, the lower plate removing button 260 of the lower unit removing unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate removing base 260 of the lower unit removing unit 260 is attached. The bottom notch 252f is closed so that the lower surfaces are on the same plane.

[3-5-4c. Lower plate empty unit]
The lower dish removing unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower dish ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251, and by opening and closing the lower dish ball extracting hole 202 a, the game balls B are stored in the lower dish 202 or the game balls B are discharged from the lower dish 202. It is to make it.

  The lower plate removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and has a plate-like lower plate removing base 261 having a through hole vertically penetrating at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower plate removing unit 261. A slider 262 mounted on the upper surface side of the base 261 so as to be slidable forward and backward, a lower counter ball removal button 263 mounted on a front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 for urging the slider 262 forward; The slider 262 is provided with a lower ball removing cover 265 that opens and closes a through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower ball removing cover 265 through the slider 262 in an open state.

  The lower plate empty base 261 is formed in a size to close the bottom cutout 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and is vertically moved to a position corresponding to the lower plate empty hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (lower plate main body 251). A penetrating through hole is formed. The through hole of the lower bowl removing hole 261 is formed in the same size as the lower bowl removing hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-back direction, and is slidably mounted in the left-right center of the lower dish removal base 261 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that protrudes upward in a columnar shape.

  The lower ball removing cover 265 is attached to the lower ball removing base 261 at a position on the left side of the slider 262 at a position on the left side of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically. And the right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower bowl removing lid 265 is formed with a left-right extending slit into which the protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  In the state where the lower dish removing unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish removing base 261 closes the bottom cutout 252f of the dish unit main body 252, and the lower face of the lower dish removing base 261 is closed. It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit main body 252. In the lower tray removing unit 260, in a normal state, the slider 262 is located at the front moving end by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower tray removing lid 265 is located immediately above the through hole. And the through hole (lower countersunk ball hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower bowl 202 is closed by the lower bowl removing lid 265, and the lower bowl 202 can store the game ball B. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower bowl removing button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

  In a normal state, when the lower counter button 263 is pressed rearward to move rearward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower counter button 263. Becomes When the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower bowl removing lid 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower bowl removing lid 265 centers on the left end side and the right end side moves backward. It turns in the moving direction. Then, the right end side of the lower dish ball removing cover 265 located immediately above the through hole moves rearward from the position of the through hole, whereby the through hole is opened and the lower dish ball removing hole 202a is opened. The game balls B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate hole 202a.

  When the slider 262 is moved rearward by the pressing of the lower plate removing button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower plate removing button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the urging force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower bowl removing lid 265 is kept rotating backward, the lower bowl removing hole 202a is kept open, and the game balls B in the lower bowl 202 are continuously connected. It can be discharged downward.

  To close the lower bowl removing hole 202a from this state, when the lower bowl removing button 263, which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b, is pressed backward, the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. You. Then, when the pressing of the lower ball removing button 263 is released, the slider 262 is moved forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower ball removing button 263 is returned to a state in which it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower countersunk ball cover 265 rotates and the right end side is located immediately above the through-hole, and the lower countersunk ball hole 202a is closed by the lower countersunk ball cover 265. Thereby, the game balls B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5-4d. Plate upper left decorative unit and plate upper right decorative unit]
The upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper front side of the upper side bulging portion 252 a of the dish unit main body 252. The upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 above the dish unit 200.

  The upper left dish decoration unit 270 has a semi-cylindrical shape, extends left and right and has a translucent upper left dish decoration 271, an upper left dish reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the upper left dish decoration 271, And a dish upper left decorative board 273 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on its front surface.

  The upper left dish 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper left decorative body 271 has a shape in which a semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending diagonally to the upper left at the left end, and a central axis extending left and right at the right end, and the half cylinder is twisted. Is formed. The upper left decorative body 271 is formed in milky white.

  The upper left dish reflector 272 is inserted from the rear inside the upper left decorative body 271, and a through-hole is formed in a portion of the upper left dish substrate 273 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper left decorative board 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish upper left decorative body 271 can be made to emit light.

  The upper left plate decoration unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. And is continuous. Since the upper left dish decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction in the upper left dish decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper left decoration board 273 emit light, the entire front of the upper left dish decoration 271 is illuminated. Light emission decoration can be performed substantially uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The plate upper right decorative unit 275 is a semi-cylindrical shape, extends right and left, and has a translucent plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the plate upper right decorative body 276, and And a dish upper right decorative board 278 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side.

  The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved manner so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a shape in which a semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending obliquely right and upper at the right end, and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the half cylinder is twisted. Is formed. The dish upper right decorative body 276 is formed in milky white.

  The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper right decorative board 278 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decorative board 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish upper right decorative body 276 can be made to emit light.

  The dish upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. And is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decorative board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is illuminated. Light emission decoration can be performed substantially uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-4e. Bottom left dish decoration unit and bottom right dish decoration unit]
The lower left dish decoration unit 280 and the lower right dish decoration unit 285 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower left dish decoration unit 280 and the lower right dish decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front side of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252 so as to extend along the upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275, respectively. Can be The lower left dish decoration unit 280 and the lower right dish decoration unit 285 cooperate with the upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the dish unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

  The lower left dish decoration unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape, extends left and right, and has a translucent lower dish decoration 281, a lower left dish reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left dish decoration 281, A lower left dish decoration board 283 mounted on the rear side of the lower dish reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front.

  The lower left dish decoration 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. Is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. In the lower left dish decoration 281, a semicircular arc bulging forward with a smaller radius than the upper left decoration 271 and the upper right decoration 276 has a central axis extending slightly obliquely to the upper left rear at the left end, and a center at the right end. The shaft extends left and right, and is formed in a shape such that a half cylinder is bent. The lower left corner of the dish 281 has a spherical shape at the left end. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the lower left decorative plate 281 becomes thinner toward the left end. The lower left decoration 281 is formed in milky white.

  The lower left dish reflector 282 is inserted from the rear inside the lower left decorative body 281, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the lower left decorative board 283 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left dish decoration board 283 are full-color LEDs, and the lower left decoration body 281 can be made to emit light by emitting light.

  The lower left dish decoration unit 280 is located on the lower left side of the upper left dish decoration unit 270 in a state where the lower left decoration unit 280 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end of the lower left dish decoration unit 312 b of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300 is located. It is continuous with the left end. In the lower left dish decoration unit 280, the left end of the lower left decoration body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the left end appears to be sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower left dish decoration unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decoration piece 281 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower left decoration board 283 emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decoration piece 281 is illuminated. Light emission decoration can be performed substantially uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The lower right decoration unit 285 is a semi-cylindrical shape, extends right and left, and has a translucent lower right decoration 286 and a lower right lower dish attached to the rear side of the lower right decoration 286. It comprises a reflector 287 and a lower right decorative plate 288 mounted on the rear side of the lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  The dish lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as going from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the right upper side bulge 252a. The lower right dish decoration 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left decoration 271 and the upper right decoration 276. The central axis extends left and right, and is formed in a shape such that a half cylinder is bent. The right lower end of the dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the lower right decoration 286 becomes thinner toward the right end. The lower right decoration 286 is formed in milky white.

  The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted from the rear inside the dish lower right decorative body 286, and a through hole is formed in a part of the dish lower right decorative board 288 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right decoration plate 288 are full-color LEDs, and the lower right decoration body 286 can be illuminated by emitting light.

  The dish lower right decorative unit 285 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is located below the right end of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, and the left end is the dish center lower decorative body 312 b of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous with the right end of In the lower right dish decoration unit 285, the right end of the lower right decoration body 286 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the right end appears to be sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower right dish decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the lower right decoration piece 286 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the lower right decoration board 288 emit light, the lower right decoration body 286 The entire front surface can be almost uniformly illuminated and decorated, and it can be seen that the fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-5. Overall configuration of staging operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as viewed from the direction in which the effect operation button moves forward and backward. FIG. 52A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. The effect operation unit 300 is provided at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200, decorates the plate unit 200, and, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates and participates in the effect. Is what you can do. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player. The rendering operation unit 301 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about に 対 し て of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. . The pressing operation unit 303 is disposed at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a center pressing operation unit 303 a having a diameter slightly larger than half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, and an outer periphery of the center pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operation unit 302. And an annular outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b disposed between the inner periphery and the inner periphery.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotating operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330 An operating ring transmission gear 350 for transmitting rotation to and from the portion 302 and a gear mounting member 351 for rotatably mounting the operating ring transmission gear 350 to the operating section base 320 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330 and has a plurality of effect operation ring decoration substrates 352 and effect operation ring decoration substrates 352. The decoration board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the display unit, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit facing the inside of the effect operation ring 330. An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 are provided.

[3-5-5a. Production operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left and right direction of the dish unit 200. The production operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape with the upper part and the rear part opened.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is depressed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 attached to the upper front end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulging forward, A dish center upper reflector 313 attached from the rear inside the dish center decoration body 312a of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center reflector 313 and capable of irradiating light forward are mounted. The dish center upper decorative board 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 attached from the rear inside the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the front light And a decorative board 316 below the center of the dish on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating the LED are mounted.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape that bulges downward at the front side from the center rearward in the front-rear direction, and the rear side of the unit lower cover 311 is a production operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252. 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state such that an axis perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed on an upper end edge extending in a front semicircular shape is located forward as it goes upward. In the present embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a formed at the lowest part when assembled to the dish unit 200.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular shape whose front view is bulged forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and is formed on the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a dish center upper decorative body 312a in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends along a front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a forward part below the dish center upper decorative body 312a. A lower plate center decoration 312b in which the protruding semi-arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semi-arc shape. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312 b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

  The plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by halving a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius), and extending in a semi-arc shape with the split surface toward the center. It is formed in a shape bent as described above. The lower plate center decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the plate center upper decoration 312a, and the plate center lower decoration 312b has a slightly smaller thickness than the plate center upper decoration 312a. Is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. In addition, when assembled to the plate unit 200, the left and right ends of the dish upper decorative body 312a are connected to the right end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, respectively, and the dish center lower decorative body The left and right ends of 312b are respectively connected to the right end of the lower left decorative unit 280 and the left end of the lower right decorative unit 285. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is formed in milky white.

  The unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and its front end is the front end of the door frame 3. The distance from the front of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is equal to the door frame. The distance is about の of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular shape bulging forward, and is inserted from the rear into the dish center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 and attached thereto. The dish center reflector 313 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center decoration board 314 from leaking rearward (inward). The dish center decoration board 314 is formed in a semicircular shape along the dish center decoration body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center decoration board 314 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center decoration body 312a can be made to emit light by emitting light.

  The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular shape bulging forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312. The dish bottom reflector 315 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish bottom decorative board 316 from leaking backward (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and has a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center lower decorative substrate 316 are full-color LEDs, and the light emitting decoration of the dish center lower decorative body 312b can be performed by emitting light.

  Since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the semi-circularly extending middle part of the upper plate decoration 312a and the lower plate decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312, When the LED of the upper center decorative substrate 314 and the LED of the lower plate center decorative substrate 316 emit light, the whole can be almost uniformly light-emitting and decorated, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 has a front end protruding farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 when assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the plate center upper decorative body 312a is continuous with the plate upper left decorative body 271 and the plate upper right decorative body 276, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b is the plate lower left decorative body 281 and the plate right. It is continuous with the lower decorative body 286. As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by integral decoration.

[3-5-5b. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the effect operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is the effect operation unit mounting of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape whose upper part is opened.

  The operation unit base 320 has a substantially cubic box-shaped outer shape, and a main body 321 whose upper part is open, and extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer periphery. Flange portion 322, a plurality of (here, four) legs 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper mounting portion formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and mounted to the dish base unit 210. A portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that opens upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. The main body 321 has a vibration speaker 354 attached to the bottom wall from below, and a portion of the lower surface where the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, and can amplify the vibration and convert the vibration into sound such as voice or music and output the sound. it can.

  The leg 361b of the button unit base 361 of the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body 321. In the main body 321, a through hole for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321 is formed on the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the main body 321, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

  The outer diameter of the flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter substantially coincident with the inner circumference of the upper plate center decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the decoration substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear mounting member to mount the operation ring transmission gear rotatably around an axis extending left and right. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 projects upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 has a flange portion. 322 is exposed outside.

  When the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in a state where the vibration speaker 354 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to a lower surface of the main body 321.

[3-5-5c. Production operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55A is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 55B is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from the lower front. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by a player. The effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation section 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) approximately twice as large as the dimension in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and an inner diameter of approximately 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

  The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring mounting base 331 mounted on the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation section base 320, an annular rotating base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring mounting base 331, and a rotating base. A plurality of bushes 333 which are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the shaft 332 and are rotatably mounted around an axis which extends vertically to the ring mounting base 331, and which are mounted on the ring mounting base 331 to move the rotary base 332 upward. And a restricting ring retaining member 334.

  The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to a lower outer ring cover 335 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and a lower side of the outer ring cover 335. The outer ring lower cover 336 forming a part of the rotary operation unit 302 and the inner peripheral side of the ring outer upper cover 335 are mounted on the upper surface of the rotary base 332 to form a part of the rotary operation unit 302. And a ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a translucent annular shape.

  The outer diameter of the ring mounting base 331 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and the inner diameter is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is separated from the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge on which the rotating base 332 is mounted so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction, in the outer circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. And a boss 331b for cylindrically protruding upward from a plurality of (four in this case) portions for rotatably mounting the bush 333 and a circumferentially spaced outer side than the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. And a through hole 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of portions. The plurality of through-holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs on the effect operation ring decorative board 352.

  The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring attachment base 331, and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring attachment base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332a protruding downward from the lower surface and extending in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the rendering operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state where the ring gear 332a is assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a three-dimensional shape on the outer upper surface portion 335a and the outer upper surface portion 335a in which a circular arc constituting the outer and upper part of the circle extends in an annular shape. And a plurality of outer upper cover attachment portions 335c extending downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extending to the center side and arranged in the circumferential direction. I have. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc of a quarter of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative part 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attachment portion 335c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a, and is attached to the upper surface of the rotating base 332.

  The ring outer lower cover 336 has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc forming an outer and lower portion of a circle extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward and to the center side from the inside of the outer lower surface portion 336a. And a plurality of outer lower cover mounting portions 336b arranged in plural. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

  The ring inner cover 337 includes an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc forming an inner and upper part of a circle extends in an annular shape, and a tube extending downward from an inner end of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel with the central axis. A cylindrical surface portion 337b and an inner cover mounting portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which a circular arc extending in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner surface 337 b has the same cylindrical inner diameter as the rotary base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The outer upper cover 335, the outer lower cover 336, and the inner cover 337 are assembled to the rendering operation ring 330, and the outer upper surface 335a, the outer lower surface 336a, and the inner surface 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion of a half or more of a circle, and the entire portion has a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5-5d. Rotary drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57 (a) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 57 (b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation axis projects leftward. A drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342; a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343; and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. The gear cover 345, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably mounted in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and cover the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left. 346.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left.

  The rotation drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. I have. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detecting gear member 345 has a larger diameter (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) than the transmission gear 344, and a leftward protruding portion from the left side of the gear portion 345a. A plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive-side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detecting pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval apart in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detecting pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals different from integral multiples of the intervals of the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Accordingly, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them detects the detection piece 345b first. It has become. Thereby, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

  When the rotation drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper part of the gear part 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed part of the gear part 345a is the drive side gear part 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Meshes with In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 is located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 as a whole in a state where the rotation drive unit 340 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotation drive unit 340 drives the operation ring drive motor 342 to drive the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 through the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear. Can be rotated in the direction of. In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 causes the drive gear 343 to repeat forward and reverse rotations within a predetermined rotation angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342, thereby causing the rotary operation unit 302 to reciprocate and vibrate. it can.

  In addition, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the rotation drive unit 340 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring drive is performed in the same rotation direction as the rotated operation. By driving the motor 342, the rotation operation of the player can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling or a click feeling according to the content of the player participation type effect.

[3-5-5e. Transmission gear for operating ring]
The transmission ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and the gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing 325.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is a bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and rotates integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a to detect transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. And a drive-side gear portion 350b in the form of a spur gear meshing with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The ring gear 350a and the drive gear 350b have the same pitch circle diameter. The bevel gear ring side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 such that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320 from above and the gear attachment member 351 being attached to the operation portion base 320. Can be

  When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring gear 350a is meshed with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the drive gear 350b is The transmission drive gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 meshes with the gear 345a. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and also controls the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5-5f. Directional operation ring decorative board]
The effect operation ring decorative board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be light-emitting decorated by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which the ring is divided into front and rear, and is composed of a front decorative substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b on the rear side. On each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b, a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row along the outer periphery. The plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are full-color LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decorative board 352 is located below the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state where the effect operation ring decorative board 352 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a decorative substrate cover 353 having a transparent upper side. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed in a form divided into front and rear similarly to the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352 a from the upper side and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and passes through the decoration substrate cover 353 and the through-hole 331c of the ring attachment base 331 to form the rotation operation portion 302 on the outside of the ring. The cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be illuminated from inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration in which the LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5-5 g. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. It is.

  The vibration speaker 354 can output sound (sound) such as voice, sound effect, and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a vibration plate. In addition, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire production operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. At this time, the player gets a feeling as if the effect operation unit 300 was shaking. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device in which an eccentric weight is rotated by a motor, and can present a wider variety of effects to a player.

  The purpose of the vibration speaker 354 is to give sound information to vibrate the effect operation unit 301, and to give sound information so that vibration is obtained by resonance. Here, since the resonance depends on the characteristics of the vibrating speaker 354 attached to the gaming machine, the material and hardness of the member for attaching the vibrating speaker, and the mounting method, input sound information only at a specific frequency. In such a case, vibration may not be obtained without resonance due to variations in characteristics. In the present embodiment, in order to absorb the variation in these characteristics, the frequency of the input sound information is not a single frequency but is input as a frequency having a certain width. More specifically, a sine wave of 40 Hz ± 2 Hz, or 38 Hz to 42 Hz, is changed (swept) eight times per cycle, approximately one second, in units of 1 Hz. This is intermittently repeated for one second sweep input and one second later input again.

  In the assembling work of the gaming machine, the inspection (operation confirmation) of the vibrating speaker at the time of shipment is performed by operating the RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 for controlling the progress of the game. It is designed to be based on this. Specifically, when the inspector operates the RAM clear switch within a predetermined period when turning on the game machine (or when the inspector turns on the game machine while operating the RAM clear switch), the main control board 1310 transmits (outputs) a command for clearing and initializing the RAM to the peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500 described later. When the peripheral control board receives this command, the peripheral control board performs a vibration speaker operation confirmation process for inspecting (operating) the vibration speaker. The inspector can confirm the sound (sound) of the sound and music by the vibration speaker 354 and also confirm the vibration of the staging operation unit 300 by the vibration speaker 354 by the vibration speaker operation confirmation processing. .

[3-5-5h. Direction operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as viewed from the lower front. FIG. 62A is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lower position, and FIG. 62B is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the upper position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 includes a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

  The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery, and is arranged symmetrically with a button unit base 361 attached in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and a center axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward and in a columnar shape, and a disc-shaped connecting the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 to each other and having a circular outer shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is mounted between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. Disk-shaped lifting base 364 and a pair of guide shafts 362 A pair of lift springs 365 urges the provided lift base 364 is passed upwardly, and a.

  The effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 extending upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a columnar shape and having an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation axis on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button elevating drive motor 367 mounted to protrude upward, the spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368 mounted on the rotating shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-like driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevating cam drive gear member rotatably mounted by being rotated by the driven gear 369 so that the central shaft 366 is inserted therethrough. 370, the lower and upper cam drive gear member 370 are connected to the lower end, and the central shaft The elevating cam member 371 which is rotatably mounted and rotatably attached to the elevating base member 364, and the elevating driving gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam driving gear member 370 are covered from above. And a disc-shaped gear cover 372 mounted on the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Furthermore, the production operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted above the elevating base 364 so as to be movable vertically by a pair of guide shafts 362. Center button body 373, a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the center button body 373 and the elevating base 364 and urging the center button body 373 upward, and substantially the same as the center button body 373. A central button cover 375, which is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having a closed upper end with a diameter and is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover above the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. And a center button decoration board 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the center button main body 373 and the center button cover 375 constitute a center pressing operation section 303a.

  The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion of the upper surface of the elevating base 364 outside the center button main body 373 and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration board 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and an outer peripheral portion. An outer peripheral board cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration board 377 and the outer periphery of the central button body 373, and a portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 which covers the outer periphery of the central button body 373. A cylindrical outer decorative lens 379 having a three-dimensional decoration and disposed on the outer peripheral side and above the outer peripheral button decorative board 377, and ascending and descending so as to cover the outer peripheral and upper surfaces of the outer decorative lens 379. A transparent outer peripheral button attached to the base 364 with the central button cover 375 facing upward at the center Is provided with a bar 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b.

  Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. The pressing detection sensor 381 is attached to the button unit base 361. An elevation detection sensor 382 that detects the elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a and a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The outer diameter of the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320. The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lifting / lowering cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 mounted on the upper surface, and a pressing detection sensor 381 and a lifting detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is attached. The button unit base 361 has the lower end of the leg 361 b attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are mounted on the upper surface of the base main body 361a of the button unit base 361 forward and backward from the center, respectively, at a distance of half the diameter of the base main body 361a. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and the lower ends thereof are in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361, and the upper ends are in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

  The elevating base 364 has an outer diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which the pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b vertically penetrating at the center so as to allow the elevating cam member 371 to pass therethrough. An upright wall portion 364c that protrudes upward from the periphery of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d that project toward the inside of the central hole 364b near the lower end of the upright wall portion 364c. I have. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are rotatably mounted around the axis.

  The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be able to move up and down in a vertical direction by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into a pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 has a space in which the bottom part 373b of the center button body 373 can move between the upper base 363 and the upper part 363, while the upper end of the upright wall part 364c abuts on the upper base 363. Has formed. Further, the lifting base 364 is moved up and down by a pair of guide pins 364 d being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the lifting cam member 371.

  The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to a lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. And an elevation detecting piece 370c which is cylindrically protruded downwardly from and is notched at two locations facing each other, and is detected by an elevation detecting sensor 382. The lifting cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably mounted by inserting a central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably mounted by inserting a central shaft 366 at the center. The elevating cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar shape and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the lifting base 364.

  The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d; (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

  In addition, the lifting cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the lifting cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

  The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed as follows. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the cam portion 371a guides the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 to move the elevating base 364 up and down.

  The central button body 373 has a cylindrical tubular portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tubular portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts penetrating the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which the 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the upright wall 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom 373b. It includes a pressing detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b in a columnar shape and are inserted into the button spring 374.

  The center button body 373 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a cylindrical portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button main body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a protrudes above the upper base 363. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends shortly downward, and its lower end abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364, whereby the downward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the center button main body 373.

  The center button body 373 is urged upward by a pair of button springs 374 into which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that the lower ends extend downward through the elevating base 364, and the lower ends are attached with screws into which washers are inserted. When the washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f contacts the lower surface of the elevating base 364, the upward movement of the center button main body 373 is restricted.

  The pressing detection piece 373 e of the center button body 373 is moved up and down when the bottom 373 b (lower end of the center opening 373 d) of the center button body 373 comes into contact with the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. 364 is formed so as to penetrate downward. The center button body 373 is formed opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a smaller urging force than the lifting spring 365.

  The center button cover 375 includes a disc-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tube portion 373a of the center button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided so as to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. In the center button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375 b is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373 a of the center button body 373.

  A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the center button decoration board 376 are full color LEDs. The center button decoration board 376 can cause the center button cover 375 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the outer periphery button decoration board 377 are full color LEDs. The outer peripheral button decoration board 377 can make the outer peripheral decorative lens 379 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers an upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 and is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular board section 378 a is extended from the inner periphery of the board section 378 a in a cylindrical shape. A cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparent.

  In the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction upward are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is mounted on the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 above the substrate portion 378a. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a covering the outer periphery of the outer decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b extending from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a to the center. In the outer peripheral button cover 380, the lower end of the cylindrical portion 380a is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular portion 380b has an inner diameter substantially the same size as the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  When the effect operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the guide pins 364d of the lift base 364 are moved in a state where the lift base 364 is urged upward by a pair of lift springs 365, as shown in FIG. The lifting cam member 371 is inserted from below into a locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in a lowered position in which the elevating base 364 has moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. In this state, the center button main body 373 is located at the upper moving end by the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the center button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

  Therefore, in the state assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 projects slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrude upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

  In this state (the state shown in FIG. 62A), when the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward to move downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button body 373 is pressed. Is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation section 303a is detected. When the center pressing operation section 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the center button cover 375 has a height substantially coincident with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65 (c)).

  Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the center button main body 373 is pressed. There is no detection by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  In this lowered position, when the elevating drive gear 368 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the elevating cam drive is driven via the driven gear 369 meshed with the elevating drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the lifting cam member 371 connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. 62 moves rightward, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is moved from the locking portion 371c to the fourth position. Rolling to the left part of the locking portion 371c of the one cam 371b, and the lifting base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  Then, when the guide pin 364d that relatively rolls leftward along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d by the urging force of the elevating spring 365. At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises to the state of the ascending position.

  In the state of the ascending position, as shown in FIG. 62B, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the operation of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the state of the ascending position, the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevating base 364 is restricted. In the state of the ascending position, the positional relationship between the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the time of the lowering position is maintained. In addition, the entire pressing operation portion 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 has moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has protruded above the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  If the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved to the ascending position in a state in which they are assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are projected more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65 (b) and the like). reference).

  When the center button cover 375 (the center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in the state of the raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 are attached to the button spring 374. The central button body 373 moves downward against the force and comes into contact with the lifting base 364. When the center button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373 e of the center button body 373 protrudes below the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is connected to the button unit base 361. , The pressing detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

  When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward by a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374, After the center button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the lifting base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, and the lower end of the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and together with the elevating base 364, the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b) is also in the lowered position.

  As described above, when the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361 in a state where the center button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 projecting downward from the lifting base 364. Is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and pressing of the center button cover 375 (the center pressing operation unit 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b) is pressed downward by a force greater than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the state of the ascending position, the elevating base 364 is moved via the outer peripheral button cover 380 to the elevating spring. It moves downward against the urging force of 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the elevating base 364 are in the lowered position. However, since the center button cover 375 (central pressing operation part 303a) projects upward by the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button body The pressing detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the elevating base 364, and the pressing detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

  To return the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation section 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 rotates the elevating cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction in plan view. Then, in FIG. 62 (b), the third cam 371e in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves rightward (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevating base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d is moved to the first cam. Rolls along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c depressed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the original lowering position is restored.

[3-5-5i. Operation section relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to a rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 mounted on the rear surface of the main body section 321 of the operation section base 320, and an operation section relay board 392 mounted in the board box 391.

  The substrate box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled to the rendering operation unit 300. The operation section relay board 392 includes a dish center upper decoration board 314, a dish center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, an effect operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the center button decoration board 376, the outer periphery button decoration board 377, the press detection sensor 381, and the elevation detection sensor 382, and the connection between the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 and the relay. I have.

[3-5-5j. Operation of the production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the rendering operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the rendering operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65A is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 65B is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the plate unit when the operation unit is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 includes a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 includes a cylindrical center pressing operation unit 303a located at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and an annular outer circumference pressing operation unit disposed between the center pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. 303b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the outer ring upper cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The center pressing operation unit 303a is formed by the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer pressing unit 303b is formed by the outer button cover 380 and the outer substrate cover 378.

  The production operation unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 in a state where the front side of a virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the circular rotation operation unit 302 (production operation ring 330) is inclined to be lower. Accordingly, the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion 303 disposed in the ring of the rotary operation portion 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). .

  In the effect operation unit 300, in a normal state, the pressing operation unit 303 projects slightly upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. More specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 projects slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 63).

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. Rotates in the clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation ring 330 rotates counterclockwise in the plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and can rotate and reciprocate the rotary operation unit 302 by repeating forward and reverse rotations within a predetermined rotation angle range. This vibration is different from the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotary operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by a player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated clockwise in the left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and is rotated. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in left side view. The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b with the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the interval between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 that are separated in the circumferential direction is different from the interval between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , The interval is not an integral multiple. Thus, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

  In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in a left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. I do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the left side, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b of the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  Thus, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation unit 302 is driven to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be made heavy or a click feeling can be given.

  The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by the outer ring upper cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which a half or more arc of a circle extends annularly. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. And, as shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, and thus is formed in a shape that is easy to grasp by a player's hand. .

  This allows the player to touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated in a manner that the player can easily perform. Sex is raised. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can perform a rotation operation even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the lower position or the upper position. In addition, since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape below the effect operation ring 330. Thus, by turning on the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be light-embellished. Further, in the effect operation ring decoration board 352, a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, so that the plurality of LEDs arranged in order are rotated in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating can be made to emit light. Thereby, it is possible to give an illusion to a player as if an LED (decorative board) is provided in the rotating operation unit 302 that rotates.

  In the effect operation unit 300, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 65A, the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface that is higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in the state of the descending position that projects slightly upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the center pressing operation unit 303a of the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the center pressing operation unit 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380). Pressing is detected by the sensor 381.

  In the normal (down position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b of the pressing operation section 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b (the outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressing detection is performed. No pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

  In a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365 causes the pressing operation portion 303 to vigorously project upward together with the elevating base 364 to be in the ascending position (see FIG. 65 (b)). In the state of the raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above the upper surface of the rotating operation unit 302. In other words, the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upward more than the upper surface of the rendering operation ring 330.

  When the center operation unit 303a is pressed downward in the state where the operation unit 303 is in the raised position, first, the center operation unit 303a moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the center operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressing detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressing. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operating portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b The state is substantially the same as the upper surface (see FIG. 65 (c)). In this state, the pressing detection sensor 381 detects pressing.

  Also, when the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b is pressed downward in the state where the pressing operation section 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation section 303a projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operating unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b becomes substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302 (see FIG. 65 (a)). . In this state, the pressing detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressing.

  As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end regardless of the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to press the center pressing operation unit 303a firmly, and thus, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the production operation unit 301 in the player participation type production. , It is possible to further entertain the player-participating type production.

  Note that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the rotation operation is facilitated by the player using the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the rotation operation is difficult due to the pressing operation unit 303 becoming a hindrance. As a result, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. The door frame left side unit 400 is mounted on the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outside of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 includes a door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame left side base 401 attached to the front surface of the door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decorative board 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402, And a door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

  The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape extending vertically and opening forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and includes a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 are full color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 can emit and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a penetrating front and rear at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative board 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a translucent milky white. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically. Thereby, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened rearward.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the upper left dish decoration 271 of the upper left dish decoration unit 270 of the plate unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top unit 450 and the door frame top decoration 453. Is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 69 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 69 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right side of the front of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outside of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 in a flat plate shape, and penetrates in the left-right direction. And a plurality of decorative portions 410b inside the side window capable of emitting light, which are arranged in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult for the pachinko machine 1 where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to obscure the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine disposed on the right side, and the player playing with the right pachinko machine. Thus, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 difficult to see, and to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window decoration member 412 attached to the front surface and having a plurality of side window decoration portions 410b extending cylindrically forward and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on portions corresponding to the in-window decorative portion 410b, and a plurality of side-window decorative portion decorative substrates 413 mounted on the front side of the door frame right side base 411, and a plurality of side-window decorative members 412 are provided. And an internal reflector 414 inserted into the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is disposed on the front side of the front end of the side window interior decoration member 412 and extends up and down, and is attached to the door frame right side base 411. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surfaces of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and that has a through hole 416a that penetrates in the left and right direction and forms a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411, and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical and front and rear directions so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. Frame that has a through-hole 417a that extends in the shape and penetrates in the left-right direction and forms a side window 410a. The side panel and 417, and a.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 and covers the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted and the front side of the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape extending vertically and opening rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality (three in this case) of side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The decorative portion 410b in the side window of the decorative member 412 in the side window has a front end side formed in a truncated conical cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than a rear end side, and a front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The decorative member 412 in the side window is attached to a portion of the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame from a position lower than the center in the vertical direction to an upper portion. The side window interior decorative member 412 is formed in a milky white color having a light transmitting property.

  The in-side window decorative portion decorative board 413 is attached to the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 at a position behind the connection base 412a of the in-side window decorative member 412. The plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative portion decorative board 413 in the side window are full-color LEDs. In the side window decorative portion decorative board 413, four LEDs are arranged in a vertical and horizontal cross shape around the axis of the side window decorative portion 410b at a position behind each of the plurality of side window decorative portions 410b. Have been.

  The internal reflector 414 is formed in an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the inside of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, up, down, left, and right.

  The right side reflector 415 extends up and down at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and is formed in a wavy shape such that the shape in the front-rear direction moves forward and then rearward from the upper end to the lower end. Have been. The right side reflector 415 is formed with a plurality of through holes 415a that penetrate back and forth, and in which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative board 418 face forward.

  The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends up and down and front and rear, and has a rear side extending vertically and linearly, and a front side extending wavy along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in an elliptical shape extending vertically, and a front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. The right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed opaque.

  The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame has a flat plate shape and extends up and down and back and forth. The rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends wavy along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in an elliptical shape extending up and down, and a front side of the connection base 412a of the side window decorative member 412 and the door frame. The right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side decorative board 418 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and is composed of a right side upper decorative board 418a and a right side lower decorative board 418b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 418 are full color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 can emit light and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a translucent milky white. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically in a wavy manner along the right side reflector 415. Thereby, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened rearward.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed so that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the upper right decorative plate 276 of the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. The body 453 is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end.

  The door frame right side unit 410, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 419 has a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks embedded. The front side (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy manner so that a ４ portion from the top projects most forward, and is formed in a screen shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration section 410b extending in the front and rear direction within the side window 410a, and emits light from the LED of the side window interior section decoration board 413. Thus, the decorative portion 410b in the side window can be decorated with light. Then, by illuminating the decoration portion 410b inside the side window, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be hardly seen through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the LEDs of the side window decoration unit decorative board 413 for emitting and decorating the plurality of side window decoration units 410b are turned off. The game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the space between the three side window decorations 410b at 410a. Therefore, a player who is searching for the present pachinko machine 1 (the main game board 5) as a pachinko machine for playing does not need to move to the front of the present pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities to easily operate the present pachinko machine 1. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game in the present pachinko machine 1 and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, even if the side window 410a penetrates through the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window interior decoration part 410b can block the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity. The player can make the entire game area 5a hard to see from the player, and make it difficult for the player to feel as if viewed by another player, so that the player can play the game without hesitation. .

  Furthermore, when the three side window decoration portions 410b are made to emit light by the LEDs of the side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the light can make the inside of the side window 410a dazzling and change the visibility through the side window 410a. Let it. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are formed in a columnar shape, light is radiated in a band shape and radially. This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the game area 5a, and makes it difficult for another player, such as an adjacent player, to look inside the game area 5a. As described above, since it is possible to make it difficult for the inside of the game area 5a to be seen, it is possible to prevent another player from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, and therefore, the attention is paid to the other player. You can prevent discomfort from becoming unable to concentrate on the game as a result of being unable to concentrate on the game, and prevent the mood from being lost by inducing mistakes, and make the game more fun by focusing the player on the game In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 72A is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, FIG. 72B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the state which carried out. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit when disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the lower front. The door frame top unit 450 is mounted on the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and covers both left and right sides and the front upper part of the door frame top base 451. , A top frame cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, a door frame top decoration 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, a lower end of the door frame top decoration 453, and the door frame top base 451. And a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the door frame.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front of the top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has a door frame top central decorative board 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a door. A door frame top left decorative board 456 attached to the left of the door frame top center decorative board 455 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and in front of the top upper cover 452, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; A door frame top right decorative board 457 attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front. Have.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a top central reflector 458 disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and a door frame top decoration. A top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front of the top top cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 And a top right reflector 460 attached to the front of the top top cover 452.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached to the central speaker box 461 downward, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the left and right ends of the front surface of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 from below. A bottom cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454; a bottom cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top bottom cover 465 from below; Door frame top relay installed near the upper right end of the base 451 A plate 467, and a door frame top top plate 468 is attached to the top on the cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451, a.

  The door frame top base 451 includes a flat main body 451a extending to the left and right at the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left and right direction, and near the left and right ends on the front surface of the main body 451a. And a front protruding portion 451b protruding forward. The main body 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the center in the left-right direction is located upward so that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101. The left and right front protruding portions 451b are inclined so that the front ends move rearward as the front ends downward, and are formed in a box shape opened rearward. The front protruding portion 451b on the right side in the front view is also opened upward.

  The top upper cover 452 has a shape in front view substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451. The top upper cover 452 covers the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451, and is formed in a shape that connects between the front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 has the center in the left-right direction most protruding forward, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and backward from the center in the left-right direction to both ends in the left-right direction. In addition, the top top cover 452 has an opening 452a on the upper surface that is largely cut away from the rear end toward the front. This opening 452a is closed by a door frame top top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in milky white having a light transmitting property. The door frame top decoration body 453 has a form in which the semicircular arc bulging forward becomes smaller in curvature from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top cover 452. Is formed. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened rearward. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. So that it extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction projects downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is spaced apart in the left-right direction, connects the front end and the rear end, and extends vertically between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a. It has a pair of center speaker openings 454b facing the top center speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating up and down on the left and right outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top center decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 can make the center part of the door frame top decorative body 453 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative board 456 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left part of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can make the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, and are connected to the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. Through holes are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs so as to penetrate forward and backward.

  The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and is attached so that a pair of top central speakers 462 face downward and forward. The center speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker, and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protruding portions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high range of sound such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having countless through holes. The sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top center decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

  The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively, and form an integral decoration. I have. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice and music to the player side by a pair of top center speakers 462 and a pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending in the vertical direction and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is entirely surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

  A dish upper left decorative body 271, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and a door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since 453 is formed in a semi-tubular shape, the player can see a decoration in which the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

  In the door frame 3, a dish upper left decorative body 271, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, and Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, a dish upper left decorative board 273, a dish upper right decorative board 278, a dish center upper decorative board 314, a door frame left side decorative board 402, a door frame right side decorative board 418, a door frame top center decorative Since the board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting LEDs on the decorative boards, A light emission effect can be shown to a player so that light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, on the upper surface, an annular donut-shaped rotary operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 and a coaxial arrangement in the ring of the rotary operation unit 302. A pressing operation portion 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation portion 303a is attached, and a semi-circular arc similar to the rotation operation portion 302 below the rotation operation portion 302. The two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tubular) and large-diameter dish upper decorations 312a and 312b are attached vertically spaced apart from each other at the top and bottom of the dish. The door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side unit 41 of the door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  Thus, in the plate unit 200, the three operation parts 302 and the two upper plate center decorations 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b are vertically arranged with three donut-shaped members. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made more conspicuous.

  Also, the upper left dish decoration 271, the upper right dish decoration 276, and the lower left dish decoration 281, the lower right dish decoration 286, and the lower middle dish decoration 312 b arranged below the upper dish decoration 312 a are cut in half. The thickness of the tube-shaped tube is made slightly thinner, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Thereby, in the effect operation unit 300, since it becomes larger upward from the lower end, the sense of perspective in the vertical direction can be emphasized, and the rotation operation unit 302, which can be operated by the player arranged on the upper side, The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, a donut-shaped rotary operation unit 302 is rotatably mounted on an upper surface of the plate unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be located forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotary operation unit 302 has a front end side. Since the state is inclined so as to be lower, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 faces the direction of the head (face) of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player. The entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made easily visible, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, since the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player immediately rotates. The rotation of the operation unit 302 can be performed, and the player's participation-type effects can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the diameter of the rotary operation unit 302 is larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameter of the upper plate decoration 312a and the lower plate decoration 312b is larger than that of the rotary operation unit 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotating operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b protrude forward more than the upper plate 201, and the plate center 200 Since the decorative body 312a and the lower plate center decorative body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b can be largely conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 can be improved by the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the pachinko machine 1 is different from the other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and to appeal to the player. And the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main frame of the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the rear. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side, and uses the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably mounted on the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall on the upper and lower sides of the front left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a left front view of the main body frame base unit 500. A main frame upper hinge member 510 which is rotatably mounted on the upper frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably mounted to the upper frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3; Main frame lower hinge assembly which is attached to the lower left end of the base unit 500 on the front view and is rotatably mounted to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably mounted. And a solid 520.

  The main body frame 4 is mounted on the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in a front view, and is mounted on the lower front part of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launching device 540 for hitting the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 mounted on the rear side for paying out game balls B to the player side, a board unit 620 mounted on a lower rear portion of the main frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main frame base unit 500 A back cover 640 that is attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable, and covers a rear side of the game board 5; 0 viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The body frame base unit 500 has a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically and a connection cable guide member that guides a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and opened upward in a box shape extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to an upper end of the tank rail 553, The second rail cover 555 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a distance from the one rail cover 554 to the left as viewed from the front, and the tank rail 553 is located at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end, and a ball stopper 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553; It is equipped with a.

  The payout unit 560 is configured to guide the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner downward, and to send the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 that pays out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game balls B that pass through the upper full ball path unit 600 by the door frame 3 side. Or a lower full tank path unit 610 for guiding to the substrate unit 620 side.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and project rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked to the outer frame 2, a door frame hook 652 or a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame hook 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that is urged and urges the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward is provided.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 83 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame, and FIG. 83 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left front corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted from the front into the frame of the outer frame 2 and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501 and the main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to a lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 in a detachable manner. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a having a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and about ／ of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion opening 501b penetrating the game board 5 from the front side, and a game board forming a lower side of the game board insertion port 501b and having the game board 5 placed thereon. The game device includes a placement section 501c and a game board regulation section 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placement section 501c in the left-right direction and regulates movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rear.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side in front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and has a firing device mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball firing device 540; The cylinder unit 501e penetrates back and forth on the right side in front view of the unit 501e, and the cylinder unit 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and the board unit penetrates back and forth on the lower left side in front view of the game board mounting unit 501c. At 620, a circular speaker opening 501g of the main unit frame 620a of the speaker unit 620a facing the front and a main frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. A cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable mounting recess 501h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 extends rearward from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b of the base main body 501a in a plate shape in a plate shape, and a locking unit 650 is attached to a right side surface, and a back cover 640 is provided at a rear end. A rearwardly extending portion 501j rotatably attached and formed near the upper and lower ends on the left end in front view of the rear surface of the base body 501a for attaching the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. And an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

  A game board lock member 505 is attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The game board lock member 505 is capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b can be detached.

  The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right of the speaker opening 501g to a position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable mounting concave portion 501h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and can be rotatably mounted on the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat guide main body 502a extending left and right, and protrudes forward at both upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a and extends rightward from the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b protruding, a column-shaped mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b to each other, and penetrating front and rear at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a. And a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in the direction.

  The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting concave portion 501h of the main body frame base 501, and is large enough to be accommodated in the cable mounting concave portion 501h. Is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that the attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis that extends vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Accordingly, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side projects forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of which is the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3 and the door frame auxiliary. Connected to relay board 105.

  Next, the function and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end (right end) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 in the left and right direction is hingeably mounted on the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably mounted around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. In a state in which the guide body 502a is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a, the left and right directions of a plurality of through holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are changed. It is attached to the guide main body 502a by being fastened together with the guide main body 502a by the binding band 504 inserted into the pair of through holes 502d at the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the rear of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main frame 4. (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is disposed on the left side of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

  When the hinge is rotated so that the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 in this state, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates around the right end mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 84 (b)).

  The open angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degree when the door frame 3 is closed (the open angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degree). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but stops increasing when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes as follows. In the present embodiment, the maximum angle of the opening angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the connection cable 503 presses the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 rearward. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end moves backward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction. Can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees. You can add a habit. Accordingly, when the portion of the connection cable 503 that is folded back by 180 degrees is changed to open by opening the door frame 3, a force for closing the connection cable 503 due to the bending habit acts. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (the connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the fold of the door frame 3, and to prevent the connection cable 503 (the connection cable guide member 502) from moving. The door frame 3 can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

  Further, on the side of the door frame 3, the folded connection cable 503 is connected to the cable holder 103 a at a position closer to the center axis (axial center) of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is moved by the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103 a when the door frame 3 is closed. It can be pulled toward the center axis (axial center) of the hinge pin 126 below the door frame.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the center of rotation of the connection cable guide member 502, and is centered on the center axis (axis) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame. An angle at which a tangent to a circle passing through a portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the center axis (axis center) side of the frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 intersects the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503 to close the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503. As the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. In addition, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) as the door frame 3 opens and closes can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on body frame]
The main frame upper hinge member 510 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3 Is mounted on the door frame hinge assembly 120 so as to be rotatable.

  The main frame upper hinge member 510 has an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent downward in an L-shape, and protrudes upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 511 in a columnar shape. And an upper hinge pin 512 that is pivotally supported by the outer hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates vertically on the left side of the main frame upper hinge pin 512 when viewed from the front in a horizontally extending portion, and has an upper hinge hole 511 a for a door frame for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. Have.

  The main frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to an upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is rotatably supported by inserting the body frame upper hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 of the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 such that the body frame 4 can be hinge-rotated. 3 can be mounted so that it can be hinged.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under body frame]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 is mounted on the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, and is rotatably mounted on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3. Door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

  The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped material is bent upward in an L-shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of the flat plate-shaped plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L-shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 includes a horizontally extending part of the lower hinge second main body 522 arranged at an interval upward from a horizontally extending part of the lower hinge first main body 521, and a lower part. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 vertically penetrates near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above into the lower door frame lower portion. A hinge hole 522a and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is provided. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  In the main frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Can be The body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can cooperate with the body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to attach the door frame 3 to the body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 81 and FIG. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in plan view formed in a U-shape whose right side is opened, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and vertically behind a portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

  The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also passes through the space between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 inside the main body frame 4 (from the left side). The illegal insertion of a tool into the game board 5) is prevented.

[4-5. Ball launching device]
The ball launching device 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 85 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device viewed from the back. The ball launching device 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is mounted on the main body frame 4. 5 for driving into the game area 5a. The ball firing device 540 can hit the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 540 is attached to a flat launch base 541 attached to the launching device attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the firing base 541 on the right side in a front view and rotates. A firing solenoid 542 composed of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a hitting hammer 543 having a base end attached to the rotation axis of the firing solenoid 542, and a vicinity of the tip of the hitting hammer 543. A launch rail 544 attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

  In the ball launching device 540, the game balls B are supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the firing rail 544, and the game balls B are supplied to the upper right end of the firing rail 544. When the handle 182 is turned while the player is in the state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the turning operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting hammer 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hammer 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the firing rail 544, and is hit into the game area 5a.

  In the case where the hit ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the strength of the hit of the game ball B or the like, the firing rail 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) are used. From there, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86 (a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 86 (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit viewed from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L-shape, and is attached to the rear side of the body frame base unit 500.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to a rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a top plate portion 551a extending in the front-rear direction with a substantially constant width in the left and right direction, and a width in the front-rear direction from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in front view. A left side plate portion 551b that extends substantially downward and has substantially the same width, and a right side plate portion 551c that extends from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction and has a width substantially the same as the top plate portion 551a and extends shortly downward. A back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and substantially constant rightward from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b. A left back plate portion 551e extending to the vicinity of the lower end in width, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left plate portion 551b, and a left plate portion 551b. Left side of backboard from right to bottom Includes a bottom plate portion 551g which extends substantially to the same position as 51e right side of the connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L-shape in a front view, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and inward in the L-shape.

  In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends left and right with a length substantially equal to the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left plate portion 551b has upper and lower sides of the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends up and down with the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left plate portion 551b, and the right plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501.

  The payout base 551 has a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left plate portion 551b, the left back plate portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f. A unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 protrudes rightward in the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f in a front view, and has a back cover attaching portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a ball tank 552 attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and extending upward and left in a box shape extending left and right, and a portion extending left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward.

  Further, the dispensing base unit 550 is provided at the upper end of the tank rail 553 with a first rail cover 554 attached at an intermediate position in the left-right direction, and at the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a distance from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball retaining member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

  The ball tank 552 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, is molded in opaque black, and has a length in the left-right direction that is approximately half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. In addition, the front and rear direction is formed to be shorter than the depth of the top plate 551a in the front and rear direction. The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate 551a at a position closer to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

  The tank rail 553 is molded of a transparent synthetic resin, and is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The tank rail 553 has a shape in plan view in which the depth in the front-rear direction is diagonally left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and is formed to extend straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. An opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with an upper end opening of the guiding passage 570a in the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

  Also, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower at an appropriate angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate 551a such that the rear end of the portion extending straight leftward substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate 551a. The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight leftward.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin, are formed in opaque white, and are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight leftward. . The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. Things.

  The ball rectifying member 556 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin, is molded in an opaque white color, and is formed between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553. One rail cover 554 side end is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The ball straightening member 556 includes a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). This rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B circulating in the upper and lower stages, and rectifies them so that they flow in a single stage on the downstream side. Even if the height decreases, the ball is not clogged.

  The ball stopping member 557 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin, is molded in opaque red color, and is slidably mounted in the left and right direction near the left end in the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553. By sliding the game ball B, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, so that the game ball B does not flow from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

  Further, in the payout base unit 550, a board housing portion 551aa for mounting the external terminal plate 558 and the frame ground board 559 is formed on the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 on the left side of the ball tank 552 in a front view. The upper side of the external terminal plate 558 is covered with a terminal cover 551k molded of a transparent synthetic resin. The external terminal plate 558 includes a mounting surface and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (a plurality of external terminals (in this embodiment, external terminals XCN1 arranged in a line from left to right as viewed from the rear of the payout base unit 550). ＸXCN10 are provided.) The substrate is accommodated in such a manner that the payout base 551 is viewed from the front and the mounting surface thereof is vertical toward the rear of the payout base 551 so that the external terminals are exposed. It is attached to the portion 551aa. On the other hand, the frame ground substrate 559 has a mounting surface on which a plurality of ground terminals (in this embodiment, five ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 are provided) are mounted with the mounting surface facing downward. When viewed from the front, the dispensing base 551 is disposed in front of the external terminal plate 558, attached to the substrate accommodating portion 551aa, and covered by the terminal cover 551k. Therefore, the frame ground board 559 is housed in a space formed by the board housing portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k. Since the terminal cover 551k is molded of a transparent synthetic resin, the frame ground substrate 559 accommodated in the space formed by the substrate accommodating portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k can be visually recognized from outside the terminal cover 551k. It has become.

  Note that among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the height of the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is 13.4 mm (when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height becomes 18.6 mm). On the other hand, the height of the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is 7 mm (the mounting height becomes 9.8 mm when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is inserted). In a state where the frame ground substrate 559 is housed and mounted inside the substrate housing portion 551aa, and the external terminal plate 558 is mounted on the rear surface of the substrate housing portion 551aa, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, the frame ground substrate 559 is formed. Are hidden by the presence of the external terminal plate 558 and are difficult to see, but among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 of the frame ground substrate 559, only the ground terminals ECN2 and ECN4 protrude from the lower side of the external terminal plate 558, and the pachinko machine 1 can be seen from the back (for example, see FIG. 77). Although the height of the ground terminal ECN3 is 13.4 mm, which is high as described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, the pachinko machine 1 is hidden by the ball rectifying member 556 and is difficult to visually recognize. The ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 have a low height of 7 mm as described above, cannot protrude from the lower side of the external terminal plate 558, and are hidden by the presence of the external terminal plate 558 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back. Is difficult to see. A detailed description of the frame ground substrate 559 will be described later.

  The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The frame ground substrate 559 is for temporarily collecting electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places and grounding (earthing) the island equipment in the game hall.

[4-7. Overall structure of payout unit]
The entire configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 88A is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88B is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the left back plate portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 and is guided by the ball guiding unit 570. Payout device 580 that pays out the game balls one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout apparatus 580 downward, and an upper full tank path unit And a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the payout device 580 with the game balls B arranged in a line by the tank rail 553. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball ejection passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 580a. The game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, and the upper full tank path unit is operated from the ball discharge path 580b where the ball release lever 593 is operated. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game balls B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B discharged from the ball discharge passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is released from the ball discharge path 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7-1. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the left back portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

  The ball guiding unit 570 has a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 that has a guiding path 570a extending in a meandering shape through which the game balls B can flow and is opened forward, and closes the front side of the guiding unit base 571. A flat guide path front cover 572, a movable piece member 573 that is movable by the game balls B flowing through the guide path 570a, and a game ball B in the guide path 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball-cut detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence / absence (see FIG. 92).

  In the ball guiding unit 570, the shape of the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding path front lid 572 in a front view is formed in a quadrangular shape extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center of the guide unit base 571 in the height direction, and then bends rightward to guide the vehicle. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning over the width in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guide unit base 571.

  The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front, rear, right and left directions and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B flows. Can be guided in a row.

  In the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached near the upper part so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably mounted around an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at the right outer side of the guide passage 570a in front view, and a part of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. It is formed so that. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B abuts on a portion projecting into the guide passage 570a, whereby the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. Becomes

  When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and the movable piece member 573 retreats from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide path 570a.

  In a state where the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570 a is connected to the discharging passage of the discharging device 580. 580a communicates with the upstream end. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding path 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding path 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are provided in the guiding path 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guiding unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, it detects the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7-2. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 90A is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and FIG. It is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the rear of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear below the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back plate portion 551e.

  The dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing device main body 581 having a dispensing passage 580a having a box shape opened backward and through which game balls B can flow, and a ball removal passage 580b branching from the middle of the dispensing passage 580a. The dispenser includes a flat plate-shaped dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and opened rearward. ing.

  The dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotation axis protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached thereto, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshed with the drive gear 585, and rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583; A second transmission gear 587 meshing with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably mounted by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583; Between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583 having a spur gear-shaped dispensing gear 588a and a plurality of detecting pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a. It has a dispensing gear member 588 rotatably mounted, and a plurality of blade pieces 589a that are integrally rotated with the dispensing gear member 588 and protrude into the dispensing passage 580a between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. And a blade rotation detecting sensor 590 attached to the rear side of the dispensing device main body 581 and detecting the detecting piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588.

  Further, the payout device 580 is attached at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582, and detects a game ball B, a payout detection sensor 591, and the payout device main body 581 and the payout device. The ball removal movable piece 592 is attached to the portion that branches off from the payout passage 580a by the lid 582 so that the ball removal passage 580b can be opened and closed, and can be held at the position where the ball removal movable piece 592 closes the ball removal passage 580b. And a ball ejection lever 593 slidably mounted in the up-down direction by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582.

  The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape whose plan view shape extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger rightward in front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward at a position closer to the left from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end at a position near the right end in the left-right direction in rear view. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upper end to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move leftward as it goes downward from the upstream end, and after being bent slightly diagonally rightward from there, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the dispensing blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after being bent rightward in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the payout blade 589 and the outer periphery thereof. Is formed so as to form a circular arc concentric with the dispensing blade 589, and extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear surface of the dispensing blade 589 in a rear view.

  In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is disposed below the dispensing blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

  The ball passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end of the payout passage 580a and bends rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view, and extends vertically to the bottom in rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

  The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the dispensing passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b are branched, and on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached, the outer diameter of the game ball B. A main body-side guide wall 581a that projects rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and that is formed so as to be continuous with the left side wall of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b in rear view. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend rightward in rear view at a height of about 1/3 from above in rear view. It is formed at the left position. The main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed diagonally upward to the left when viewed from the rear, and are formed so as to mainly constitute the side wall of the ball passage 580b. The ball-moving movable piece 592 rotates between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a.

  The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right side in the rear view of a portion of the dispensing device main body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are disposed in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered by a dispensing device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat detecting pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The dispensing blade 589 is disposed between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. The dispensing blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends from the upper side in the payout passage 580a toward the rotation axis and then extends rightward in rear view so that the distance between the blade and the side wall of the payout passage is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball B. And protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball housing portion 589b that is recessed by a circular arc having a radius larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b. Thus, the payout blade 589 can restrict the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving downstream of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and also rotates clockwise in rear view. This allows the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b to move to the downstream side.

  The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are attached coaxially and integrally rotatable by a dispensing device rear lid 582 and a dispensing device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is disposed on the left side of the rotation axis of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588 b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

  The ball-moving movable piece 592 has an upper end rotatably mounted on an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is bent in a rectangular shape, and is attached so that the concave side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a. Through the gap between them, it can protrude into the ball ejection passage 580b or retreat outside the ball ejection passage 580b.

  The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side in rear view near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592. The ball pull lever 593 partially projects through the payout device rear lid 582 and projects rearward, and can be slid by operating the projecting portion. By positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the lower end, the lower portion can contact the ball removal movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Further, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 90).

  When the ball removal lever 593 is raised to make the ball removal movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state like a rosary connected upstream of the ball removal movable piece 592, becomes a ball removal movable piece 592. And flows down to the ball removal passage 580b. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight and straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows down straight to the ball removal passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as suppressing the flow of the game ball B like the payout blade 589, so that the game ball B is moved from the payout passage 580a side. Will also flow down quickly.

  As described above, in a state where the ball-moving movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball-pulling passage 580b, so that the ball-moving movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-pulling passage 580b. Game ball B abuts vigorously against the lower end of the payout device, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582. Since it is possible to move outside the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the contacting force causes the ball removal movable piece 592 to move to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball is not sandwiched between the wall of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and a strong force is not applied to the movable ball 592 by the game ball B, and the ball is movable by the collision of the game ball B. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  Because of this, the ball-moving movable piece 592 can be hardly damaged, so that more game balls B can be discharged to the island facility side downstream of the ball-pulling passage 580b more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

  When the ball-moving movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball-moving movable piece 592 passes through a space between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a at a smaller interval than the game ball B, and the ball removing passage 580b. When the game ball B comes into contact with the ball-moving movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-pulling passage 580b, the ball-moving movable piece 592 moves between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a. When moving outward through the gap, even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592, the game ball B is spaced more than the game ball B. Between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward.

  The movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball-movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the movable pulling piece 592 is based on the inertial force, no strong force acts on the movable ball removing piece 592, and the movable ball removing piece 592 can be hardly damaged, and the main body side guide can be used. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated to the downstream side of the ball passage 580b.

[4-7-3. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached to the payout base unit 550 from the rear below the payout device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back portion 551e of the payout base 551. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a square shape whose front view shape extends vertically.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 with a rear open side, and a box-shaped mount attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and has an open front side. And a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably mounted near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in front view, and includes a back cover attaching portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 opens upward near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a height of about ／ of the total height. The ball receiving passage 600a communicates with the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, extends rightward in a front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from below to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal discharge passage 600c extending downward from the left and right sides of the upper ball storage passage 600b from the center in the left-right direction and opening downward at the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal discharge passage 600c. An upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side in front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward at the lower surface, and near the right end in front view on the upper surface. And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 92).

  On the lower surface of the upper full tank path unit 600, an upper normal discharge passage 600c, an upper full discharge passage 600d, and an upper ball discharge passage 600e are sequentially opened downward from the left side when viewed from the front. When the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving path 600a is opened directly below the downstream end of the payout path 580a in the payout device 580, and The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. As a result, the game balls B released (paid) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 pass through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then pass through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. Is released downward from any of the. Further, the game balls B discharged downward from the ball discharge passage 580b of the payout device 580 are discharged downward through the upper ball discharge passage 600e.

[4-7-4. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower full tank path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B discharged downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge path 610b, and a lower ball discharge passage 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 mounted on the upper side of the lower full base 611, and a lower normal dispensing passage 610a mounted on the front end of the lower full base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharge passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. And a closing spring 614 that is biased.

  In the lower full tank path unit 610, a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball discharge passage 610c are arranged in order from the front left, on the upper surface of a portion extending above the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state where they are arranged side by side, and open forward at the front end of the lower full tank path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the front-rear direction.

  The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably mounted at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full fill payout passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is urged clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b. Opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 includes an operation protrusion 613a that protrudes forward. The operation projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centering on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and as the front end face approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined to protrude forward. The operation protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

  When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the lower normal dispensing passage 610a, the lower full filling dispensing path 610b, and the lower ball emptying path 610c, which are open upward at the rear upper end, are respectively filled with the upper full tank. It is located immediately below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball ejection passage 600e of the tan ball path unit 600. As a result, the game balls B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flow through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game balls B discharged downward from the upper full payout passage 600d are lower full fill payout passages 610b. , And the game balls B released downward from the upper ball passage 600e flow through the lower ball passage 610c.

  When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610 b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It is open immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b. The downstream end of the lower ball passage 610c is open to face the ball guide portion 627 of the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 that opens to the left.

  In the lower full tank path unit 610, in a normal state (a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 contacts the door opening / closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting on the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b are in an open state, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating projection 613 a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided. Is rotated clockwise in front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full fill payout passage 610b.

[4-7-5. Game ball flow in payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball ejection lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball ejection passage 580b branched from the ejection passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. In the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in an open state.

  In the ball tank 552 that is open upward, a predetermined number of balls are detected from the game hall island equipment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the detection of the ball being cut by the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a line by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game balls B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout blades 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay at the upstream side of the payout blades 589. Becomes

  Then, the game ball B in the guiding path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thus, it can be seen that the game balls B are stored in at least the passage from the movable piece member 573 to the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the payout motor 584 causes the payout blade 589 to rotate clockwise in the rear view, the game ball B accommodated in the ball housing portion 589b moves clockwise in the rear view, and the payout blade in the payout passage 580a. It is discharged downstream from 589. Then, the game balls B released from the payout blades 589 (ball storage portion 589b) are sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

  The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 normally passes through the upper ball storage passage 600b and is disposed immediately below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. The game balls B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c pass through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and pass through the plate unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, it becomes impossible to discharge the game balls B forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game ball B paid out from the 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower side of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It also stays in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that is in communication. Then, when the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the inside of the upper normal payout passage 600c is full of the game balls B, the upper normal payout passage 600c enters the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. The game balls B start to stay, and the game balls B start flowing down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

  The game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout path 600d passes through the lower full tank payout path 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and fills the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received. Thereafter, the game balls B received by the full tank receiving port 150b are discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. Thus, when the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game ball B, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  When the lower plate 202 is full with the game balls B and the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, and the game balls B are further paid out, the lower plate The game balls B are retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is notified that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detection state.

  When discharging the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 from the pachinko machine 1 at the time of maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball ejection lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the lower end position. Slide to the state of the rising end position. Thereafter, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B, and rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a. , And is pushed out of the ball passage 580b. As a result, the game balls B can enter the ball passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game balls B are discharged downward through the ball passage 580b.

  At this time, at the portion of the ball-moving movable piece 592, the falling game ball B abuts more strongly on the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover-side guide wall 582a than the ball-moving movable piece 592. Is hard to break.

  Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball empty passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball empty passage 600e of the upper full ball empty path unit 600 and the lower ball empty passage 610c of the lower full ball empty path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the ejection ball receiving portion 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the outside outside (the game hall) of the pachinko machine 1. To the island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 93 (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 93 (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from below and below. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit exploded for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit exploded for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower portion of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to a lower rear portion of the main frame base unit 500.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame that covers a part of the speaker unit 620a from behind. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from behind.

  The speaker unit 620a includes a speaker cover 621 mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board placement portion 501c, and a front side near the left end in front view of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. The main body frame speaker 622 is mounted on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 mounted on the rear side of the speaker cover 621 and opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates back and forth near the left end in front view, and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed by a plurality of vertically extending slits, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. A space front concave portion 621b that is depressed so as to bulge forward from the rear side on the right side of the view, and protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front concave portion 621b and extends in the left-right direction and diagonally downward toward the rear. And an open connection portion 621c.

  The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs bass sound.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is opened forward, and a portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward. Is formed so that the protrusion of the boss becomes small. As a result, it is possible to secure a sufficient space behind the speaker box 623 on the right side from the center in front view, and to arrange the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connection portion 621c.

  The speaker unit 620a includes the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623, and forms a part of the enclosure 624 that contains the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear. In the enclosure 624, since the space front concave portion 621b bulging forward is formed on the right side of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it goes rightward. Even if it is formed in a step shape so as to reduce the amount, the space to the right of the main frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

  When the main unit frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620 a is connected to the connection tube portion 43 a so as to sandwich the seal member 48 between the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621, and the rear of the main frame speaker 622. And the inner space 40a of the outer frame 2 communicate with each other. Accordingly, a wide space enclosure 624 can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43 on the rear side of the main frame speaker 622. Can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the front panel 42 of the curtain plate.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to a relatively large depth to the right in front view, and the connection unit 621c and Since the outer frame lower assembly 40 is communicated with the outer frame lower assembly 40 via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear is not attenuated particularly in the bass range, and the lower frame assembly 40 is not attenuated. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted bass range is resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47, and can be radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front panel 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted. The sound radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the 200 resonates so as to amplify the sound, so that even if the body frame speaker 622 has a small diameter, a loud sound with heavy bass can be output.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear heavy bass. Thereby, the sound output from the front surface of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are obtained. This allows the player to hear a sound having rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between a lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess 621b for space is formed in the speaker cover 621, and a speaker box 623 is formed. In addition, a through-tube 623a which extends in a tubular shape in communication with the through-hole 621d and penetrates forward and backward is formed. When assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a communicate with each other and become independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted into the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a.

  The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which the 620c is attached.

  Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B discharged from the lower ball passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610, and is viewed from the front. A ball guide unit 627 that guides the ball to the right, and a discharge ball receiving unit that receives the game ball B discharged upward from the game board 5 and opened upward on the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball guide unit 627. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game ball B having passed through the ball guide unit 627 and the discharged ball receiving unit 628 downward.

  The ball-pulling guide 627 has an upstream end opening leftward at an upper portion of a left side in a front view, and a downstream end opening leftward of the discharged ball receiving portion 628. In the state in which the ball-pulling guide unit 627 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the opening at the upstream end is opposed to the downstream-end opening of the lower ball-pulling passage 610 c of the lower full-ball path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharged ball receiving portion 628.

  The ejection ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends left and right. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 has a left end in front view continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

  The base unit 620b guides the game ball B pulled out from the ball tank 552 or the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in a front view by a ball pull-out guiding unit 627 or a discharged ball receiving unit 628, and Since the air is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a wide space on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having richer bass than a conventional pachinko machine.

  The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631.

  The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (see FIG. 97). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball rental button 224 of the ball rental operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5 or the like. Then, the designated number of game balls B are paid out to the player (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed such that traces of opening and closing remain. This makes it possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, thereby increasing the deterrence against illegal acts.

  The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear face of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. And an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

  The board base 634 is attached to the rearmost surface of the speaker box 623, which is the rearmost part of the main frame speaker 622, and most protrudes rearward. The interface board 635 is connected to one end of the connection cable 503 (the body frame 4 side). The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board, a peripheral control board, and the like, and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right of the board base 634 (interface board 635) in front view so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 which is inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached thereto. The back cover 640 has a right side in front view attached to a vertically extending rear end of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and a left side thereof is a payout base 551. And the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600.

  The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of the flat plate extending in the up, down, left, and right directions when viewed from the front is bent forward, and in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the rear surface of the back cover 551 d of the payout base 551 is formed. It is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate back and forth and extend vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit viewed from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 and locks between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of locking units 650 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and engageable with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651, and the door frame depends on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction.

  Further, the lock unit 650 urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, the transmission cylinders 654, and the outer frame unlocking lever 656 move forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501 f of the main body frame base 501, and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted by being engaged with the transmission member 133 and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hooking members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of outside members are provided. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, a plurality of locking units 650 are transmitted through the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In a state where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main frame 4, when the unlocking lever 656 for the outer frame is slid downward, the plurality of hooks 653 for the outer frame move downward, and the outer frame 2 is moved relative to the main frame 4. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip ends of the door frame hooks 652 and the outer frame hooks 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the hook 652 for the door frame and the hook 653 for the outer frame become the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the lower hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25, the lock state is established by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed Configuration of Upper Body Frame]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 99A is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 99B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing an upper portion in an enlarged manner in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from behind. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view as viewed from the upper front in a state where the tank rail and the like are assembled to the ball tank, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view as viewed from the lower front in (a). FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing an area in the upper part of the main body frame where game balls overflowing from the ball tank circulate. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind the hinge side.

  As described above, the body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the outer frame 2 by the upper body frame hinge member 510 and the lower body frame hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 rotatably mounted and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped body mounted along the upper side and the left side of the rear side of the body frame base 501 in front view. A dispensing base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the dispensing base 551 and extending upward and downward in a box-like (container) shape extending left and right, and attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. A tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail 553 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. A second rail cover 555 attached to an upper end of the clair 553, a ball rectifying member 556 attached to an upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and a tank rail. A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of 553; a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 to pay out the game ball B to the player side; , Is provided.

  The spherical tank 552 is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction in plan view, and has a bottom wall 552a that is inclined so that the left side is lower in front view, and a front side and a rear side of the bottom wall 552a. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape having an open upper side. Have been. In the ball tank 552, game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed are stored.

  Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is cut out from above on the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f has a length of about ／ of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the end of the left wall 552d to the end of the front wall 552b on the opposite side (the side of the right wall 552e). It is formed throughout.

  The tank rail 553 has a right end side (upstream side) communicating with the inside of the ball tank 552 in a front view, and a downstream side extending to one side in the left-right direction (left side) so as to be away from the ball tank 552. . The tank rail 553 extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom, and has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a in which the width direction orthogonal to the flowing direction of the game balls B is formed so that only one game ball B can flow. Have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. In plan view, the main guiding portion 553a extends from the right end to the left in the left-right direction after extending from the right end to a position about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel with an axis extending leftward and rightward from the right end side. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to a position about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes, and extending to the left end in parallel with an axis extending in the left-right direction from there. . The tank rail 553 has a portion extending in the main guide portion 553a parallel to an axis extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the right and extending to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed such that the height of the flow path through which the game balls B flow becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game balls B are formed at the downstream end. Is formed at a height at which only one can be circulated (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

  In addition, the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed above the main guiding portion 553a, and the main rail 553 is arranged such that a plurality of game balls B are arranged in a width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b bulging wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and narrowing in width direction from the upstream end to the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. I have. By the bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have been spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. The bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side to the lower main guiding portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b such that the width direction becomes one line as it goes downstream and downward.

  The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature disposed inside, and is formed into a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is disposed above the main guiding portion 553a, the bulging portion 553b slightly extends at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b in the tank rail 553. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b that comes into contact. It changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball dust in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a shape extending constantly, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B flowing through the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is difficult to disperse, the inside game ball B is always pushed in a fixed direction, so that the game ball B becomes difficult to escape and ball clogging (ball dust) is liable to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B, so that the inside circulates. By dispersing the direction in which the plurality of game balls B are pushed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball damage) can be suppressed.

  The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material, and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. Accordingly, even if a ball jam (ball ball) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the place where the ball is jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, the clogging of the ball in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, so that the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the clogging can be shortened as much as possible. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (the back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a malfunction occurs in the movable effect unit or the like, it is possible to confirm the status of the transmission motors, the gears, the belts, and other transmission mechanisms while the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4. The effect of the invention can be obtained.

  The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and has the same side (left side in front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. Of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface 501m and the rear end of the overflow tank 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b of which the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. And is inclined so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction becomes lower, and the overflow surface from the ball tank 552 A bypass passage 552g to induce some of the game balls B full of 501m, and a.

  In addition, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 out of the left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g, and the space in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. A discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m on a side opposite to the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j interposed therebetween. An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring can be connected from the rear, and an upper surface of the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558) are covered. A terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

  The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m has a flat plate shape from a lower position at a distance of 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from an upper side of a rear surface of the base body 501a having a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. Has been extended to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of one-third of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. In this overflow surface portion 501m, a gap having a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the overflowing surface portion 501m and the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

  The main body frame base 501 is disposed on the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m, and extends substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface 501m. The upper end is higher than the left and right steps 501n and 501o on both left and right outer sides of the left and right steps 501n and 501o, and extends in a front and rear direction in a strip shape. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged in rows at a smaller interval than the diameter. The left step part 501n is formed to be shorter in the left-right direction than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left-stage portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the right corner at the rear end becomes slightly lower in a front view. The right step portion 501o is formed to be longer in the left-right direction than the length in the front-rear direction. The right step part 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear left corner is slightly lower in a front view.

  The plurality of ribs 501p of the body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. Is formed at a height that is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

  The main body frame base 501 is assembled with the main body frame 4 and, when viewed from the front, the right end of the overflow surface 501m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the spherical tank 552 in the left-right direction, and the overflow surface 501m. The left end of the right side of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left end of the bypass passage 552g, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left and right direction.

  The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. Hereinafter, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a spherical tank 552. The detour passage 552g extends in a flat plate shape to the left from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552, and has a front end that is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and is inclined so that the rear end is lower. And a weir extending upward from an end of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g has a rear end on the left end side (the weir portion 552i side) extending rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in a front view, and the left end side thereof. From the right to the right end. Note that the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination in a horizontal direction.

  The detour passage 552g is assembled with the main body frame 4 such that the rear end thereof extends along the front end side of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction and extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. Extending. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided rearward by the detour passage 552g changes its distribution direction from the slanted rear end to be perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (in the direction in which the game ball B flows in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the bypass passage 552g is formed at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. From the game ball B. Further, since the game balls B are supplied from the bypass path 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular to the flow direction) of the game balls B, the tank rails formed by the game balls B from the bypass path 552g. Ball clogging in 553 can be made difficult to occur.

  Since the detour passage 552g extends obliquely in the left-right direction so that the rear end moves rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the game ball B can be released to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side, where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower, due to the rear end that extends diagonally. By discharging the gas to a wide area, the occurrence of ball dust in the tank rail 553 can be suppressed.

  In addition, the portion where the game ball B is guided by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the outside of the rear portion of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left portion of the rear wall 552c in the front view on the tank rail 553. A game ball B that flows under the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 (on the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flows from the inside of the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, in the portion of the tank rail 553 behind the bypass passage 552g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is equal to the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). Height). Therefore, on the tank rail 553 downstream of the ball tank 552, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, a space (empty space) where the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured, and thus the bypass passage 552g. Thus, the game ball B guided backward can be reliably received on the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

  The spherical tank 552 has a flat plate shape that extends rightward from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f of the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side in a front view from a position about 1/3 of a total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from a left end of the front wall 552b, and a right end side in a left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b at about 1/9 of the total length to a position near about 1/2 of the total length of the left side wall 552d in the front-rear direction, and extending parallel to the left side wall 552d to near the rear wall 552c, The rear wall 552c extends from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position approximately one-third of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c with a constant width in parallel with the rear wall 552c.

  The ball tank 552 has a straight line connecting the right end of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the shape as described above and the end of the right end on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side in plan view. Has an opening 552k formed to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 has a flat flange extending in the left-right direction outward and the up-down direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. The spherical tank 552 is configured such that the height of the upper edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the height of the upper edges of the two flange portions 552l are equal to the upper edges of the left wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the body frame base 501). (The upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

  When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled to each other, the upstream end (the right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. The obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in plan view and the portion extending straight leftward in the left-right direction are located behind the ball tank 552 (projecting). )are doing. The rear end of the left side detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of an obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

  The discharge section 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge portion 551j is assembled in the main body frame 4 such that the discharge portion 551j gradually decreases rearward from a height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 in a stepwise manner. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in the front view to the tank rail 553, a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 to the left along the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). Nearby position) and then extend rearward.

  The external terminal plate 558 is mounted on the rear surface in a state where a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are arranged in the left-right direction. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal that can open a grip portion by operating a lever to grip the end of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is disposed in a state where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 when assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

  Next, the operation and effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left-stage portion 501n, the right-stage portion 501o, and the bypass passage 552g are arranged such that the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are lower on the rear end side as shown by the white arrows in FIG. The left stage 501n is inclined so that the rear right corner is lower, and the right stage 501o is inclined so that the rear left corner is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are inclined so that the left ends thereof are lower in a front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined such that the right end side in the opposite direction to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

  Then, when the amount of the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island facility, first, the game balls B exceed the lowest overflow portion 552f of the outer peripheral upper end edge. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can escape to the overflow surface portion 501m, and can flow out of the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 104). Therefore, the further increase of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 can be prevented, so that it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing each other (increase in ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. In addition, the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball dust) due to the engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 can be prevented.

  Further, since the detour passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 105, the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the backward pressing force from strongly acting on the game balls B in the ball tank 552 by the game balls B accumulated on the overflow surface 501m, and the game balls B in the ball tank 552 are clogged. Can be prevented. Further, since the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 through the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to prevent the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m from spilling outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a problem that the game ball B spilled outside the main frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 so that the main frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

  Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass path 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from strongly pressing each other in the tank rail 553 to prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

  Further, since the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper end edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is formed. The upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction in the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, after the ball 552 overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m over the overflow portion 552f, the game ball B flowing from the overflow surface 501m to the bypass passage 552g is moved to the left side on one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour passage 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 to cause the ball to move. It is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B in the tank 552.

  Further, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is closer to the rear end of the overflow surface 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). , The game ball B can be prevented from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass 552g without passing through the overflow surface 501m. Thus, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) into the bypass passage 552g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is rearward from the overflow surface 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a certain direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the detour passage 552g can be in a certain direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, the directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B are different from each other, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pushing and biting each other, and to prevent the game balls B from being clogged. Can be prevented.

  Further, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a, and are aligned in the left-right direction. Since they are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the upper portion of the tank rail 553 has a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged, a game discharged from the rear end of the detour passage 552g is provided. The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is extended from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end to the downstream side so that the width of the main guiding portion 553a is reduced. Since the game balls B are changed so as to coincide with each other, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned so as to be aligned in the width direction as the plurality of game balls B move downstream in the bulging portion 553b. Further, since the upper portion of the tank rail 553 is closed so that the height of the flow path through which the game balls B flow decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side). A plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction are flowed downstream through a portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, thereby reducing the number of stages in the height direction and forming one row. Can be aligned. Therefore, the plurality of game balls B can be guided to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a line by the tank rail 553.

  Furthermore, since the overflow surface 501m and the bypass passage 552g are provided, a certain number of the game balls B can be stored therein, and the tank rail 553 has the bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

  Further, an external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (on the side opposite to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j therebetween). Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be farther from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility jumps or is supplied vigorously at the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m, it is difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. However, there is no problem such as a short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.

  In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facilities to the ball tank 552 is used for the ball 552. When the game ball B jumps on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made harder to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it jumps at the overflow surface 501m. It is possible to easily avoid occurrence of such a problem.

  Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface 501m to the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 104) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface 552j. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the game balls B on the guide surface portion 552j from being pressed in the downstream direction with respect to the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and the game balls B are clogged in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the game ball B supplied to the ball tank 552 from the island facility bounces at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m, and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 104, the game balls B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g by their inclination, and a problem occurs when the game balls B spill outside the main body frame 4. Can be prevented.

  Further, when the game balls B flow from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game balls B pass under the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game balls stacked on the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the tank rail 553, downstream of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j), that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (vacant space) where the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured. The game ball B guided by the bypass path 552g can be reliably received.

  Furthermore, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of a portion of the tank rail 553 in which the upper side is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, it is not affected. The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[5. Overall configuration of gaming board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 107 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine, showing an inside of a game area where game balls are circulated with a game panel opaque. FIG. 108 is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the attacker unit in the game board. 109 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front right, FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front left, and FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board with the game panel made transparent. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board showing the decoration pattern of the game panel and obstacle nails.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is hit by a player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001 for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, a payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B, a first starting port 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a special winning opening 2005 are provided. Therefore, the game board 5 receives or passes the game ball B to the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate unit 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the like in the gaming area 5a. This is for performing a game in which the driving operation of the handle 182 and the distribution of the game balls B in the game area 5a are enjoyed.

  The game board 5 partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a front component 1000 whose outer shape is substantially square when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 to partition the rear end of the game area 5a. And a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 108) in contact with the game balls B are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion to be within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The game board 5 has a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and a game performed by hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 97 and 168) for controlling the contents.

  Further, the game board 5 displays a game state based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. In addition, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

  The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery slightly larger than an inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and also holds a transparent flat panel plate 1110 and an outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 113) which is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

  The drive board unit 1700 is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit according to a command from the peripheral control board 1510, and a panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. An effect drive board 1720 for driving the decorative board and the drive motor, and a drive board box 1730 accommodating the panel relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720 are provided. The drive board box 1730 has a left side on the rear view, which is hingedly mounted on a rear surface of the back box 3010 of the rear unit 3000, and a right side on the rear view, which is detachably mounted on a rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

  The table unit 2000 includes a plurality (four in this example) of general winning ports 2001 which are always open to accept the game balls B driven into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning ports 2001. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball B at a different position in the game area 5a, a gate section 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detecting passage of the game ball B, A second starting port 2004 in which game balls B can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game balls B through the gate unit 2003; and a first starting port 2002 or a second starting port 2004. A special winning opening 2005 in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by accepting the game ball B, and a game ball received in the special winning opening 2005 are distributed. You A receiving space 2006 of a predetermined size, and a first receiving port 2007 and the second receiving port 2008 for receiving the game ball receiving space 2006 either, a.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and right above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002, and a front face of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side as viewed and has three general winning openings 2001, and is mounted along the inner rail 1002 at the upper left of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. One general winning opening 2001, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening are attached to the side slope 2300 and the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front. Attacker unit 240 having 2005, receiving space 2006, first receiving port 2007, and second receiving port 2008 And a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 attached above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and substantially at the center in the front of the game area 5a in a front view, and closes the frame of the center accessory 2500. And a presentation effect unit 2600 attached to the center role object 2500 so as to perform the operation.

  The back unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with a front opening and a rectangular opening 3010a on the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first starting for detecting a gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. A mouth sensor 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 are provided (see FIG. 168).

  In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a back rear production unit 3100 attached to a rear portion in the back box 3010, a back middle production unit 3200 attached to the front side of the back rear production unit 3100, and a back middle production unit 3200. A back right production unit 3300 attached to the front right part, a back upper production unit 3400 attached to the upper left side of the front upper part of the back middle production unit 3200, and a lower front production unit 3200 attached to the front lower part. It includes a back-side effect unit 3500, a back-right effect unit 3300, a back-side effect unit 3400, and a back-side effect unit 3600 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 in front of the back-side effect unit 3500.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 116 is a front view of the front components and the game panel in the game board, FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the front components and the game panel as viewed from the front, and FIG. 118 is a view of the front components and the game panel as viewed from the back. FIG. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of the front component member and the game panel as viewed from the front, and FIG. 120 is an exploded perspective view of the front component member and the game panel as viewed from the rear, as viewed from the front.

  The front component 1000 is formed entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The inner shape of the inner shape defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a. An outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from the lower left end from the center in the left-right direction in front view and extending clockwise in the circumferential direction in front view, passing through the upper center in the left-right direction in front view, and extending obliquely to the upper right, An inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, and a game is played on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in front view. And an out guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the area 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in a front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. A right rail 1005 extending from the right end to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and having an upper portion curved inside the front component 1000; an upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail An impact portion 1006 that connects the upper end of the game ball 1001 and abuts the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001.

  The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to be rotatable, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the inner rail 1002 and the front view clock. A backflow preventing member which is turned by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable only in the open position where it is turned around and opened between the outer rail 1001 and returned to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates forward and backward at the rear end of the out guide part 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in front view in the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guiding unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  In addition, the front component 1000 is located outside the vicinity of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end thereof, below the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and outside the right rail 1005. Each part is provided with a security recess 1009 that is recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 of the door frame 3 is formed in the security recess 1009. It will be in the inserted state. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009 prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1010 coincides with the notch of a panel holder (not shown) in the game panel 1100. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full tank path passes through the notch 1010 and the notch. The front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

  Furthermore, the front component 1000 is formed at the upper left corner in a front view, and includes a function display unit attaching portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 formed at the lower left corner. I have.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 121 (a) is a front view showing a panel board, an upper left panel decorative board, and a lower left panel decorative board in a game panel, FIG. 121 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the panel board at a specific obstacle nail site, and FIG. () Is a partial cross-sectional view of the panel board at the site of the obstacle nail overlapping the decorative pattern. FIG. 122 is a front view of the game board showing the relationship between the decorative pattern and the obstacle nail in the game panel. FIG. 123 (a) is a front view showing the relationship between the decoration pattern on the panel board of the game panel and the back decoration board of the back production unit in the back unit, and FIG. 123 (b) is the panel decoration of the panel board and the panel decoration board. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view showing a relationship with a use LED.

  The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and has the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached. The game panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 whose outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface.

  Also, the game panel 1100 has a panel decoration board 1130 on which a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a for irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 are mounted, and a board on which the panel decoration board 1130 is mounted on the panel holder 1120. And a cover 1135. The panel decoration board 1130 includes an upper left panel decoration board 1131 arranged at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front, and a lower left panel decoration board 1132 arranged at the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front. The board cover 1135 includes an upper left board cover 1136 for attaching the upper left panel decorative board 1131 to the panel holder 1120, and a lower left board cover 1137 for attaching the lower left panel decorative board 1132 to the panel holder 1120.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of the panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even when the obstruction nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It has been. In the present embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1110 has an out recess 1111 which is the lowest position in the game area 5a and corresponds to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000 and is recessed upward from the lower end. The panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate back and forth to mount the front unit 2000.

  Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes 1113 formed in a round hole and a short long hole penetrating back and forth, and is separated in the left and right direction at an upper edge and a lower edge, and is formed to be thin. And a plurality of engaging step portions 1114. The positioning hole 1113 is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting the protruding pin 1124 of the panel holder 1120. The engaging step 1114 is to be detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with the engaging claw 1125 and the engaging piece 1126 of the panel holder 1120.

  As shown in FIG. 121 (a) and the like, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center role 2500, which is offset to the upper right from the center in front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and when viewed from the front, the width orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B (the circumferential direction of the frame) has a plurality of games on the left and lower sides from the center. The ball B has a wide width that can be lined up, and the upper side and the right side have a narrow width where a plurality of game balls B cannot be lined up. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121 (a), in the panel plate 1110, a portion having a wide width is used as the decorative pattern forming region 1101, and a portion having a narrow width is surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. The region is a decorative pattern non-forming region 1102.

  This panel plate 1110 is provided with a decorative pattern 1150 in which a predetermined pattern is formed by a plurality of linear grooves (that is, a plurality of linearly concave grooves) in the decorative pattern forming area 1101 on the rear surface. The decorative pattern 1150 of the present embodiment has a pattern in which glass has cracks. The decorative pattern 1150 has a V-shaped cross section. The decorative pattern 1150 can be seen from the front player side even when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is not emitting light, and decorates the inside of the game area 5a. Further, when the panel board 1110 emits light from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130 to make light incident on the inside of the panel board 1110, the decoration pattern 1150 formed in a pattern such as a crack is illuminated and decorated. Can be.

  The decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 is mainly composed of a radiating portion 1151 that reflects the light applied to the inside from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 forward, and the light emitted to the inside from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 forward. A radiation light guide 1152 that reflects light and guides the light along a line. The radiation light guide section 1152 satisfies at least one of a deeper groove and a longer perimeter in cross section as compared to the radiation section 1151. The radiation light guide section 1152 is formed so as to connect (or intersect) the plurality of radiation sections 1151, and irregularly reflects light emitted from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 to the inside in the panel plate 1110. Light can be guided in the direction in which the groove extends. In other words, the radiation light guide 1152 plays a role of guiding light from one of the plurality of radiation parts 1151 connected to itself to the other, so that the arrangement portion and the number of the panel decoration LEDs 1130a are reduced. Among the limitations, the sensitivity (the ratio of the amount of light emitted (reflected) forward) of the entire decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 is increased. More specifically, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 121 (a), the radiation light guide section 1152 is usually formed from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the panel decoration LED 1130a of the lower left panel decoration board 1132. The light is guided to the radiating portion 1151 disposed outside the range of the light guide region 1103, and the radiating portion 1151 emits light, so that the sensitivity of the entire decorative pattern 1150 is increased.

  Accordingly, the radiation light guide 1152 has more light than the radiation 1151 of the decoration pattern 1150 formed in a portion where light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is hard to reach (a portion outside the normal light guide region 1103). It is possible to make the radiating portion 1151 emit light with a sufficient amount of light by receiving light. Therefore, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 emits light, the light incident on the inside of the panel plate 1110 is reflected forward from the radiating portion 1151 and the radiating light guiding portion 1152 to form a pattern like a crack. The formed decorative pattern 1150 can be illuminated with uniform brightness over substantially the entirety.

  The panel board 1110 has a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement. The plurality of obstacle nails N have specific obstacle nails N1 which have an important role in the game. As shown in FIG. 122, the specific obstacle nail N1 is disposed near a warp entrance 2501, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, and a gate unit 2003. When these specific obstacle nails N1 are distorted or bent by the contact of the game ball B, the probability that the game ball B can be accepted into the warp entrance 2501, the general winning opening 2001, and the like changes. The maintenance is always performed so that there is no distortion or the like.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121 (b) and FIG. 122, the decoration prohibited area 1104 is set within a predetermined range (for example, a radius of 1.5 mm to 3 mm) around the specific obstacle nail N1. The radiating portion 1151 and the radiating light guiding portion 1152 of the decorative pattern 1150 are not formed therein. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, the specific obstacle nail N1 can be easily seen, and it can be easily confirmed whether or not the specific obstacle nail N1 is distorted. Further, since the grooves of the radiating portion 1151 and the radiation light guiding portion 1152 are not formed in the decoration prohibited area 1140 around the specific obstacle nail N1, the specific obstacle nail N1 is adjusted in order to adjust the specific obstacle nail N1 at the time of maintenance or the like. When the obstruction nail N1 is hit, the force is transmitted from the specific obstruction nail N1 to the radiating portion 1151 and the radiating light guiding portion 1152, thereby preventing the panel plate 1110 from being cracked or cracked.

  Among the obstacle nails N excluding the specific obstacle nail N1, the obstacle nail N implanted at a portion overlapping with the decorative pattern 1150 is implanted on the panel plate 1110 as shown in FIG. 121 (c). The leading end protrudes into the groove (radiation light guide 1152 in the figure) constituting the decorative pattern 1150. Accordingly, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 emits light to enter the inside of the panel plate 1110, the light is irradiated from the groove of the decoration pattern 1150 to the tip of the obstacle nail N protruding into the groove. Then, the light is reflected by the inclined tip of the obstacle nail N, and the tip of the obstacle nail N can be made to shine. Thus, the obstacle nail N can be illuminated, and the player can see a light emission effect that is not available in the conventional pachinko machine. In the game area 5a, the decorative pattern 1150 may be intentionally overlapped with the obstacle nail N planted at a special site, whereby the decorative pattern 1150 and the luminous decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 are combined. The special portion of the nail N can be illuminated, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the special portion of the nail N. At the same time, the game ball B aimed at the special nail N can be driven. Operation can be performed.

  Further, in the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110, as shown in FIG. 123 (a), a part of the radiating portion 1151 and the radiating light guiding portion 1152 formed in the linear groove is in a back unit 3000 described later. It is formed so as to extend along the inner outer edge facing the center side of the game area 5a in front of the back front of the back side effect board 3603 of the back side effect unit 3600. Thus, when the decorative pattern 1150 (radiating portion 1151 and radiating light guiding portion 1152) emits light by the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130, the outer edge of the back front decoration substrate 3603 is viewed from the player side. Can be luminous decoration. In addition, the front outer decorative substrate 3603 is illuminated and decorated in a front view, so that the front decorative substrate 3603 can be relatively darkened to make it harder to see. The appearance in 5a can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the decorative pattern 1150 composed of linear grooves is formed on the panel plate 1110 by cutting. The decorative pattern 1150 is formed before the formation of the planting hole for planting the obstacle nail N. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the cutting waste discharged by the formation of the decorative pattern 1150 from clogging the planting hole, and to plant the obstacle nail N in a good state.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker (about 20 mm in this example) than the panel plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step 1123 which is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and has a holding step 1123 which is substantially the same size as the game area 5a in the front-rear direction. The through hole 1121 is provided.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a cutout portion 1122 cut out upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the notch 1122 penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch to penetrate the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full sphere path unit 610 face forward.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 protrudes forward from the holding step 1123 and is disposed outside the holding step 1123 with a plurality of projecting pins 1124 inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110 respectively. The three engaging claws 1125 elastically engaged with the engaging step portions 1114 at the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel panel 1110, and the panel projects upward from the lower outside of the holding step portion 1123. It has a pair of engagement pieces 1126 that respectively engage with the two engagement steps 1114 on the lower side of the plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 engages the engaging step 1114 on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece 1126 from diagonally above the front, and then moves the upper part of the panel plate 1110 rearward to move the upper and lower left. By elastically engaging the engaging step 1114 of the inclined portion with the engaging claw 1125, the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being housed in the holding step 1123. At this time, the projecting pins 1124 of the panel holder 1120 are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

  The panel holder 1120 has two substrate mounting recesses 1127 that are recessed from the front to the rear at the upper left corner and the upper right corner in front view outside the holding step portion 1123, and the rear side of each of the substrate mounting recesses 1127. And two connection recesses 1128 which are recessed forward from the front. An upper left substrate cover 1136 to which the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 is mounted and a lower left substrate cover 1137 to which the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 is mounted are respectively mounted on the two substrate mounting recesses 1127 from the front. The upper board mounting recess 1127 is located behind the function display unit 1400. Further, the lower substrate mounting concave portion 1127 is located behind the certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 in the front component 1000. An engagement claw 1125 that engages with the engagement step 1114 at the lower left diagonal part of the panel plate 1110 protrudes from the lower side of the board mounting recess 1127 from the boundary with the holding step 1123.

  The connection recess 1128 of the panel holder 1120 has a connection connector 1131a of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 attached to the board attachment recess 1127 and a connection connector 1132a of the lower left panel decoration board 1132 penetrating the rear wall of the board attachment recess 1127. The connection connector 1131b and the connection connector 1132b are formed in such a size that a sufficiently large space is formed so that a finger can enter around the connection connector 1131b and the connection connector 1132b. This makes it easy to connect and disconnect a connection cable (not shown) to and from the connector 1131b and the connector 1132b.

  The panel decoration substrate 1130 includes an upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 and a lower left panel decoration substrate 1132. The upper left panel decoration board 1131 has a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the front surface. The plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a of the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 are arranged along the upper left diagonal part of the periphery of the panel plate 1110, with the uppermost part facing rightward and the lowermost part facing downward. It is mounted so as to irradiate light, and so as to irradiate light downward and to the right so that the rest is perpendicular to the diagonally upper left part of panel panel 1110. The upper left panel decoration board 1131 has a connector 1131a protruding rearward attached to the rear surface.

  The lower left panel decoration board 1132 has a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the front surface. The lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 is cut out so as to avoid the lower engagement pawl 1125 of the panel holder 1120, and a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a are positioned above the lower part while avoiding the cutout part. It is mounted so as to emit light toward the right and upper right. The lower left panel decorative board 1132 has a connector 1132a protruding rearward on the rear surface.

  The panel decoration substrate 1130 is formed of a white member, and is inconspicuous from the front. The plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 are wide-angle side-view type full-color LEDs, and can irradiate light forward.

  As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the panel decoration substrate 1130 is arranged such that the front surface (plate surface) on which the side-view type panel decoration LED 1130a is mounted is parallel to the surface of the panel plate 1110. I have. Thereby, the dimension of the panel decoration board 1130 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner than the panel board 1110, and the panel decoration board 1130 can be attached to the panel holder 1120 without any problem, and the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) The decorative pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 can be illuminated while suppressing an increase in the dimension in the front-back direction of the panel board 1110.

  The panel decoration substrate 1130 has a plate surface parallel to the surface of the panel plate 1110, and has a size that is sufficiently larger than the size of the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the plate surface (front surface). It has a plate surface. In other words, the panel decoration board 1130 has another area (excess area) where the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a having a size 40 to 100 times larger than the LED mounting area occupied by the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a to be mounted is not mounted. Region). Thereby, the mounting strength of the panel decoration substrate 1130 can be increased, and even if vibrations or impacts generated during transportation, installation, maintenance, or the like of the pachinko machine 1 act, the panel decoration substrate 1130 and the panel plate 1110 can be connected to each other. Can be hardly generated, and the optical axis of the LED 1130a for panel decoration can be suppressed from being shifted, thereby preventing a problem in light incidence on the panel plate 1110.

  Further, since the panel decoration substrate 1130 is mounted on the substrate mounting recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120 via the substrate cover 1135, vibrations and shocks generated during transportation, installation, maintenance, and the like of the pachinko machine 1 are provided. However, it is difficult to transmit to the panel decoration substrate 1130. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the vibration or the like acting on the panel decoration board 1130 (the panel decoration LED 1130a), suppress the decrease in the durability of the panel decoration LED 1130a, and, similarly to the above, the panel decoration board 1130. Deviation of the positional relationship between the panel decoration 1110a and the panel plate 1110 can be suppressed, and the deviation of the optical axis of the LED 1130a for panel decoration can be suppressed to prevent the occurrence of a problem in the incidence of light on the panel plate 1110. .

  The panel decoration substrate 1130 is attached to the rear side of the substrate cover 1135. The substrate cover 1135 is formed in a frosted glass semi-transparent shape so that the panel decoration substrate 1130 attached to the rear side is difficult to recognize, and is formed so as to diffuse light from the panel decoration LED 1130a. I have. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the light emitted (leaked) forward from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 illuminates the player, thereby causing the player to feel dazzling. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment, a crack-shaped decorative pattern 1150 is formed in a decorative pattern forming area 1101 of a transparent panel board 1110, and is transparent and three-dimensional as compared with the conventional decoration using a print sheet. The decoration with the letter can be shown to the player. When the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 emits light, the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 can be made to emit light, and the game ball B in the game area 5a, which has not been seen in the past pachinko machines, is displayed. The luminous decoration of the distribution area can be shown to the player.

  Also, since the decorative pattern 1150 is formed only in the decorative pattern forming area 1101 in which the game balls B in the game area 5a circulate through various flow paths, the decorative pattern 1150 is formed in the entire game area 5a. As compared with the case where the decorative pattern 1150 is formed, the cost for forming the decorative pattern 1150 can be reduced.

  Further, in the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment, since the upper left panel decoration board 1131 is disposed behind the function display unit 1400, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 emits light, the function display unit 1400 is turned on. The light can be illuminated from behind, and the player can see a light emission effect in which the function display unit 1400 (function display unit) which is not provided in the conventional pachinko machine is decorated with light emission.

  Also, in the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment, since the lower left panel decorative board 1132 is disposed behind the certificate stamp attaching section 1012, when the panel decorating LED 1130a of the lower left panel decorative board 1132 emits light, the certificate stamp attaching section 1012 The attached stamp (not shown) can be illuminated by illuminating it from behind, and the player can see a luminous effect in which a stamp that is not present in a pachinko machine is decorated with light.

  Also, in the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment, no condensing lens or diffusion lens is arranged between the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 and the side surface of the panel plate 1110. Accordingly, the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is directly radiated to the side surface of the panel plate 1110 over a wide range, and the light can be made to enter a wide range inside the panel plate 1110, and the decoration pattern 1150 is formed. Light emitting decoration can be made beautifully.

  Furthermore, in the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment, by providing the panel holder 1120 with the panel decoration substrate 1130 (panel decoration LED 1130a) for emitting and decorating the decoration pattern 1150 formed on the rear surface of the panel board 1110, When changing to a panel board 1110 provided with another different decorative pattern in order to change the model of the game board 5 or to make a minor change in the model, it can be dealt with only by replacing the panel board 1110. The holder 1120, the front component 1000, the panel decoration board 1130, and the board cover 1135 can be used as common components. Thereby, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has high versatility with other models having the panel plate 1110 on which the other decorative patterns 1150 are applied, and aims to reduce the cost of the pachinko machine 1. be able to.

  Also, in the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment, the panel decoration substrate 1130 is mounted via the substrate cover 1135 in the substrate mounting recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120, and the panel decoration substrate 1130 and the panel plate 1110 are separately provided. I am trying to install it. Thereby, the panel holder 1120 from which the board cover 1135 and the panel decoration board 1130 are removed can be used for a pachinko machine (game board) having a normal panel board 1110 on which the decoration pattern 1150 is not applied. 1120 and front component 1000 can be common components. Thereby, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has high versatility with other models having the panel plate 1110 on which the other decorative patterns 1150 are applied, and aims to reduce the cost of the pachinko machine 1. be able to. When used in a model having a panel plate 1110 on which the decorative pattern 1150 is not applied, a dummy board cover 1135 may be attached to the board attachment recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120, or the panel holder 1120 may be used. You may make it use it, with the board cover 1135 and the panel decoration board 1130 attached.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top and the front open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut away from the front end toward the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state where the board holder 1200 is assembled on the game board 5, and has the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is mounted.

  When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located immediately above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, all the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. Can be discharged to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 168) for controlling game contents and payout of the game balls B, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And

  The main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Must be performed, and a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by looking at the traces of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the improper act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. The main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second starting port sensor 2402, a special winning opening sensor 2403, a first receiving port sensor 2404, a second receiving port sensor 2405, a starting port solenoid 2412, an attacker. The solenoid 2414, the distribution solenoid 2416, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, and the magnetic sensor 3003 are connected.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 107 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (the player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state where the function display unit 1400 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 displays a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  The function display unit 1400 includes two status indicators, each of which has three LEDs for displaying a game state, and a normal lottery result which is selected by passing the game ball B to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display comprising LEDs and a normal reserve display comprising two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the passage of the game ball B to the gate section 2003 are provided.

  Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display including eight LEDs for displaying a first special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and a first starting port 2002. The first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the reception of the game balls B to the second ball and the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game balls B to the second starting port 2004 A second special symbol display comprising eight LEDs to be displayed, and a second special reserve number display comprising two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004. ing.

  Further, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit” or the like, the function display unit 1400 includes a round formed of five LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 2005. Display.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, symbols, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 168) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Box 1505. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the side of the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Effect display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described. The effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to a substantially central rear surface of a rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the inside of the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the upper surface and lower fixing pieces 1602 protruding outward from the lower surface. The effect display device 1600 includes two fixing grooves 3010c opening on the upper inner peripheral surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described below, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601 from diagonally behind 3010, the lower fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the lower fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. Is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding to the right.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 107, FIG. 108, FIG. 112, FIG. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front face of the panel board 1110, and a part of the rear end is an opening 1112 of the panel board 1110. And project rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving a game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and has a plurality (four in this example) of general prize ports 2001 that are always open and a plurality of general prize ports 2001. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at a different position in the area 5a, and a gate section 2003 which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B; To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 in which the game balls B can be received in accordance with the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game balls B through the gate portion 2003. And a special winning opening 2005 that allows the receiving of the game ball B in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B.

  A plurality of (four in this example) general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate unit 2003 is arranged below the center in the up-down direction near the right end in front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is disposed immediately below the gate unit 2003. The special winning opening 2005 is disposed at the upper right of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction and at a height between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004.

  The front unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and right above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a start port unit 2100 having the first start port 2002. Side unit 2200 which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 and has three general winning openings 2001, and a side slope which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 at the upper left of the side unit 2200 in a front view. 2300 and one general winning opening 2001, a gate unit 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a large winning opening 2005, which are attached to the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the playing area 5a when viewed from the front. An attacker unit 2400 having a receiving space 2006, a first receiving port 2007, and a second receiving port 2008; Above the opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 attached to the game area 5a substantially at the center in front view and slightly upward, and the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 is closed. And a presentation effect unit 2600 attached to the center role 2500.

[5-8-1. Starting port unit]
The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is disposed immediately above the out port 1008 near the lower end in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that is always open upward and has a width that allows only one game ball B to be received. The starting port unit 2100 has a transparent portion except for the front surface of the first starting port 2002, and allows the user to visually recognize the rear side (the back unit 3000 through the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100).

  The starting port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110, so that the general winning opening 2001 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and is opened upward, and the first starting port 2002 is a center to be described later. It is located directly below the center of the stage 2503 of the accessory 2500. Therefore, when the game ball B is released downward from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted to the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability. The starting port unit 2100 can guide the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and deliver it to the guide path of the back effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000. The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is detected by the first starting port sensor 3002 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 168).

[5-8-2. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starter unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game balls B can be always received. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002.

  In the side unit 2200, the rightmost general winning opening 2001 is opened upward at the same height as the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. Is open upward at a position higher than the general winning opening 2001, and the leftmost general winning opening 2001 is open toward the upper left in front view at a position higher than the general winning opening 2001 on the middle side. I have.

  The side unit 2200 is formed transparent except for the front of the three general winning openings 2001, so that the rear side (the back unit 3000 through the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100) can be viewed. By attaching the side unit 2200 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the three general winning openings 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110. The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and deliver it to the guide path of the back front effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 168).

[5-8-3. Side slope]
The side slope 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached along the inner rail 1002 at the upper left of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. The side slope 2300 includes a shelf 2301 that is inclined so that the right end is lower in a front view. The side slope 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the shelf 2301 projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The side slope 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left area of the center role 2500 to the right. The side slope 2300 is entirely formed to be transparent, and the rear side (the back unit 3000 through the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100) can be visually recognized.

[5-8-4. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is disposed on the right side of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in front view, in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 includes one general winning opening 2001 out of the four general winning openings 2001, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a large winning opening 2005, a receiving space 2006, a first receiving opening 2007, and a second receiving opening 2007. A receiving port 2008 is provided (see FIG. 108 and the like).

  The attacker unit 2400 is formed in an L-shape in which the outer shape when viewed from the front is formed such that the upper end on the right side extends upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction. In the attacker unit 2400, a gate portion 2003 through which the game ball B flows (passes) up and down is arranged at an upper right corner, and a second starting port 2004 which can be opened forward just below the gate portion 2003 is arranged. Have been. In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a large winning opening 2005 that can be opened upward at the lower left of the second starting opening 2004, and always opens diagonally rightward at the lower left of the large winning opening 2005. One general winning opening 2001 is arranged. Further, in the attacker unit 2400, a receiving space 2006 of a predetermined size through which the game balls B received in the special winning opening 2005 circulates is arranged below the special winning opening 2005. Further, in the attacker unit 2400, a first reception port 2007 that can be opened upward is arranged in the reception space 2006, and a first reception port 2007 that always opens upward on the right side of the first reception port 2007 is provided. Two receiving openings 2008 are arranged.

  In the attacker unit 2400, the general winning opening 2001 is opened with a size slightly larger than the game ball B, and the gate portion 2003 is vertically penetrated with a size slightly larger than the game ball B. In the attacker unit 2400, the second starting port 2004 is slightly larger than the game ball and is opened forward, and the large winning opening 2005 is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball in the left-right direction. It is open upward with a width of 5 times.

  The attacker unit 2400 has a gate sensor 2401 for detecting a game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a second start port sensor 2402 for detecting a game ball B received in the second start port 2004, and a large winning port 2005. A special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the received game ball B, a first reception sensor 2404 for detecting the game ball B received in the first reception port 2007, and a game ball received in the second reception 2008 And a second reception sensor 2405 for detecting B (see FIG. 168).

  The attacker unit 2400 opens and closes the second starting port door 2411 that can open and close the second starting port 2004, and opens and closes the second starting port door 2411 in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B of the gate unit 2003. The starting port solenoid 2412, the special winning opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the special winning opening 2005, and the large winning opening door 2413 are drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. An attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to one special lottery result or a second special lottery result, and opens and closes the first reception port 2007 (the first game ball B that is received by the special winning opening 2005 and circulates in the reception space 2006 is opened and closed). The sorting piece 2415 and the sorting piece 2415 are connected to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2. And sorting solenoid 2416 to open and close in response to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is the lottery by accepting game balls B to 04, and a.

  The attacker unit 2400 extends vertically at the upper right corner in a front view, and has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 at the upper and lower ends, respectively, and a gate passage 2421 through which the game ball B can flow. A left side passage 2422 extending vertically below the second starting port 2004 on the left side of the gate section 2003 and through which the game ball B can flow, and a second starting port 2004 extending vertically on the right side of the gate section 2003. Above the right side passage 2423 through which the game ball B can flow and the gate passage 2421 and the left side passage 2422, and above the large winning opening 2005. An attacker passage extending from the lower side of the gate passage 2421 to the left so that the left end side is lower, and through which the game ball B can flow. And 424, the left side from the left end of the winning opening 2005 and a, and the discharge ledge 2425 extends leftward to be lower.

  As shown in FIG. 108, the gate passage 2421 has a portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 communicating with the left side passage 2422 and the right side passage 2423 so that the game ball B can pass therethrough. I have. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the gate passage 2421 from above passes through the gate portion 2003 and then flows down the front of the second starting port 2004 to the attacker passage 2424. In addition, the game ball B that has entered the left side passage 2422 from above passes through the left side of the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 and flows down to the attacker passage 2424, and after passing through the left side of the gate portion 2003. There is a pattern of bending rightward and entering the gate passage 2421 and flowing down to the attacker passage 2424 through the front of the second starting port 2004. On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the right side passage 2423 from above passes through the right side of the gate portion 2003 and then bends leftward to enter the gate passage 2421, passes through the front of the second starting port 2004, and passes through the attacker passage. Flow down to 2424. When the game ball B passes in front of the second starting port 2004, if the second starting port 2004 is open, the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2004.

  The second starting port door 2411 is capable of closing the second starting port 2004 that is open frontward from the front, and is rotatable around an axis whose lower side extends left and right near the lower end of the second starting port 2004. Installed. The second starting port door 2411 is rotated (rotated) so that the upper side moves forward by driving the starting port solenoid 2412, thereby opening the second starting port 2004 and closing the gate passage 2421. The game ball B flowing down in front of the second starting port 2004 can be guided to the second starting port 2004 side and accepted by the second starting port 2004. The second starting port door 2411 closes the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid is ON (when energized). Let it.

  The special winning opening door 2413 is formed in a plate shape extending left and right so that the left end is lowered while extending forward and backward, and opens and closes the special winning opening 2005 that opens upward by moving forward and backward. It is possible. The special winning opening door 2413 closes the special winning opening 2005 by moving forward, and can guide the game balls B circulating in the attacker passage 2424 to the left and transfer the game balls B onto the release shelf 2425. . The special winning opening door 2413 is opened by opening the special winning opening 2005 by retreating by driving the attacker solenoid 2414, and after passing through one of the gate passage 2421, the left side passage 2422, and the right side passage 2423, the attacker door 2413 is opened. The game ball B flowing through the passage 2424 can be received in the special winning opening 2005. The special winning opening door 2413 closes the special winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the special winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when energized).

  The sorting piece 2415 is formed in a plate shape extending left and right in the receiving space 2006 so as to extend in the front-rear direction so that the right end is lower, and is opened upward by moving forward and backward. The first reception port 2007 (V winning opening) can be opened and closed. The sorting piece 2415 closes the first reception port 2007 by moving forward, guides the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 to the right, and always opens upwards. 2008. In addition, the sorting piece 2415 retreats by driving the sorting solenoid 2416 to open the first receiving port 2007, and the game ball B received in the special winning port 2005 is transferred to the first receiving port 2007 with a high probability. Can be accepted. The distributing piece 2415 closes the first receiving port 2007 when the distributing solenoid 2416 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the first receiving port 2007 when the distributing solenoid 2416 is ON (when energized). Let it. In other words, the sorting piece 2415 can distribute the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 so that it can be received in either the first receiving opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008.

  In this attacker unit 2400, the gate passage 2421 is positioned below (slightly to the left of immediately below) an opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2510 in the center role 2500, which will be described later, when attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110. In addition, the gate section 2003, the second starting port 2004, and the special winning opening 2005 are located above the stage 2503 of the center role 2500. Further, the general winning opening 2001 is located at substantially the same height as the first starting opening 2002. In a state where the nail is attached to the panel board 1110, a plurality of obstacle nails N are present between the lower end of the right guide passage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 and the upper end (gate portion 2003).

  Next, the flow of the game ball B in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. Since the gate 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 is located above the stage 2503 of the center role 2500 when assembled on the game board 5, even if the game ball B is released from the stage 2503, the gate 2003 Never go through. Therefore, only the game ball B flowing down the right side (the right guide passage 2510) of the center role 2500 may pass through the gate portion 2003. Downstream of the right guide passage 2510, a left side passage 2422, a gate passage 2421, and a right side passage 2423 are opened side by side from the left, and the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center role 2500 is one of them. You will enter the crab.

  The game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is discharged from the gate passage 2421 to the attacker passage 2424 through the front of the second starting port door 2411 closing the second starting port 2004 immediately below. At this time, when the second starting port door 2411 is rotated forward and is in the open position, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 abuts on the back surface of the second starting port door 2411 and the second starting port door 2411 is in the open position. The user is guided to the second starting port 2004 and received by the second starting port 2004. The second starting port door 2411 responds to a normal lottery result that is determined by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003 (the game ball B is detected by the gate sensor 2401) (the normal lottery result is “normal hit”). ), And by appropriately setting the lottery time of the normal lottery result, the opening / closing timing of the second starting port door 2411, and the like, the game ball B that has drawn the “normal hit” itself can be driven into the second starting port 2004. Can also be accepted.

  The game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) behind the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2402.

  In the gate passage 2421, the right side of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 communicates with the downstream end of the right side passage 2423. The entered game ball B is allowed to flow to the front side of the second starting port 2004 without passing through the gate portion 2003. Accordingly, in a state where the second starting port door 2411 is moved to the open position and the second starting port 2004 can be received, the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003 or the game flowing through the right side passage 2423 The ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 with a very high probability. Note that the left side of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 communicates with the middle of the left side passage 2422, so that the gate passage 2421 is connected to the left side passage 2422 on the left side of the gate portion 2003. There is a possibility that the game ball B that has entered is accepted by the second starting port 2004.

  When a game ball that has flowed down the right side of the center role 2500 is not received by the second starting port 2004, it is discharged from the lower end of the gate passage 2421 or the left side passage 2422 to the attacker passage 2424.

  The game ball B discharged into the attacker passage 2424 is guided to the left along the slope, and is discharged downward from the left end of the discharge shelf 2425 via the special winning opening door 2413 closing the special winning opening 2005. Is done. At this time, when the special winning opening door 2413 closing the special winning opening 2005 retreats and the special winning opening 2005 is opened, the game ball B released into the attacker passage 2424 has a high probability of winning the special winning. Accepted in mouth 2005. The game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 is sent to the receiving space 2006 after being detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403, and is sent to either the first receiving opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008 by the sorting piece 2415. It is distributed to.

  The game sphere B received in the first reception port 2007 or the second reception port 2008 is detected by the first reception port sensor 2404 or the second reception port sensor 2405, and then downward (substrate) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. (On the holder 1200).

  The game ball B discharged downward from the discharge shelf 2425 may be received in one general winning opening 2001 arranged below. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is guided to the rear side of the panel board 1110 and then delivered to the guiding path of the front effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000. On the other hand, game balls not received in the general winning opening 2001 pass through the out opening 1008 at the lower end of the game area 5a and are discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) behind the game panel 1100.

[5-8-5. Center role]
The center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 is disposed above the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the like, in the game area 5a, substantially at the center in front view, and slightly upward. It is attached to the front of 1110. The center role 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and it is possible to visually recognize, from the front, various effect units provided in the effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. it can.

  In the frame-shaped center role 2500, the entire circumference excluding the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is positioned inside the frame. To prevent intrusion.

  The center role item 2500 has a warp entrance 2501 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front, in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open so that the game ball B can enter, and a game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2501 can be released. It has a warp exit 2502 that opens inside, and a stage 2503 that can release the game ball B released from the warp exit 2502 in the left-right direction and then discharge it into the game area 5a.

  The stage 2503 of the center role 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is depressed, and corresponds to the position directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center role 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel board). 1110), it is formed in a wavy shape such that the substantially center position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. The stage 2503 is inclined such that a portion (top) slightly higher than the left and right sides at the center in the left and right direction and a lowest portion (valley) on the left and right sides thereof become lower toward the front. The game balls B can be released into the game area 5a from those portions.

  In the state where the center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (top) at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2503 is located immediately above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. Thereby, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted in the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

  The center role item 2500 includes a right guide passage 2510 that guides the game ball B flowing down along the outer peripheral surface on the right side when viewed from the front slightly to the left and then discharges the ball downward. The right guide passage 2510 is formed such that the downstream end of the right guide passage 2510 is located slightly to the right of the gate portion 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 in a state where the center role item 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. I have.

  The center role item 2500 is formed such that, when assembled to the game board 5, the outer peripheral surface on the right side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball from the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000. Therefore, when the game balls B flow on the right side of the center role 2500, they flow along the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the center role 2500, and all the game balls B flowing on the right side of the center role 2500 are in the right guide path. Enter 2510 and you will be guided. Thereby, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a so as to flow on the right side of the center role item 2500 (so-called right-handed), the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 with a high probability. In addition, the game ball B can be accepted to the large winning opening 2005 that is opened (open) with a high probability.

[5-8-6. Table production unit]
Next, the presentation effect unit 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the center role of the front unit of the game board and the presentation effect unit as seen from the front. FIG. 125 is a front view showing a state where the first pattern is illuminated and decorated in the display effect unit, and FIG. 126 is a front view showing a state where the second pattern is illuminated and decorated in the display effect unit.

  The presentation effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the center role 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500. The display effect unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center role 2500, and is a transparent flat light guide plate 2610 that closes the frame of the center role 2500, and toward the right side of the surface light guide 2610. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2611a capable of irradiating light are mounted, and light can be radiated toward the upper surface of the first light guide plate 2610 and the first pattern substrate 2611 mounted on the rear side of the center role 2500. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2612a, and a second picture substrate 2612 attached to the rear side of the center role 2500.

  The front light guide plate 2610 includes a first pattern 2621 (see FIG. 125) formed by an innumerable number of first reflecting portions having an uneven shape that reflects only light from the vertical direction to the front, and only light from the left and right directions. A second pattern 2622 (see FIG. 126) formed by an innumerable second reflective portion having an uneven shape for reflecting forward. That is, when the LED for the light guide plate of the first pattern substrate 2611 emits 2611a light, the display effect unit 2600 can cause the first pattern 2621 to emit light and emit the light for the light guide plate 2612a of the second pattern substrate 2612. Then, the second pattern 2622 can be displayed by light emission.

  In the front light guide plate 2610, the countless first reflection portions forming the first pattern 2621 and the countless second reflection portions forming the second pattern 2622 are each formed with minute irregularities. In a state where the LED 2611a for the light guide plate of the first pattern substrate 2611 and the LED 2612a for the light guide plate of the second pattern substrate 2612 do not emit light, various types of the back unit 3000 which is transparent and arranged on the rear side are seen. It is possible to visually recognize the decorative body and the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a good state.

  As shown in FIG. 125, the first pattern 2621 is a pattern imitating around one eye of a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG. 126, the second pattern 2622 is a pattern in which glass has radial and concentric cracks. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 are full color LEDs.

  In the rendering unit 2600 according to the present embodiment, the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 have their plate surfaces oriented in parallel with the peripheral surface of the surface light guide plate 2610. Is arranged in a direction parallel to the surface of the front light guide plate 2610, so that the first picture substrate 2611 and the second picture substrate 2612 are difficult to see when viewed from the front (from the player side). And the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 127 is a front view of the back unit of the game board with the back front decorative board and the back front right decorative board highlighted. FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 129 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 131 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500, the effect display device 1600, and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

  The back unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with a front opening and a rectangular opening 3010a on the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first starting for detecting a gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. A mouth sensor 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 are provided (see FIG. 168).

  In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a back rear production unit 3100 attached to a rear portion in the back box 3010, a back middle production unit 3200 attached to the front side of the back rear production unit 3100, and a back middle production unit 3200. A back right production unit 3300 attached to the front right part, a back upper production unit 3400 attached to the upper left side of the front upper part of the back middle production unit 3200, and a lower front production unit 3200 attached to the front lower part. It includes a back-side effect unit 3500, a back-right effect unit 3300, a back-side effect unit 3400, and a back-side effect unit 3600 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 in front of the back-side effect unit 3500.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and an opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall in a square shape, and a flat frame-like shape protruding rearward with a gap from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b; two fixing grooves 3010c into which the upper fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is recessed upward from the inside of the frame at the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b; And a notch portion 3010d cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the vicinity of the center of the lower side in the left-right direction to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached.

  The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. The lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 so that the lock mechanism 3020 is slidable left and right on the left side of the rear surface of the cutout portion 3010d in a rear view.

  In addition, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses and mounting holes for mounting each movable effect unit and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

[5-9-1. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 to 141 and the like. FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front. FIG. 133 is a front view of the back rear effect unit, in which the back rear movable decorative body emphasizes the back rear movable mechanism in a normal position. FIG. 134 is a front view of the back effect unit, showing a state where the back movable ornamental body is locked by the lock member from the state of FIG. 133. FIG. 135 is a front view of the back rear production unit, showing a state in which the slide guide has been moved downward from the state of FIG. 134 to near the lower end. FIG. 136 is a front view of the back rear effect unit, showing a state in which the lock member is rotated to the release position by the slide guide from the state of FIG. 135 and the rear movable ornament is dropped. FIG. 137 is a front view of the back effect unit showing the state in which the back movable ornamental body is moved in the vertical direction by the slide guide. FIG. 138 is a front view of the back rear effect unit, showing a state in which the lock member is rotated from the lock position to the release position side by the upward movement of the back movable movable body by the slide guide.

  FIG. 139 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back decoration effect unit in the back rear effect unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 139 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the back decoration effect unit in the rear effect unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which was seen. FIG. 140 is a front view showing a state in which a fifth pattern is illuminated and decorated in the back decoration effect unit, and FIG. 141 is a front view showing a state in which a sixth pattern is illuminated and decorated in the back decoration effect unit.

  The rear production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the rearmost part in the back box 3010. The back rear production unit 3100 has a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010. The back rear production unit 3100 includes a back rear movable production unit 3110 having a quadrangular outer shape formed in a frame shape, and a back rear mounted on the rear side of the rear rear movable production unit 3110 and mounted in the back box 3010. A decoration effecting unit 3150.

  First, the rear movable effect unit 3110 in the rear effect unit 3100 will be described in detail. The back rear movable effect unit 3110 extends in the left-right direction with substantially the same length as the entire width in the left-right direction of the effect display device 1600, and is formed in a shape imitating a nata as an item in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. And a movable backside decoration 3120, and a backside movable mechanism 3130 to which the backside movable decoration 3120 is attached movably in the vertical direction.

  The back movable decorative body 3120 extends in the left-right direction and protrudes outward from both right and left ends of the decorative body main body 3121 simulating a fish, and a pair of a back rear movable mechanism 3130 described later. A left slider 3122 and a right slider 3123 are attached to the slide shaft 3132 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. Although not shown, the rear movable decorative body 3120 is attached to the rear side of the decorative body 3121 and has a plurality of LEDs (full color LEDs) mounted on the front and rear surfaces. Before diffusing the light from the LED attached between the substrate and the back decorative movable body decoration substrate and the decorative body main body 3121 and attached to the front surface of the rear movable decorative body decorative substrate before irradiating the substrate forward. A lens and a portion which is attached to the rear side of the back movable ornamental decorative board and guides light from the LED attached to the rear surface of the back movable ornamental decorative board to be a lower portion of the ornament main body 3121 And a rear lens that irradiates from back to front.

  The decorative body 3121 of the rear movable movable body 3120 is formed in a shape imitating a nut, and has a left end side as a tip of the nut and a lower side as a nut blade in a front view. In the decorative body main body 3121, a portion imitating a blade of a nata is formed to be transparent. The decoration body 3121 is formed with a crack-shaped decoration that spreads radially and concentrically around a portion near the lower end at the center in the left-right direction.

  The left slider 3122 protrudes forward from the front surface, and includes a lock projection 3122a that can abut on a regulating portion 3141c and a guide portion 3141d of a lock member 3141 of the back rear movable mechanism 3130 described below. Although not shown, the left slider 3122 includes a pair of sliding bushes that are vertically separated from each other and through which the left sliding shaft 3132 of the rear movable mechanism 3130 is slidably inserted. The sliding bush has a plurality of bearing steel balls in contact with the slide shaft 3132, and can slide smoothly on the inserted slide shaft 3132 without rattling. The left slider 3122 can smoothly move the rear movable decorative body 3120 in the vertical direction only on the left side by the pair of sliding bushes. Although not shown, the left slider 3122 includes a detection piece projecting rearward. The detection piece of the left slider 3122 is detected by the decorative body detection sensor 3154 of the back decoration effect unit 3150.

  The right slider 3123 extends up and down with substantially the same length as the vertical dimension of the ornament body 3121, and has a rectangular cross-sectional tubular shape that sandwiches the right slide shaft 3132 of the rear movable mechanism 3130 from the left and right. Is formed.

  The back decorative movable body decoration substrate is mounted above a part of the decorative body main body 3121 which imitates a blade of a nata. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the movable decorative body decoration substrate are arranged concentrically around the lower side near the center in the left-right direction, and each is radially outward from the center. It is mounted in the direction in which light is emitted. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back decorative movable board decoration board are arranged in line along the lower side and the right side as viewed from the rear, and each LED is parallel to the rear face of the rear movable decorative body decorative board. It is mounted so that light is emitted toward the side.

  The back-side movable decorative body 3120 can be viewed from behind through a part of the decorative body main body 3121 that resembles a nata blade. When the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back movable decorative body decoration board emit light, the back rear movable decorative body 3120 forms a cracked decoration on the front surface of the decorative body main body 3121 via the front lens. When the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface emit light, the part of the free end and the blade of the decorative body 3121 can be light-emission decorated via the rear lens. .

  The back rear movable mechanism 3130 in the back rear production unit 3110 of the back rear production unit 3100 is formed of a metal plate, and has a rectangular frame-shaped unit frame 3131 and extends vertically and is separated in the left-right direction. And a pair of slide shafts 3132 respectively attached to the unit frame 3131, and extending vertically in parallel to the left of the left slide shaft 3132 in a front view, and a spiral groove is formed on the outer periphery. A spiral shaft 3133 rotatably attached to the unit frame 3131, a slide guide 3134 screwed to the spiral shaft 3133 and capable of abutting against the lower surface of the rear movable decorative body 3120, Lower left corner of unit frame 3131 in front view The back-side drive motor 3135 attached, a spur gear-shaped motor gear (not shown) attached to the rotation shaft of the back-side drive motor 3135, meshed with the motor gear, and attached to the lower end of the spiral shaft 3133. And a spur gear drive gear (not shown).

  The back rear movable mechanism 3130 is provided with a lock member 3141 rotatably mounted around an axis extending forward and backward at a position slightly lower than the upper left corner in front view of the unit frame 3131, and a vertically extending unit frame 3131. A transmission slider 3142 for rotating the lock member 3141, a lock spring 3143 for urging the transmission slider 3142 upward, and a unit frame 3131 above the lock member 3141. And a rotation restricting member 3144 that restricts the rotation of the lock member 3141.

  Further, the back rear movable mechanism 3130 is attached to the unit frame 3131 and has a back rear drive motor 3135 mounted on the lower surface, and a box-shaped gear box 3145 in which a motor gear and a drive gear are housed. It has a damper 3146 attached to the gearbox 3145 upward, and a protection stopper 3147 projecting upward from the gearbox 3145 so as to surround the outer periphery of the damper 3146.

  The unit frame 3131 is formed in a frame shape by four strip-shaped members constituting each side. The unit frame 3131 has a vertical height that is substantially the same as the height in the back box 3010, and a left and right length that is substantially the same as the left and right width in the back box 3010. The pair of slide shafts 3132 are columnar metal shafts having a length substantially equal to the height of the unit frame 3131 and extending vertically. The upper and lower ends of the pair of slide shafts 3132 are attached to the unit frame 3131.

  The spiral shaft 3133 is rotatably attached to the unit frame 3131 at both upper and lower ends on the left side of the left slide shaft 3132. The spiral shaft 3133 is formed of metal.

  The slide guide 3134 includes a guide main body 3134a to which the spiral shaft 3133 is screwed, and a guide protrusion 3134b projecting rightward from the guide main body 3134a in a front view and capable of contacting the lower surface of the rear movable decorative body 3120. Have. Although not shown, the slide guide 3134 is recessed leftward from the front end of the guide projection 3134b in front view and penetrates up and down, and includes a guide groove into which the left slide shaft 3132 is inserted, and a guide body 3134a. And a detection piece protruding rearward.

  When the slide shaft 3132 is inserted into the guide groove at the tip of the guide projection 3134b, the slide guide 3134 is prevented from rotating around the axis of the spiral shaft 3133. Can move upward or downward. The slide guide 3134 is configured such that the lower surface of the left slider 3122 of the rear movable decorative body 3120 can abut on the upper surface of the guide protrusion 3134b. The detection piece of the slide guide 3134 is detected by a plurality (two) of slide detection sensors 3155 provided in the back decoration effect unit 3150.

  The lock member 3141 has a main body 3141a extending vertically, a bearing hole 3141b penetrating in a front-rear direction at a base end which is a lower part of the main body 3141a, and a right angle from a distal end which is an upper part of the main body 3141a. A planar restricting portion 3141c protruding rightward when viewed from the front and facing upward, a guide portion 3141d extending obliquely from the distal end of the restricting portion 3141c to near the base end of the main body portion 3141a, and a main body portion. A stopper 3141e protruding upward from the upper end surface of the 3141a, a transmission protrusion 3141f protruding leftward from the base end of the main body 3141a in a front view, and a transmission protrusion 3141f penetrating in the front-rear direction and transmitting. A transmission slot 3141g extending in a direction in which the projection 3141f projects.

  A shaft pin (not shown) of the unit frame 3131 is inserted into the bearing hole 3141b of the lock member 3141. As a result, the lock member 3141 is attached so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-back direction. The restricting portion 3141c is configured such that the lock projection 3122a of the left slider 3122 of the rear movable movable body 3120 can be contacted from above. The guide portion 3141d is configured such that the lock projection 3122a of the left slider 3122 can abut from below. The surface of the stopper 3141e that faces rightward when viewed from the front can be brought into contact with the rotation restricting member 3144. The transmission pin 3142a of the transmission slider 3142 is slidably inserted into the transmission elongated hole 3141g.

  The transmission slider 3142 is formed by a vertically extending metal strip, and is slightly shorter than the height of the unit frame 3131 in the frame. The transmission slider 3142 is slidably mounted on the left side of the unit frame 3131 so as to be vertically slidable. The transmission slider 3142 protrudes in the front-rear direction near the upper end, and has a cylindrical transmission pin 3142a slidably inserted into the transmission elongated hole 3141g of the lock member 3141, and a guide projection of the slide guide 3134 formed at the lower end. A release contact portion 3142b capable of contacting with the 3134b, and a locking portion 3142c formed at the upper end to lock the lower end of the lock spring 3143 are provided. The release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142 is located below the height of the upper end of the protection stopper 3147.

  The lock spring 3143 is a coil spring. The lock spring 3143 has an upper end locked to an upper end of a portion constituting the left side of the unit frame 3131, and a lower end locked to a locking portion 3142 c of the transmission slider 3142. The lock spring 3143 urges the transmission slider 3142 upward.

  The damper 3146 includes a cylindrical damper main body 3146a attached to the gear box 3145, a piston rod 3146b extending upward from the damper main body 3146a, and a cylindrical shape attached to the tip (upper end) of the piston rod 3146b. Contact receiving part 3146c. Although not shown, the damper main body 3146a of the damper 3146 has a columnar space extending in the vertical direction (axial direction) therein, and is slidable in the vertical direction (axial direction) within the space. A piston, a spring for urging the piston upward, and a viscous fluid filled in the space therein, and a piston rod 3146b extends upward and outward from the piston.

  The damper 3146 is configured such that the left slider 3122 of the rear movable decorative body 3120 can contact the contact receiving portion 3146c at the upper end from above. When the rear movable decorative body 3120 abuts on the abutment receiving portion 3146c from above, the damper 3146 moves the piston inside the damper main body 3146a downward via the piston rod 3146b. The impact can be absorbed by viscous resistance due to the viscous fluid. In a state where the back movable ornamental body 3120 is not in contact with the contact receiving portion 3146c (free state), the upper surface of the contact receiving portion 3146c is positioned higher than the height of the upper end of the protective stopper 3147. I have.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back rear movable effect unit 3110 will be described. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 133, the back movable movable unit 3110 is in the retracted position where the back movable decorative body 3120 is at the highest position, and the lock member 3141 is in the front view. At the lock position, which is the end of rotation in the clockwise direction. In this state, the lower surface of the left slider 3122 of the rear movable decorative body 3120 is in contact with the guide projection 3134b of the slide guide 3134, and the lock projection 3122a of the left slider 3122 is smaller than the restricting portion 3141c of the lock member 3141. It is located above.

  In a normal state, the detection piece of the left slider 3122 in the back movable decoration 3120 is detected by the decoration detection sensor 3154 of the back decoration effecting unit 3150, and the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 is detected by the back. It is detected by the upper slide detection sensor 3155 in the rear decoration effecting unit 3150.

  In the lock member 3141 in the locked position, the main body 3141a is vertical, and the transmission protrusion 3141f protruding leftward from the base end of the main body 3141a is horizontal. In the lock member 3141, a restricting portion 3141c protruding rightward from the upper end of the main body portion 3141a is located immediately below the lock protrusion 3122a of the rear movable decorative body 3120, and the stopper 3141e protrudes upward. Are in contact with the rotation restricting member 3144. Since the stopper 3141e is in contact with the rotation restricting member 3144, the lock member 3141 restricts further rotation in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front.

  When the stopper 3141e of the lock member 3141 abuts on the rotation restricting member 3144, the rotation of the transmission protrusion 3141f in the upward moving direction is restricted, and thus the transmission length formed on the transmission protrusion 3141f. The transmission pin 3142a inserted in the hole 3141g does not move further upward. Therefore, the further movement of the transmission slider 3142 urged upward by the lock spring 3143 is restricted by the lock member 3141 in the locked position upward through the transmission pin 3142a.

  In this normal state, the downward movement (falling) of the back movable movable body 3120 is regulated by the slide guide 3134. In this state, if the slide guide 3134 moves downward to some extent due to a malfunction or the like, the lock projection 3122a of the left slider 3122 of the rear movable decorative body 3120 is moved to the restricting portion of the lock member 3141. Since it abuts on the 3141c, it is possible to restrict movement (fall) below the lock member 3141 (the restricting portion 3141c). In other words, in the normal state, the slide guide 3134 and the lock member 3141 prevent the back movable decorative body 3120 from falling.

  In this normal state, when the spiral shaft 3133 is rotated in a predetermined direction (here, a counterclockwise direction in plan view) by the back rear drive motor 3135, the guide main body 3134 a screwed to the spiral shaft 3133 causes The slide guide 3134 moves downward. By moving the slide guide 3134 downward, the back movable decorative body 3120 abutting on the upper surface of the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 moves downward together with the slide guide 3134.

  When the lock projection 3122a of the rear movable decorative body 3120 moving downward together with the slide guide 3134 abuts on the restricting portion 3141c of the lock member 3141, the downward movement of the rear movable decorative body 3120 is moved downward. As a result, the movement of the rear movable decorative body 3120 is stopped, and the state becomes the standby position (see FIG. 134). In the state of the standby position, the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 is located below the slide detection sensor 3155 above the back decoration effect unit 3150, and is in a non-detection state. On the other hand, the detection piece of the left slider 3122 of the back rear movable decorative body 3120 is in a state of being detected by the decorative body detection sensor 3154 of the rear back decoration effecting unit 3150. Although not shown, the detection piece of the left slider 3122 is moved up and down so that the back movable decoration 3120 is detected by the decoration detection sensor 3154 of the back decoration effect unit 3150 from the retracted position to the standby position. Extends to.

  Thereafter, when the slide guide 3134 is further moved downward by the back rear drive motor 3135, the guide projection 3134b of the slide guide 3134 separates from the lower surface of the left slider 3122 of the back movable movable body 3120, and the back movable movable body 3120 is moved. In the standby position, only the slide guide 3134 moves downward (see FIG. 135).

  In this state, the load on the rear movable ornamental body 3120 acts on the restricting portion 3141c projecting to the right of the lock member 3141. Therefore, the load applied to the restricting portion 3141c causes the lock member 3141 to move in the bearing hole 3141b. About to rotate clockwise in front view. However, since the stopper 3141e of the lock member 3141 is in contact with the rotation restricting member 3144 from the left, rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted, and the lock projection 3122a of the rear movable decorative body 3120 is restricted. Does not come off from the regulating portion 3141c.

  Then, when the lower surface of the guide projection 3134b of the sliding guide 3134 moving downward contacts the upper surface of the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142 (see FIG. 135), the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 moves to the back. It is detected by the slide detection sensor 3155 below the rear decoration effecting unit 3150. In this state, the upper surface of the guide projection 3134b of the slide guide 3134 is lower than the height of the upper end of the protection stopper 3147.

  In this state, when the slide guide 3134 is further moved downward by the back rear drive motor 3135 via the spiral shaft 3133, the guide projection 3134b of the slide guide 3134 presses the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142 downward. The transmission slider 3142 slides downward against the urging force of the lock spring 3143.

  When the transmission slider 3142 slides downward, the transmission pin 3142a of the transmission slider 3142 also moves downward, so that the transmission elongated hole 3141g of the lock member 3141 into which the transmission pin 3142a is inserted is pressed downward by the transmission pin 3142a. The lock member 3141 rotates around the bearing hole 3141b in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front (see FIG. 136).

  When the lock member 3141 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the restricting portion 3141c with which the lock protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 of the back movable ornamental body 3120 abuts from above is moved to the front end side (right end side). ) Moves upward and at the same time pivots to move to the left. That is, with the rotation of the lock member 3141 in the counterclockwise direction, the rear movable ornamental body 3120 is raised via the lock projection 3122a by the rising tip side of the regulating portion 3141c, and the tip of the regulating portion 3141c. The side slides to the left on the lower surface of the lock projection 3122a.

  Thereafter, when the lock member 3141 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction and the tip of the restricting portion 3141c moves to the left from the left end of the lock projection 3122a of the back movable ornamental body 3120, the back movable ornamental body is moved. 3120 loses the support from below by the restricting portion 3141c, and the movable decorative body 3120 falls behind by the acting gravity (see FIG. 136). That is, the lock member 3141 extends from a lock position where the upper surface of the restricting portion 3141c is in contact with the lower surface of the lock protrusion 3122a to a position (release position) where the tip of the restrictive portion 3141c is further left than the left end of the lock protrusion 3122a. When rotated in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the lock of the back movable ornamental body 3120, which was restricted (locked) in the downward movement, is released, and the back movable ornamental body 3120 is in the standby position. Free fall from

  In the rear movable decorative body 3120 that has fallen from the standby position, the lower surface of the left slider 3122 abuts against the contact receiving portion 3146c of the damper 3146, and the piston rod 3146b sinks into the damper main body 3146a via the contact receiving portion 3146c. The impact of the drop of the rear movable decorative body 3120 is absorbed by the spring and the viscous fluid in the damper body 3146a. Then, before the lower surface of the left slider 3122 abuts on the upper surface of the protection stopper 3147, the falling of the back movable decorative body 3120 is stopped, and the state is at the lowered position.

  When the back movable ornament 3120 is in the lowered position, a gap is formed between the lower surface of the left slider 3122 and the upper surface of the protection stopper 3147, and the upper surface of the guide projection 3134b of the slide guide 3134 is moved to the left. It is located sufficiently below the lower surface of the slider 3122 (the upper end of the protective stopper 3147). That is, the rear movable decorative body 3120 that has freely dropped from the standby position to the lowered position is configured so that nothing comes into contact with members other than the damper 3146.

  Thus, even if the large rear movable decorative body 3120 extending to the left and right with substantially the same length as the entire width of the effect display device 1600 is freely dropped at the same height from the upper part to the lower part of the effect display device 1600, the damper 3146 is provided. It does not come into contact with other members, and the other members are not damaged by a large impact. Even if it is not possible to sufficiently stop the back movable ornamental body 3120 that has fallen freely in the damper 3146, the damper 3146 abuts on the protective stopper 3147 with the kinetic energy attenuated by the damper 3146. Thus, the fall of the back movable ornamental body 3120 can be stopped without breaking the protective stopper 3147. In addition, since the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 is located below the upper end of the protective stopper 3147, the back-movable decorative body 3120 that has fallen freely does not abut the guide protrusion 3134b, and is movable behind the back. The slide guide 3134 can be prevented from being damaged due to the abutment of the decorative body 3120.

  When the spiral shaft 3133 is rotated in the opposite direction (here, clockwise in plan view) by the back drive motor 3135 after dropping the back movable movable body 3120 to the lowered position, the slide guide 3134 Rises. When the slide abutment 3142b of the transmission slider 3142 is pressed downward by the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 and the transmission slider 3142 is slid downward, the transmission slider 3142 is raised when the slide guide 3134 is raised. The transmission slider 3142 is slid upward together with the slide guide 3134 (guide protrusion 3134b) because the transmission slider 3142 is urged upward by 3143.

  When the transmission slider 3142 slides upward, the transmission pin 3142a moves upward. Therefore, the transmission long hole 3141g of the lock member 3141 into which the transmission pin 3142a is inserted is pressed upward by the transmission pin 3142a, and the lock member 3141 is moved. It rotates in the clockwise direction in front view about the bearing hole 3141b. When the transmission slider 3142 further slides upward with the slide guide 3134, the stopper 3141e of the lock member 3141 comes into contact with the rotation restricting member 3144, and further rotation of the lock member 3141 in the clockwise direction is performed. In addition to the restriction, the upward movement of the transmission slider 3142 is restricted. As a result, the lock member 3141 returns from the release position to the lock position.

  When the slide guide 3134 is moved upward by the back rear drive motor 3135 from this state, the upward movement of the transmission slider 3142 is regulated as described above. The guide projection 3134b of the slide guide 3134 moves upward, and only the slide guide 3134 moves upward. Then, the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 moving upward contacts the left slider 3122 of the rear movable decorative body 3120 in the lower position from below, and the rear movable decorative body 3120 via the left slider 3122. Will move upward together with the slide guide 3134 (see FIG. 137).

  In the back rear movable effect unit 3110, after the back movable ornament 3120 is dropped, the back movable ornament 3120 is moved upward from the lowered position by the slide guide 3134, and the back movable ornament 3120 is moved between the standby position and the lowered position. 137, the back-side movable decorative body 3120 can be arbitrarily moved vertically by the slide guide 3134 by appropriately changing the rotation direction of the back-side drive motor 3135 (see FIG. 137). ).

  Then, when the slide guide 3134 is moved upward by the back drive motor 3135, and the back movable decorative body 3120 moving upward from the lowered position along with the slide guide 3134 moves to a height near the standby position, The lock projection 3122a of the left slider 3122 of the rear movable movable body 3120 abuts on the guide portion 3141d of the lock member 3141 in the locked position from below. In this state, when the lock projection 3122a (the back movable decorative body 3120) is further moved upward by the slide guide 3134, the guide portion 3141d of the lock member 3141 is inclined. A leftward force acts on the contacting part.

  Therefore, as the lock protrusion 3122a moves upward, the lock member 3141 rotates counterclockwise in the front view around the bearing hole 3141b due to the leftward force acting on the guide portion 3141d. (See FIG. 138). At this time, in the lock member 3141, the transmission protrusion 3141f protruding leftward from the base end of the main body 3141a moves downward due to the rotation in the counterclockwise direction. The lock member 3141 rotates counterclockwise against the urging force of the lock spring 3143 acting clockwise through the transmission pin 3142a of the transmission slider 3142 inserted into the transmission slot 3141g of the portion 3141f. To rotate.

  Thereafter, when the lock projection 3122a further moves upward, the lock member 3141 further rotates counterclockwise in front view, whereby the restricting portion 3141c and the guide portion 3141d projecting rightward from the main body portion 3141a are locked. The lock projection 3122a moves to the release position on the left side of the projection 3122a, and the upper surface of the lock projection 3122a moves upward from the restricting portion 3141c. Then, when the lock protrusion 3122a moves further upward and the lower surface of the lock protrusion 3122a moves above the tip of the guide portion 3141d of the lock member 3141, the contact with the guide portion 3141d is released. As a result, the lock member 3141 rotates clockwise in front view by the urging force of the lock spring 3143, and changes from the release position to the lock position. When the lock member 3141 is rotated to the lock position, the lower surface of the lock protrusion 3122a is located above the upper surface of the restricting portion 3141c.

  Then, the lock projection 3122a (the rear movable decorative body 3120) is further moved upward by the slide guide 3134, and the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 is detected by the upper slide detection sensor 3155 of the rear decorative effect unit 3150. Then, the drive of the back-side drive motor 3135 stops, and the back-side movable decorative body 3120 stops at the retracted position. That is, the rear movable decorative body 3120 returns to the normal state.

  As described above, when the slide guide 3134 is moved downward by the back rear drive motor 3135, the lock member 3141 is rotated from the lock position to the release position via the transmission slider 3142, and the back rear movable decorative body 3120 is placed in a standby state. It can be freely dropped from the position to the lowered position. Thereby, a large nata (the back movable decorative body 3120) straddling the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction can show the player a movable effect that falls freely while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous game state (for example, a “big hit” game) in which the player is advantageous to the player occurs. It can be made to think that it is, and it can raise the expectation for the game.

  Next, the back decoration effect unit 3150 of the back effect unit 3100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 139 to 141 and the like. The back and back decoration effecting unit 3150 is a frame-shaped unit base 3151 having a quadrangular outer shape, and a transparent flat back second light guide plate attached to the front side of the unit base 3151 and closing the inside of the frame of the unit base 3151. 3160, a rear frame decorative lens 3152 which is attached to the front side of the unit base 3151 in front of the rear second light guide plate 3160 and is decorated with a shape such that the glass is broken. It has a back upper decorative board 3153 mounted between the unit base 3151 and the back decorative lens 3152 above the back second light guide plate 3160.

  The back decoration effect unit 3150 includes a decoration detection sensor 3154 that detects a detection piece of the left slider 3122 of the back movable decoration 3120, and two detection pieces that are detected by the slide guide 3134 of the back movable mechanism 3130. It comprises a slide detection sensor 3155 and a condenser lens 3156 arranged below the back second light guide plate 3160 and extending left and right.

  In addition, the rear back decoration effecting unit 3150 is attached between the unit base 3151 and the rear back decoration lens 3152 on both the left and right outer sides of the rear second light guide plate 3160, and faces the left and right side surfaces of the rear second light guide plate 3160. A pair of left and right fifth picture substrates 3171 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a capable of irradiating light are mounted, and between the unit base 3151 and the back decoration lens 3152 below the back second light guide plate 3160. And a pair of sixth pattern substrates 3172 on which are mounted a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3172a capable of irradiating light toward the lower surface of the back second light guide plate 3160.

  The outer shape of the unit base 3151 of the back decoration effecting unit 3150 is formed to be substantially the same size as the unit frame 3131. The back rear decorative lens 3152 is formed in a square shape whose outer shape is slightly smaller than the outer shape of the unit frame 3131. The unit frame 3131 has a transparent plate-shaped decorative lens portion that protrudes upward (inward) from the lower side and is formed in a shape such that the window glass is broken and glass fragments remain on the window frame. The frame-shaped rear decorative lens 3152 has a shape such that the inside protrudes into the frame of the unit base 3151 when viewed from the front, and the window glass is broken so that glass fragments remain on the window frame. In the back rear decorative lens 3152, the edge of the part protruding inward is formed obliquely to the front-back direction.

  The back and upper decorative substrates 3153 are arranged in the left-right direction, and a plurality of LEDs 3153a capable of irradiating light downward are mounted on the front. The rear back upper decorative substrate 3153 is in contact with the front surface of the rear rear decorative lens 3152 on the front surface, and the plurality of LEDs 3153a are arranged inward from the side surface side of the frame-shaped rear decorative lens 3152 toward the inside. It is mounted so that light is irradiated inside.

  The decorative body detection sensor 3154 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the left fifth picture substrate 3171 so as to detect the detection piece of the back movable decorative body 3120 located between the retracted position and the standby position. ing. The two slide detection sensors 3155 are configured to detect the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 when the back movable movable body 3120 is in the retracted position, and to detect the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 on the left side of the fifth pattern substrate 3171 and the slide guide 3134. Attached to the lower part of the front surface of the fifth fifth picture substrate 3171 so that the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 can be detected when the guide projection 3134b is at a height at which the guide projection 3134b contacts the release contact part 3142b of the transmission slider 3142. Have been.

  The pair of fifth pattern substrates 3171 are mounted on the rear surface thereof in a state where a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a are vertically arranged in rows. A pair of fifth pattern substrates 3171 are vertically arranged in a row on the front surface, and a plurality of LEDs 3171b for mounting and decorating the rear decorative lens 3152 with light emission are mounted. The fifth picture pattern substrate 3171 on the left has a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a on the rear surface mounted so as to irradiate light toward the right, and a plurality of LEDs 3171b on the front surface emits light toward the right. It is mounted so that it can be irradiated. The rear surface of the fifth rear panel decorative lens 3152 is in contact with the front surface of the fifth design substrate 3171 on the left side, and the plurality of LEDs 3171b on the front surface are inwardly directed inward from the side surfaces of the frame-shaped rear decorative lens 3152. It is mounted so that light is applied to the interior of the decorative lens 3152.

  Also, the fifth picture substrate 3171 on the right has a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a on the rear surface mounted so as to be able to irradiate light to the left, and the plurality of LEDs 3171b on the front surface is directed to the left. It is mounted so that light can be emitted. The rear face of the back decorative lens 3152 is in contact with the front face of the fifth picture substrate 3171 on the right side, and the plurality of LEDs 3171b on the front face is inwardly directed inward from the side of the frame-shaped back decorative lens 3152. It is mounted so that light is irradiated inside the rear decorative lens 3152.

  The sixth pattern substrate 3172 has a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3172a mounted on the rear surface thereof so as to be able to irradiate light upward, and is arranged on the front surface in a line in the left-right direction, so that the light is directed upward. Are mounted. When light is emitted upward from the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3172a on the rear surface, the sixth picture substrate 3172 can be made incident on the inside of the back second light guide plate 3160 via the condenser lens 3156. The sixth pattern substrate 3172 has a front surface and a rear surface of the rear decorative lens 3152 in contact with the front surface. It is mounted so that light is irradiated inside 3152.

  With the above structure, the back decoration lens 3152 emits the LED 3153a of the back upper decoration substrate 3153, the LED 3171b of the pair of fifth design substrates 3171, and the LED 3172b of the sixth design substrate 3172 to emit light. Can be reflected forward by the inclined portion of the edge protruding inside the frame. As a result, the player can see a light emission effect in which the edge of the broken glass remaining in the window frame is shining.

  The second back light guide plate 3160 includes a fifth picture 3161 (see FIG. 140) formed by an innumerable number of fifth reflecting portions having an uneven shape for reflecting only light from the left and right directions forward, and light from the up and down directions. And a sixth pattern 3162 (see FIG. 141) formed by an innumerable sixth reflective portion having an uneven shape that reflects only the light forward. In other words, the back-side decoration effecting unit 3150 can cause the light guide LED 3171a of the fifth pattern substrate 3171 to emit light, and can cause the fifth pattern 3161 to emit light. When the light is emitted, the sixth picture 3162 can be displayed.

  In the back second light guide plate 3160, countless fifth reflecting portions forming the fifth pattern 3161 and countless sixth reflecting portions forming the sixth pattern 3162 are formed with minute irregularities. The LED 3171a for the light guide plate of the fifth pattern substrate 3171 and the LED 3172a for the light guide plate of the sixth pattern substrate 3172 do not emit light. The effect image or the like can be visually recognized in a good state.

  As shown in FIG. 140, the fifth pattern 3161 is a pattern having a guide (message) to the player which is entirely composed of the characters “Chance!” In a sandstorm-like pattern. As shown in FIG. 141, the sixth pattern 3162 is a pattern in which pieces of broken glass are scattered. The sixth pattern 3162 has fewer pieces of glass scattered than the third pattern 3211 of the back middle rendering unit 3200 described later.

  As shown in the figure, the letters “Chance!” Of the fifth pattern 3161 are arranged at the center in the up-down direction. When only the light is emitted, it is possible to display only the characters “Chance!”. Alternatively, when the three light guide plate LEDs 3171a at the center in the vertical direction are turned off and the remaining light guide plate LEDs 3171a emit light, the entire display can be displayed in a state where the characters "Chance!" Are not visible (it is difficult to see). .

  Note that the LEDs mounted on the back upper decorative board 3153, the pair of fifth picture boards 3171, and the sixth picture board 3172 in the back back decoration effecting unit 3150 are all side-view type full-color LEDs. .

  As shown in the drawing, the back-side decoration effecting unit 3150 of the present embodiment is configured such that the back-side upper decoration substrate 3153, the pair of fifth pattern substrates 3171, and the sixth pattern substrate 3172 have their respective plate faces on the back side. The light guide plate 3160 is arranged parallel to the surface. This can suppress an increase in the size in the front-rear direction of the back decoration effect unit 3150, and also allows the fifth design 3161 and the sixth design 3162 of the second back light guide plate 3160 to emit light and decorate the back decoration lens 3152 and the like. Can be done.

  The back decoration effect unit 3150 of the present embodiment has a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3172a for emitting and displaying the sixth pattern 3162 of the second back light guide plate 3160 only on the lower side of the second back light guide plate 3160. Although the number is smaller than the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a for emitting and displaying the fifth pattern 3161, a condenser lens 3156 is arranged between the light guide plate LED 3172a and the back second light guide plate 3160. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the light spreading from the light guide plate LED 3172a from being unnecessarily diffused, and to cause the sixth pattern 3162 to emit light with optimal brightness even if the number is small. Can be.

[5-9-2. Uranaka production unit]
Next, the back middle rendering unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 to 144 and the like. FIG. 142 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back-side production unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, disassembled for each main member, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the back-side production unit for each main member. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the apparatus viewed from behind. FIG. 143 is a front view showing a state in which a third pattern is illuminated and decorated in the back middle effect unit, and FIG. 144 is a front view showing a state in which a fourth pattern is illuminated and decorated in the back middle effect unit.

  The back middle production unit 3200 is attached to the front of the back rear production unit 3100 inside the back box 3010. The rear middle rendering unit 3200 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010. The back middle rendering unit 3200 is a frame-shaped unit base 3201 having a rectangular outer shape, and a transparent flat back first light guide plate 3210 attached to the front side of the unit base 3201 and closing the inside of the frame of the unit base 3201. A transparent frame-shaped rear middle decorative lens 3202 attached to the front side of the unit base 3201 in front of the rear first light guide plate 3210 and decorated with a broken glass shape; A back middle left decorative substrate 3203 attached between the unit base 3201 and the back middle decorative lens 3202 on the left side of the first light guide plate 3210, and is disposed on the right side of the back first light guide plate 3210 and vertically And a condensing lens 3204 extending.

  In addition, the back middle rendering unit 3200 is attached to the right outside of the back first light guide plate 3210 and between the unit base 3201 and the back middle decoration lens 3202, and directs light toward the right side of the back first light guide plate 3210. A third pattern substrate 3221 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3221a that can be irradiated is mounted, and mounted between the unit base 3201 and the back middle decorative lens 3202 on both upper and lower outer sides of the back first light guide plate 3210. A pair of upper and lower fourth pattern substrates 3222 on which are mounted a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3222a capable of irradiating light toward the upper and lower surfaces of the back first light guide plate 3210.

  The outer shape of the unit base 3201 of the back middle rendering unit 3200 is formed to be substantially the same size as the unit frame 3131 of the back middle rendering unit 3100. The unit base 3201 has a transparent flat decorative lens portion that protrudes upward (inward) from the lower side and is formed in a shape such that the window glass is broken and glass fragments remain on the window frame. The back middle decorative lens 3202 is formed in a square shape whose outer shape is slightly smaller than the outer shape of the unit base 3201. The inner frame-shaped rear decorative lens 3202 projects into the frame of the unit base 3201 when viewed from the front, and is formed in a shape such that the window glass is broken and glass fragments remain on the window frame. In the back middle decorative lens 3202, the edge of the part protruding inward is formed obliquely to the front-back direction.

  The back center left decorative substrate 3203 is arranged in the vertical direction, and has a plurality of LEDs 3203a capable of irradiating light to the right mounted on the front surface. The rear middle left decorative substrate 3203 is in contact with the front surface of the rear middle decorative lens 3202 on the front surface. It is mounted so that light is irradiated inside 3202.

  In the third pattern substrate 3221, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3221a are mounted on the rear surface so as to be able to irradiate light to the left, and are arranged in a vertical direction on the front surface to face the left. A plurality of LEDs 3221b capable of irradiating light are mounted. When light is emitted to the left from the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3221a on the rear surface, the third picture substrate 3221 can be made to enter the inside of the back first light guide plate 3210 via the condenser lens 3204. The third pattern substrate 3221 has a front surface against which the rear surface of the back decoration lens 3202 is in contact, and the plurality of LEDs 3221b on the front surface are inwardly directed from the side surface side of the frame-shaped back decoration lens 3202 toward the inside. It is mounted so that light is irradiated inside 3202.

  The pair of fourth pattern substrates 3222 are mounted on the rear surface in a state where a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3222a are arranged in a row in the left-right direction. The pair of fourth pattern substrates 3222 are arranged on the front side in a row in the left-right direction, and a plurality of LEDs 3222b for emitting and decorating the back decoration lens 3202 are mounted. The upper fourth pattern substrate 3222 is mounted so that the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3222a on the rear surface can emit light downward, and the plurality of LEDs 3222b on the front surface can emit light downward. Has been implemented. The upper surface of the fourth pictorial substrate 3222 is in contact with the front surface of the back inner decorative lens 3202 on the front surface. It is mounted so that light is applied to the interior of the decorative lens 3202.

  The lower fourth substrate for a pattern 3222 has a plurality of LEDs for a light guide plate 3222a on a rear surface mounted thereon so as to emit light upward, and a plurality of LEDs for a front surface 3222b emits light upward. Has been implemented. The lower surface of the back decoration lens 3202 abuts on the front surface of the lower fourth pattern substrate 3222, and the plurality of LEDs 3222b on the front surface are directed inward from the side surfaces of the frame-shaped back decoration lens 3202. It is mounted so that light is applied to the inside of the back inner decorative lens 3202.

  With the above configuration, the back middle decorative lens 3202 emits the LED 3203a of the back middle left decorative board 3203, the LED 3221b of the third picture board 3221, and the LED 3222b of the pair of fourth picture boards 3222 to emit light inside. Can be reflected forward by the inclined portion of the edge protruding inside the frame. As a result, the player can see a light emission effect in which the edge of the broken glass remaining in the window frame is shining.

  The back first light guide plate 3210 includes a third pattern 3211 (see FIG. 143) formed by an innumerable third reflection portion having an uneven shape that reflects only light from the left and right directions forward, and light from the up and down directions. And a fourth pattern 3212 (see FIG. 144) formed by an innumerable number of fourth reflecting portions having an uneven shape that reflects only the light forward. In other words, when the back middle rendering unit 3200 causes the light guide plate LED 3221a of the third design substrate 3221 to emit light, the third design 3211 can emit light and the light guide plate LED 3222a of the fourth design substrate 3222 emits light. Then, the fourth pattern 3212 can be displayed by light emission.

  The back first light guide plate 3210 has countless third reflection portions forming the third pattern 3211 and countless fourth reflection portions forming the fourth pattern 3212, each of which is formed with fine irregularities. When the LED 3221a for the light guide plate of the third pattern substrate 3221 and the LED 3222a for the light guide plate of the fourth pattern substrate 3222 do not emit light, they appear transparent, and the back of the rear effect unit 3100 on the rear side. The effect image and the like displayed on the rear movable decorative body 3120 and the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  As shown in FIG. 143, the third pattern 3211 is a pattern in which radial and concentric cracks have entered the glass and then split into a plurality of pieces. In the third pattern 3211, more pieces of scattered glass are drawn than in the sixth pattern 3162 of the back second light guide plate 3160 in the back decoration effect unit 3150. As shown in FIG. 144, the fourth pattern 3212 is a pattern in which a plurality of light streaks extend diagonally upward or diagonally downward.

  As shown in FIG. 144, the fourth pattern 3212 is formed such that the obliquely extending streak corresponds to each light guide plate LED 3222a mounted on the upper and lower fourth pattern substrates 3222. That is, when one light guide plate LED 3222a emits light, the upper or lower side of the back first light guide plate 3210 starts from a portion closest to the light guide plate LED 3222a that emits light, and the center of the back first light guide plate 3210 in the vertical direction. Two light streaks (V-shaped light streaks) that extend diagonally so as to move away from each other are decorated with light emission.

  Since the fourth pattern 3212 is farther from the light guide plate LED 3222a as it goes toward the center in the vertical direction of the back first light guide plate 3210, the brightness of the V-shaped light streak is equal to that of the back first light guide plate 3210. It becomes darker toward the center in the vertical direction. Thereby, when the fourth pattern 3212 is viewed from the front (from the player side), the streak of light appears to extend rearward toward the center in the up-down direction of the back first light guide plate 3210, and the light is three-dimensional. It is possible to make an illusion that the light is radiated to the light source, and to enjoy the light emission effect by the back first light guide plate 3210.

  The LEDs mounted on the back middle left decorative board 3203, the third picture board 3221, and the pair of fourth picture boards 3222 in the back middle rendering unit 3200 are all side-view type full-color LEDs.

  As shown in the drawing, the back middle rendering unit 3200 of this embodiment is configured such that the back middle left decorative substrate 3203, the third design substrate 3221, and the pair of fourth design substrates 3222 lead the respective plate surfaces to the first back surface. It is arranged parallel to the surface of the light plate 3210. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the dimension in the front-rear direction in the back middle rendering unit 3200, and to illuminate and decorate the third picture 3211 and the fourth picture 3212 of the back first light guide plate 3210, the back middle decorative lens 3202, and the like. be able to.

  Also, in the back middle rendering unit 3200 of the present embodiment, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3221a for emitting and displaying the third pattern 3211 of the back first light guide plate 3210 are arranged only on the right side of the back first light guide plate 3210. Although the number is smaller than the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3222a for emitting and displaying the fourth pattern 3212, the condenser lens 3204 is disposed between the light guide plate LED 3221a and the back first light guide plate 3210. Therefore, the light spread from the light guide plate LED 3221a can be condensed to prevent the light from being unnecessarily diffused, and even if the number is small, the third pattern 3211 can be illuminated and displayed with optimal brightness. it can.

[5-9-3. Back right production unit]
Next, the back right rendering unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 145 is a front view of the back right effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 146 (a) is a perspective view of the back right production unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 146 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the back right production unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 147 is a front view of the back-right effecting unit with the back-right movable mechanism emphasized in a normal state in which the tip of the back-right movable decorative body is rotated upward and the bearing slider is located at the rising end. It is. FIG. 148 is a front view of the back-right effect unit, showing a state in which the bearing slider is located at the lower end while the back-right movable decorative body remains as it is from the state of FIG. 147. FIG. 149 is a front view of the back-right effect unit, showing a state in which the tip of the back-right movable decorative body has turned downward from the state of FIG. 148. FIG. 150 is a front view of the back right rendering unit showing a state in which the bearing slider is located at the rising end with the back right movable decorative body remaining as it is from the state of FIG. 149.

  The back right rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the upper right corner of the front of the back middle rendering unit 3200 in the back box 3010. The back right rendering unit 3300 includes a back right movable rendering unit 3310 attached to the front of the back middle rendering unit 3200 and a back front right decorative body unit 3350 attached to the front of the back right movable rendering unit 3310. Have.

  First, the back right movable rendering unit 3310 of the back right rendering unit 3300 will be described. The back right movable rendering unit 3310 extends with a length shorter than the total width of the rendering display device 1600 in the left-right direction, and is formed in a shape imitating a nata as an item in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. There is provided a movable decorative body 3320, and a back right movable mechanism 3330 that is mounted so as to be rotatable about the base end side of the back right movable decorative body 3320 and is mounted so as to be movable in the vertical direction.

  The back right movable decorative body 3320 extends in the left-right direction and is a flat decorative body 3321 simulating a fish, and the outer shape of the decorative body 3321 is the same as that of the decorative body 3321 and is attached to the rear side of the decorative body 3321. A transparent flat decorative body base 3322, and a back-right movable decorative body decorative board 3323 which is attached between the decorative body base 3322 and the decorative body main body 3321 and has a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the front and rear surfaces (FIG. 145).

  The decorative body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is formed in a shape imitating a nut, and has a left end side as a front end of the nut and a lower side as a nut blade in a front view. The decorative body 3321 has a transparent lower half in the vertical direction. The decoration body 3321 is formed with a crack-shaped decoration that spreads radially around a vertically central portion near the tip.

  The back right movable decorative body 3320 has a shaft hole 3324 penetrating in the front-rear direction on the base end side, which is the right end side in the front view of the decorative body main body 3321 and the decorative body base 3322, and a lower side on the left side of the shaft hole 3324. And a column-shaped decorative body-side link pin 3325 that protrudes rearward in the vicinity.

  The back right movable decorative body decoration substrate 3323 includes a plurality of central LEDs 3323a that irradiate light forward toward a portion behind the center of the radially extending crack pattern of the decorative body main body 3321 on the front surface. The center LED 3323a is a high-brightness LED. In addition, the back right movable decorative body decoration substrate 3323 includes a plurality of peripheral LEDs 3323b on the front surface and the rear surface for irradiating light in a direction along the surface of the substrate.

  The back right movable decorative body 3320 can be illuminated and decorated such that the center portion of the crack pattern of the decorative body main body 3321 shines by appropriately illuminating the center LED 3323a of the back right movable decorative body decorative board 3323. By illuminating the peripheral LED 3323b of the decorative body decoration substrate 3323, the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body main body 3321 and the crack pattern can be illuminated.

  The back right movable mechanism 3330 of the back right movable production unit 3310 extends vertically and is attached to the upper right part of the front of the back middle production unit 3200. The unit base 3331 has a height of about ／ of the total height of the unit base 3331 from below. A bearing having a columnar bearing pin 3332a that is mounted to be movable in the up and down direction at the height and that is protruded in the front and rear direction and rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 3324 of the back right movable decorative body 3320. And a slider 3332.

  The back right movable mechanism 3330 includes a back right drive motor 3333 attached to the upper part of the unit base 3331 with the rotation axis directed in the front-rear direction, and a spur gear-shaped attached to the rotation shaft of the back right drive motor 3333. , A transmission projection 3335a that meshes with the motor gear 3334 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3331, and projects in the front-rear direction, and a detection piece (not shown) that projects in the front-rear direction. And a link drive gear 3335 in the form of a spur gear.

  The back right movable mechanism 3330 is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at a position obliquely lower right of the link drive gear 3335 in the unit base 3331 when viewed from the front, and extends in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. A transmission link gear 3336 having a transmission arm 3336a extending and abutting on a transmission protrusion 3335a of the link drive gear 3335, and a transmission gear portion 3336b extending in an arc around the rotation axis; A spur gear-shaped third gear is rotatably mounted around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction at a portion of the base 3331 below the rotation axis of the transmission link gear 3336, and meshes with a transmission gear portion 3336b of the transmission link gear 3336. A spur gear shape that rotates together with the one gear portion 3337a and the first gear portion 3337a and has a larger diameter than the first gear portion 3337a. The second gear portion 3337B, and to have two-stage gear 3337 that has, and a.

  Further, the back right movable mechanism 3330 is attached to the unit base 3331 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and is formed on the rack body 3338a extending vertically and the rack body 3338a, and the second gear portion 3337b of the two-stage gear 3337. A slide gear 3338b having a rack gear portion 3338b that meshes with and extends linearly in the vertical direction, and a columnar movable mechanism side link pin 3338c that projects in the front-rear direction below the rack body 3338a; A link arm extending up and down, the upper end of which is rotatably inserted with the decorative body side link pin 3325 of the back right movable decorative body 3320, and the lower end of which is rotatably inserted with the movable mechanism side link pin 3338c of the slide rack 3338. 3339.

  The back right movable mechanism 3330 is attached to the unit base 3331, and can move the back right movable by detecting a shock absorbing rubber 3340 capable of contacting the back right movable decorative body 3320 and a detection piece of the link drive gear 3335. And two movable position detection sensors (not shown) for detecting the position of the decorative body 3320.

  Next, an operation of the back right movable effect unit 3310 by the back right movable mechanism 3330 will be described. In the normal state, the back right movable rendering unit 3310 has the bearing slider 3332 and the slide rack 3338 of the back right movable mechanism 3330 located at the rising end and the bearing pin 3332a of the bearing slider 3332 as shown in FIG. The back right movable decorative body 3320 to which the base end is rotatably attached is inclined such that the front end is located above the base end (initial state). In this state, in the back right movable decorative body 3320, the center of the decorative body side link pin 3325 is located slightly above the center of the shaft hole 3324, and the detection piece of the link drive gear 3335 is It is detected by the movable position detection sensor of the first eye.

  In this normal state, the transmission projection 3335a of the link drive gear 3335 is located slightly above the center of rotation of the link drive gear 3335 on the right in front view, and the transmission projection 3335a transmits the transmission link gear 3336 to the transmission projection 3335a. The arm 3336a is in contact from the right. More specifically, the rotation center point of the transmission link gear 3336, the transmission projection 3335a, and the transmission arm are defined with respect to a straight line connecting the rotation center point of the link drive gear 3335 and the contact point between the transmission projection 3335a and the transmission arm 3336a. The straight line connecting the contact point with 3336a is orthogonal. Accordingly, the force acting on the transmission protrusion 3335a from the transmission arm 3336a passes through the center of rotation of the link drive gear 3335, so that the link drive gear 3335 rotates even if a force acts on the transmission protrusion 3335a from the transmission arm 3336a. Therefore, the transmission link gear 3336 does not rotate in the direction in which the transmission arm 3336a moves leftward in front view (the counterclockwise direction in front view). That is, in the normal state, the rotation of the transmission link gear 3336 in the counterclockwise direction in front view is restricted (locked) by the link drive gear 3335.

  By the way, in the bearing slider 3332, since the bearing pin 3332a is inserted into the shaft hole 3324 on the base end side of the back right movable decorative body 3320, the load of the back right movable decorative body 3320 acts via the bearing pin 3332a. are doing. In a normal state, since the bearing slider 3332 is located at the rising end, a force is exerted on the bearing slider 3332 to move downward due to the load of the back right movable decorative body 3320.

  On the other hand, since the bearing pin 3332a of the bearing slider 3332 is inserted into the shaft hole 3324 on the base end side of the back right movable decorative body 3320, the shaft hole 3324 (bearing pin 3332a ) Is exerted to rotate in a direction in which the tip side moves downward (counterclockwise in front view). Then, a force to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back right movable decorative body 3320 acts on the movable mechanism side link pin 3338c from the decorative body side link pin 3325 via the link arm 3339. In other words, a force for moving the slide rack 3338 downward via the link arm 3339 is exerted by a force for the back right movable decorative body 3320 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction by its own weight.

  The force to move the slide rack 3338 downward is transmitted by the rack gear 3338b of the slide rack 3338 to the second gear 3337 via the second gear 3337b meshing with the rack gear 3338b. It acts to rotate the gear 3337 clockwise as viewed from the front. Since the second gear 3337 has the first gear 3337a meshed with the transmission gear 3336b of the transmission link gear 3336, the force acting to rotate the second gear 3337 clockwise is used. , And acts to rotate the transmission link gear 3336 counterclockwise through the transmission gear portion 3336b. That is, the transmission link gear 3336 attempts to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the force of the back right movable decorative body 3320 rotating in the counterclockwise direction by its own weight.

  In a normal state, the transmission link gear 3336 meshes with the transmission gear portion 3336b of the transmission link gear 3336 because the rotation in the counterclockwise direction is locked by the link drive gear 3335 as described above. The two-stage gear 3337 does not rotate, and the slide rack 3338 does not move downward due to the rack gear portion 3338b meshing with the second gear portion 3337b of the two-stage gear 3337.

  As described above, since the downward movement of the slide rack 3338 is restricted, the entire link arm 3339 whose lower end is attached to the slide rack 3338 does not move downward. Therefore, the back right movable decorative body 3320 attempts to rotate counterclockwise around the upper end side (the decorative body side link pin 3325) of the link arm 3339 so that the tip side moves downward. Since the bearing slider 3332 attached to the base end side of the movable decorative body 3320 is located at the rising end, the counterclockwise rotation around the decorative body side link pin 3325 is regulated, and the back right The movable decorative body 3320 is maintained in an oblique state in which the distal end is located above the proximal end.

  In this normal state, when the link drive gear 3335 is rotated clockwise in front view by the back right drive motor 3333 via the motor gear 3334, the transmission protrusion 3335a of the link drive gear 3335 moves leftward and downward. It will revolve in the direction of movement. When the transmission protrusion 3335a revolves in the clockwise direction and changes its position, the transmission link gear 3336 in which a counterclockwise force is applied by the weight of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is transmitted. As the projection 3335a slides with respect to the transmission arm 3336a, it rotates counterclockwise while changing the portion where the transmission arm 3336a is in contact with the transmission projection 3335a (see FIG. 148). ).

  When the transmission link gear 3336 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the slide rack 3338 moves downward via the two-stage gear 3337, and the link arm 3339 also moves downward together with the slide rack 3338. Will be done. Since the load of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is supported by the bearing slider 3332 attached to the base end side, when the link arm 3339 moves downward, the bearing slider 3332 is also moved via the back right movable decorative body 3320. They will move downward together.

  As a result, the back right movable decorative body 3320 moves downward from the normal state (initial state) with the distal end side kept high until the bearing slider 3332 reaches the descending end. . That is, in the state where the back right movable decorative body 3320 moves downward from the initial state and the bearing slider 3332 reaches the descending end (first state), the distal end side is higher than the base end side, as in the initial state. It is in an oblique state.

  When the link drive gear 3335 further rotates clockwise in front view by the back right drive motor 3333 after the bearing slider 3332 reaches the lower end, the slide rack is moved via the transmission link gear 3336 and the two-stage gear 3337. 3338 will move further downward. By the downward movement of the slide rack 3338, the decorative body side link pin 3325 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is pulled downward via the link arm 3339, and the back right movable decorative body 3320 is moved to the base end axis. It rotates counterclockwise around the hole 3324 so that the tip side moves downward (see FIG. 149).

  Subsequently, when the link drive gear 3335 is rotated clockwise by the back right drive motor 3333, the back right movable decorative body 3320 further rotates counterclockwise about the shaft hole 3324, and the lower surface thereof is moved to the unit. By contacting the shock-absorbing rubber 3340 attached to the base 3331, further rotation in the counterclockwise direction is restricted, and the tip end side is lower than the base end side (the second state). (State), the back right movable decorative body 3320 stops. At this time, the detection piece of the link drive gear 3335 is detected by the second movable position detection sensor, and the driving of the back right drive motor 3333 is stopped based on the detection by the second movable position detection sensor.

  After the back right movable decorative body 3320 enters the second state, the link drive gear 3335 is rotated by the back right drive motor 3333 in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, which is opposite to the above. When the transmission projection 3335a revolves in the counterclockwise direction together with the link drive gear 3335, the transmission link gear 3336 rotates clockwise by the transmission arm 3336a in contact with the transmission projection 3335a, and the two-stage gear 3337 , The slide rack 3338 moves upward.

  When the slide rack 3338 moves upward from the lower end, the rear right movable decorative body 3320 is pressed upward by the link arm 3339, and the rear right movable decorative body 3320 moves upward together with the bearing slider 3332. Becomes That is, the back right movable decorative body 3320 moves upward while the distal end side remains low until the bearing slider 3332 reaches the rising end. Accordingly, the back right movable decorative body 3320 moves upward from the second state together with the bearing slider 3332, and in a state where the bearing slider 3332 reaches the rising end (third state), as in the second state, The tip side is in an oblique state below the base end side (see FIG. 150).

  When the link drive gear 3335 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction by the back right drive motor 3333, the transmission link gear 3336 further rotates in the clockwise direction, and the slide rack 3338 moves upward through the two-stage gear 3337. Then, the link arm 3339 attached to the slide rack 3338 pushes the decorative body side link pin 3325 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 upward, and the back right movable decorative body 3320 moves through the shaft hole 3324 on the base end side. It will rotate clockwise around the center.

  Thereafter, when the detection piece of the link drive gear 3335 rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back right drive motor 3333 is detected by the first movable position detection sensor, the drive of the back right drive motor 3333 is performed. The rotation is stopped, and the rotation of the link drive gear 3335 is stopped. In this state, the bearing slider 3332 and the slide rack 3338 of the back right movable mechanism 3330 are located at the rising end, and the back right movable decorative body 3320 whose base end is rotatably attached to the bearing pin 3332a of the bearing slider 3332 is located. , So that the distal end is located above the proximal end. That is, the back right movable decorative body 3320 has returned to the normal state (initial state).

  In a normal state, when the back right drive motor 3333 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise direction in front view), the link drive gear 3335 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, thereby causing the transmission protrusion 3335a. Revolves upward to move, the contact between the transmission protrusion 3335a and the transmission arm 3336a is released, and the regulation of the rotation of the transmission link gear 3336 in the counterclockwise direction by the transmission protrusion 3335a is immediately released. You. Thereby, the back right movable decorative body 3320 changes (moves) from the initial state to the second state at a stretch.

  When the back right movable decorative body 3320 is in the second state, as shown in FIG. 149, the transmission arm 3336a of the transmission link gear 3336 is located within the revolving range of the transmission projection 3335a of the link drive gear 3335. When the link drive gear 3335 is further rotated counterclockwise by the right drive motor 3333, the revolving transmission projection 3335a comes into contact with the transmission arm 3336a from below. When the transmission protrusion 3335a further revolves in the counterclockwise direction, the transmission protrusion 3335a rotates the transmission link gear 3336 in the clockwise direction via the transmission arm 3336a. The movable decorative body 3320 returns to the initial state from the second state via the third state.

  In this way, by driving the back right drive motor 3333 to rotate the back right movable decorative body 3320 about the base end side shaft hole 3324, the fish imitated by the back right movable decorative body 3320 swings. It is possible to show the player a movable effect as if it were lowered. Also, the movement of moving the back right movable decorative body 3320 from the initial state to the second state via the first state is different from the movement of returning from the second state to the initial state via the third state. In addition, a plurality of movements can be shown to the player, and the player can be hardly bored.

  Also, when the back right movable decorative body 3320 moves from the initial state to the second state where the nata is swung down, the base end side (shaft hole 3324) where the center of rotation is located is moved downward by the bearing slider 3332. Therefore, compared to the case where the base end side is not moved downward, the back right movable decorative body 3320 can appear more on the front side of the effect display device 1600, and the back right movable decorative body 3320 stands out. be able to. Further, when the back right movable decorative body 3320 is moved to the initial position, the base end side where the center of rotation is located is moved upward by the bearing slider 3332, so that the center of rotation of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is moved. Is moved to the upper side of the effect display device 1600 in a front view, so that the back right movable decorative body 3320 in the initial state is less likely to block the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the display area which can be visually recognized well. It is possible to make the effect image wider and to make the effect image more enjoyable for the player.

  Next, the back right decoration unit 3350 of the back right effect unit 3300 will be described. The back front right decorative body unit 3350 is attached to the front of the unit base 3331 of the back right movable mechanism 3330 in front of the back right movable decorative body 3320, and a vertically extending flat decorative body base 3351, and a decoration. A transparent front-side right decorative body 3352 which is attached to the front surface of the body base 3351 and is formed in a shape like broken glass, and is attached between the front right-side decorative body 3352 and the decorative body base 3351. A back front right decorative board 3353 (see FIG. 145) on which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of irradiating light to the left are mounted on the front, and a back front right decorative body 3352 attached to the lower rear part. And a magnetic sensor 3003.

  The back front right decorative body 3352 extends vertically in an arc shape so as to be located leftward as going upward. The back front right decorative body 3352 is formed in a jagged shape on the left side such that the glass is broken, and a crack-shaped decoration is formed on the front surface. The back front right decorative body unit 3350 can cause the LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3353 to emit light, so that the left edge and the crack pattern can be light-emitting decorated.

[5-9-4. Uragami production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The back upper presentation unit 3400 is attached to the upper left side of the front surface of the back middle presentation unit 3200 in the back box 3010. The back upper presentation unit 3400 is formed in a shape imitating a fish as an item in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and has a movable upper back decoration 3410 extending in the left-right direction, and a left end of the movable upper decoration 3410. And a back-side movable mechanism 3420 that is rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, that is, a base end side, and that is attached to the front surface of the back-side effect unit 3200. The back upper movable decorative body 3410 of the back upper production unit 3400 is disposed forward of the rear rear movable decorative body 3120 and rearward of the rear right movable decorative body 3320.

  The upper back movable decorative body 3410 extends in the left-right direction and has a flat plate-like decorative body 3411 simulating a fish, and the outer shape of the decorative body 3411 is the same as that of the decorative body 3411, and is attached to the rear side of the decorative body 3411. A transparent flat decorative body base 3412, a back upper movable decorative body decorative board 3413 attached between the decorative body base 3412 and the decorative body main body 3411 and having a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on a rear surface thereof; A cylindrical shaft pin (not shown) protruding rearward from a rear surface on the base end side of the base 3412, and a spur gear-shaped decorative body gear that rotates integrally with the decorative body base 3412 and is centered on the shaft pin (not shown). Omitted).

  The decorative body 3411 of the back upper movable decorative body 3410 is formed in a shape that combines broken glass to imitate a nata, and the upper side and the lower side are formed jagged. The decoration body 3411 is entirely transparent. In the decorative body 3411, the peripheral surfaces of the upper and lower sides of the jagged edges are inclined such that the rear side protrudes from the front side, and a decoration depressed in a crack pattern is formed on the front surface.

  The decorative body base 3412 is formed to have the same outer shape as the decorative body main body 3411, and is inclined so that the respective peripheral surfaces of the upper side and the lower side are located forward toward the ends. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the back upper movable decorative body decorative board 3413 so as to emit light in a direction along the surface of the decorative body base 3412. The back upper movable decorative body 3410 can cause the peripheral edge of the decorative body main body 3411 to emit light by illuminating the LED of the upper back movable decorative body decorative board 3413.

  The upper back movable mechanism 3420 is attached to the front surface of the back middle rendering unit 3200, and the unit base 3421 to which the axis pin of the upper back movable decorative body 3410 is rotatably mounted. And a transmission gear (not shown) that is rotated by transmission of rotation from the upper back drive motor 3422 and that meshes with the decorative body gear of the upper movable movable body 3410. And

  In the normal state, the back upper presentation unit 3400 is in a retracted position in which the upper back movable decorative body 3410 extends horizontally. The body 3410 can be in an appearance position in which the right end side, that is, the distal end side is located lower than the base end side and extends obliquely.

[5-9-5. Back lower production unit]
Next, the underside rendering unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The underside production unit 3500 is attached to the center in the left-right direction of the lower front part of the underside production unit 3200 in the back box 3010. The underside effecting unit 3500 includes a movable underside decorative body 3510 simulating a flower having a plurality of petals, and an underside movable decorative body attached to a lower front portion of the underside effecting unit 3200 to move the underside movable decorative body 3510 in the vertical direction. And a mechanism 3520.

  The lower back movable decorative body 3510 is a three-dimensionally formed back body on which a decorative body 3511 simulating a flower having a plurality of petals and a plurality of full-color LEDs for emitting and decorating the decorative body 3511 are mounted. And a lower movable decorative body decorative substrate 3512. The lower back movable decorative body 3510 is disposed forward of the back right movable decorative body 3320.

  The lower back movable mechanism 3520 is mounted on the front surface of the back lower staging unit 3200, and has a unit base 3521 and a lower part of the decorative body 3511 of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 mounted to be vertically movable. A lower back drive motor 3522 attached to the rear surface and having a rotating shaft protruding forward, and revolves around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by driving the lower back drive motor 3522 to move the decorative body main body 3511 vertically. A lifting drive gear (not shown) having a drive pin.

  In the normal state, the lower back effect unit 3500 is in the lower position where the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is lowered most, and the drive pin of the ascending / descending drive gear revolving is located at the bottom dead center. In this state, when the drive pin is revolved by rotating the elevating drive gear by the lower back drive motor 3522, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 rises together with the upward movement of the revolving drive pin. Then, when the drive pin reaches the top dead center, the drive of the lower back drive motor 3522 is stopped, and the rotation of the elevation drive gear (revolution of the drive pin) is stopped. Thereby, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is in the state of the ascending position where it has moved to the uppermost position.

[5-9-6. Ura-mae production unit]
Next, the back-side effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The back front effect unit 3600 is formed in a C shape along the inner shape of the game area 5a, and is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. The back front effecting unit 3600 has a substantially C-shape when viewed from the front, has an outer periphery formed along the inner shape of the game area 5a, and has a debris remaining on the inner periphery of the window frame. A transparent flat back-side decorative body 3601 formed in a jagged shape such as broken glass, a flat-shaped decorative body base 3602 attached to the rear side of the back front decorative body 3601; And a front decoration board 3603 that is attached between the decoration base 3602 and the front decoration 3601 and causes the front decoration 3601 to emit light.

  The front-side rendering unit 3600 guides the game ball B received at the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 of the front unit 2000 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 downward, and discharges the game ball B onto the substrate holder 1200. Guide path (not shown). In addition, the back side effect unit 3600 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 and a first starting opening for detecting a game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. A sensor 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting in the game area 5a are mounted.

  The front-side decorative body 3601 of the front-side effect unit 3600 has an inner peripheral surface that is inclined so that the rear side protrudes from the front side, and a decoration that is depressed in a crack pattern is formed on the front side. . The back front decorative board 3603 is composed of three front back upper decorative board 3603a, back front left decorative board 3603b, and back front lower decorative board 3603c (see FIG. 127). On the back front decorative board 3603, a plurality of LEDs are mounted so as to face a C-shaped central side. By causing the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-front decorative board 3603 to emit light, the back-front effect unit 3600 can illuminate the inner peripheral surface of the back-front decorative body 3601 and the crack pattern.

[5-10. Production on a game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 159 and the like. FIG. 151 is a front view of the game board in a state in which the movable decorative body behind the back effect unit in the back unit has been moved from the retracted position to the standby position. FIG. 152 is a front view of the game board showing a state where the back movable ornamental body has been dropped from the state of FIG. 151 to the lowered position. FIG. 153 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear movable movable body is moved up and down between the standby position and the descending position by the slide guide from the state of FIG. 152. FIG. 154 is a front view of the game board in a state where the back right movable decorative body of the back right effect unit in the back unit is moved from the initial state to the first state. FIG. 155 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the back right movable decorative body has been moved from the state of FIG. 154 to the second state. FIG. 156 is a front view of the game board in a state where the back right movable decorative body has been moved to the third state from the state of FIG. 155.

  FIG. 157 is a front view of the game board in a state in which the upper back movable decorative body of the back upper presentation unit in the back unit has been moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. FIG. 158 is a front view of the game board in a state in which the lower back movable decorative body of the lower back effect unit in the back unit has been moved from the lowered position to the raised position. FIG. 159 shows the movable decorative body behind the rear production unit in the rear unit in the lowered position, the rear right movable decorative body of the rear right production unit in the second state, and the upper movable decorative body of the rear upper production unit appears. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which moved to the position and the lower back movable decoration of the lower back effect unit to the ascending position, respectively.

  In the game board 5, the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the start port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the side slope 2300, the center role 2500, etc. of the game panel 1100 partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a are almost entirely. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 114, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 disposed behind the game panel 1100 in the normal state, and the effect image in the back unit 3000, as shown in FIG. The back right decoration 3352 of the back right presentation unit 3300, the back decoration 3601 of the back right presentation unit 3600, and the like can be visually recognized well.

  In this normal state, the back right movable decorative body 3320 of the back right effecting unit 3300 is located in the initial state, and the lower right movable decorative body 3320 is located below the inside of the C-shaped back front decorative body 3601. The part is facing forward. Also, the upper back movable decorative body 3410 of the upper back staging unit 3400 disposed behind the back right movable decorative body 3320 is in the retracted position, and is located below the back right movable decorative body 3320. The part of the lower part that faces is facing forward.

  In addition, the back movable decoration 3120 of the back back effect unit 3100 disposed behind the upper back movable decorative body 3410 is in the retracted position, and is located below the upper back movable decorative body 3410. Only a small part of the tip, imitating the nata, is facing forward. That is, in a normal state, the movable decorative body 3120 behind is hardly seen. In addition, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 of the lower back effect unit 3500 is in a lowered position, and a part of the part located above the inside of the C-shaped back front decorative body 3601 is a part thereof. Looking forward.

  The game board 5 is behind-the-scene effects of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. The rear movable effect unit 3110 behind the unit 3100, the rear right movable effect unit 3310 of the rear right effect unit 3300, the upper rear effect unit 3400, and the lower rear effect unit 3500 perform a predetermined movable effect.

  Specifically, as the movable effect using the back rear movable effect unit 3110 in the rear effect unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. Then, the large rear movable decorative body 3120 extending in the left-right direction so as to straddle the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is moved to the normal state (the state of the retracted position) and the lock projection 3122a is fixed to the regulating portion 3141c of the lock member 3141. Is reciprocated in the up and down direction between the state of the standby position and the state of the standby position. In this movable effect, most of the back movable ornamental body 3120 is not clearly seen from the player side, so that at the top of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, it is possible to make the user feel that something is swinging up and down. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that something will happen.

  Then, the slide guide 3134 is moved downward by the back rear drive motor 3135 to abut against the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142, and then the release contact portion 3142b is pressed downward by the slide guide 3134. By rotating the lock member 3141 from the lock position to the release position, the movable decorative body 3120 in the standby position above the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the front view is moved to the lower portion of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. (See FIG. 152). Thereby, a large nata (the back movable decorative body 3120) straddling the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction can show the player a movable effect that falls freely while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous game state (for example, a “big hit” game) in which the player is advantageous to the player occurs. It can be made to think that it is, and it can raise the expectation for the game.

  After that, the slide guide 3134 is raised by the back drive motor 3135 to return the back movable decorative body 3120 at the lowered position to the normal retracted position. At this time, as shown in FIG. 153, by appropriately changing the rotation direction of the back-side drive motor 3135, the back-side movable decorative body 3120 can be moved through the slide guide 3134 in the vertical direction of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. It may be made to reciprocate up and down near the center. This allows the back movable ornament 3120 to move up and down while blocking the center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the up and down direction, thereby strongly attracting the player's interest to the back movable ornament 3120 and The movable decorative body 3120 can be noticed, and the movement of the movable decorative body 3120 behind can be enjoyed.

  As a movable production using the back right movable production unit 3310 of the back right production unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. Move from the state of the state to the position of the first state. As a result, the entire back right movable decorative body 3320 is located below the inside of the C-shaped back front decorative body 3601, and the player can see the entire back right movable decorative body 3320 imitating Nata. Therefore, the player can be excitedly excited by whether or not the nata (the back right movable decorative body 3320) is swung down afterward, and the expectation of the player can be increased.

  Then, the back right drive motor 3333 is further driven to move the back right movable decorative body 3320 from the position in the first state to the position in the second state (see FIG. 155). This allows the player to see a movable effect in which the nata simulated by the back right movable decorative body 3320 is swung down, so that the player can be surprised by swinging down the nata, Interest can be strongly attracted to the back right movable decorative body 3320, and it can be thought that something is good by swinging the nata down, and the player's expectation for the game is Can be raised.

  Thereafter, the back right movable decorative body 3320 in the second state is returned to the initial state via the third state by the back right drive motor 3333. When the back right movable decorative body 3320 moves from the second state position to the third state position, the back right movable decorative body 3320 is swung down in the second state, as shown in FIG. 156. In the posture as it is, it moves upward, and from the third state to the initial state, the back right movable decorative body 3320 rotates around the base end side so that the tip side of the nata moves upward, so that the player On the other hand, it is possible to recognize that the movement is clearly different from the time when Nata is swung down, and the back that returns to the initial state with a movement different from the initial movement from the initial state to the second state The movement of the right movable decoration 3320 can be enjoyed.

  In the back right movable rendering unit 3310, the back right movable decorative body 3320 may be moved from the initial state to the second state at a stretch without temporarily stopping in the first state, so that Nata swings down at once. Since the performed movable performance can be shown to the player, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player can be entertained.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 157, the movable effect in the back unit 3000 using the back effect unit 3400 is such that the back movable decorative body 3410 at the retracted position is driven to the base end side (left end) by driving the back drive motor 3422. Side) as a center to set a state of the appearance position in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. This allows the player to see a movable effect appearing in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 with the back upper movable decorative body 3410 imitating a nata. Since the back upper movable decorative body 3410 is formed so that the simulated nata is formed of broken glass fragments, it can be seen integrally with the back front decorative body 3601 in the normal retracted position. Since it is hard to notice its existence, by moving to the appearance position, it is possible to make a part of the back front decorative body 3601 appear to move, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  As a movable effect using the underside rendering unit 3500 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 158, the underside movable decorative body 3510 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position by driving the underside driving motor 3522. As a result, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 behind the C-shaped back front decorative body 3601 rises, so that the flower simulated by the lower back movable decorative body 3510 can be easily seen. It can make you think that there is something good, and can make you expect more about the game.

  Also, in the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment, the back-side movable rendering unit 3110 of the back-side rendering unit 3100, the back-right movable rendering unit 3310 of the back-right rendering unit 3300, the back-up rendering unit 3400, and the back-down rendering unit 3500. , And the above-described movable effects can be appropriately combined to perform a movable effect. For example, first, after moving the back upper movable decorative body 3410 from the retracted position to the appearing position, the back right movable decorative body 3320 is moved from the initial state to the second state position, and further, the back rear movable decorative body 3120 is moved. After dropping to the lowered position, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is moved to the raised position (see FIG. 159). With this movable effect, all the movable decorative bodies are located in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so it is convinced that an advantageous game state (for example, a "big hit" game) will occur for the player. And the player's interest can be enhanced. Further, in this movable effect, since a plurality of movable decorative objects sequentially move forward of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, after one movable decorative object moves forward of the display screen, the next movable decorative object moves. Depending on whether the body moves to the front of the display screen or not, it is possible to make the player throb and throb, to increase the player's expectation and to make the player hard to get tired of.

  Subsequently, main light emission effects in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 160 to 166 and the like. FIG. 160 is a front view of the game board in a state where the first pattern is illuminated and decorated on the front light guide plate of the display effect unit. FIG. 161 is a front view of the game board in a state where the second pattern is illuminated and decorated on the front light guide plate of the display effect unit. FIG. 162 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which a third pattern is illuminated and decorated on the back first light guide plate of the back middle effect unit. FIG. 163 is a front view of the game board in a state where the fourth pattern is illuminated and decorated on the back first light guide plate of the back middle effect unit. FIG. 164 is a front view of the game board in a state where the fifth pattern is illuminated and decorated on the second light guide plate on the back of the back decoration effecting unit in the rear effect unit. FIG. 165 is a front view of the game board in a state where the sixth pattern is illuminated and decorated on the back second light guide plate of the back decoration effecting unit in the back effect effecting unit. FIG. 166 is an explanatory diagram showing an animation-like light emission effect by a plurality of pictures using the front light guide plate, the back first light guide plate, and the back second light guide plate. FIG. 167 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the first pattern is illuminated and decorated on the front light guide plate of the display effect unit, and the back right movable decorative body of the back right effect unit is moved to the second state.

  The game board 5 is a display effect unit of the table unit 2000 according to a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. 2600, the back decoration effect unit 3150 of the back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and the back effect unit 3200 perform a predetermined light emitting effect.

  Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 160, the light emitting effect using the surface effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 disposed on the right side of the front light guide plate 2610 in a front view. The plurality of LEDs 2611a for light guide plates emit light to make the first pattern 2621 emit light. As a result, the eyes of a predetermined character in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 are illuminated and displayed in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, which can surprise the player and change the game state. It is possible to make the player think that the game is going to be performed, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game.

  As a light-emitting effect using the display effect unit 2600, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 161, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2612a mounted on a second pattern substrate 2612 disposed above the surface light guide plate 2610 is used. The second pattern 2622 is illuminated by emitting light. Accordingly, the second pattern 2622 is displayed by light emission, so that it is possible to give an illusion that a glass having a crack is provided on the entire front surface in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Can be wondered and entertained. Further, for example, when the second pattern 2622 is illuminated and displayed during the reach effect, it is possible to make the player think that the reach will be developed, and to increase the sense of expectation for the game.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 162, the light emitting effect using the back middle effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is mounted on a third pattern substrate 3221 arranged on the right side of the back first light guide plate 3210 when viewed from the front. The plurality of LEDs for light guide plate 3221a emit light to decorate the third pattern 3211 with light. Thereby, in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, a plurality of pieces of glass broken and scattered as the third pattern 3211 are displayed by light emission, so that the player can be wondered and entertained.

  As a light emitting effect using the back middle effect unit 3200, for example, as shown in FIG. 163, a plurality of light guides mounted on the fourth picture substrate The light for the light plate LED 3222a is appropriately illuminated, and the fourth pattern 3212 is illuminated and decorated. Thereby, a plurality of V-shaped light streaks having a sense of perspective are emitted and displayed as the fourth pattern 3212 in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the front of the display screen can be clearly seen. Thus, the player can enjoy the luminous decoration.

  As the light-emitting effect using the back decoration effect unit 3150 in the back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. The plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a mounted on the picture substrate 3171 emits light to make the fifth picture 3161 emit light. As a result, a guidance (message) for the player including the characters “Chance!” Is displayed as the fifth picture 3161 in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and the guidance gives the player a chance. Can be suggested, and the expectation for the game can be raised.

  In addition, as a light-emitting effect using the back-side decorative effect unit 3150, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 165, a plurality of light-emitting effects mounted on a sixth pattern substrate 3172 disposed below the second back light guide plate 3160. The LED 3172a for a light guide plate emits light, and the sixth pattern 3162 emits light. Thereby, in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, a plurality of pieces of glass broken and scattered as the sixth pattern 3162 are luminescently displayed, so that the player can be wondered and entertained.

  In the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment, the front light guide plate 2610, the first back light guide plate 3210, and the second back light guide plate 3160 sequentially have a pattern related to each other illuminated and decorated, so that there is a movement like an animation. A luminous effect can be performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 166, the second pattern 2622 of the front light guide plate 2610, the third pattern 3211 of the back first light guide plate 3210, the sixth pattern 3162 of the back second light guide plate 3160, and the like, in this order. By performing (light-emitting display), a player can see a light-emitting effect in which the broken glass pieces are scattered after the transparent glass is cracked. At this time, since the front light guide plate 2610, the back first light guide plate 3210, and the back second light guide plate 3160 are arranged rearward in this order, when viewed from the player's side, the broken glass pieces splatter rearward. It is possible to show a continuous luminous decoration with a three-dimensional appearance, and to entertain the player.

  As a light emitting effect using the front effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 and the back right effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 167, the rear right movable effect unit 3310 of the back right effect unit 3300 The back right drive motor 3333 moves the back right movable decorative body 3320 from the normal initial state to the second state where the back right movable decorative body 3320 is modeled down, and The plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2611a mounted on the first design substrate 2611 arranged on the right side of the light guide plate 2610 in a front view cause the plurality of LEDs 2611a for the light guide plate to emit light, and the first design 2621 is illuminated. In this state, as shown in the figure, a central portion of a radial crack pattern formed on the front surface of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is provided behind the pupil portion of the eye of a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. Is located. Then, in this state, when the central LED 3323a of the back right movable decorative body decoration substrate 3323 emits light, the pupil of the first pattern 2621 displayed and illuminated shines brightly, giving a strong impact to the player. Not only can be surprised, but also it can be thought that an advantageous game state such as "big hit game" will occur, and the sense of expectation for the game can be raised.

  Further, in the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment, the above-described movable effect and the light-emitting effect can be appropriately combined, and also combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. This makes it possible to present a variety of pattern effects to the player by appropriately combining the light-emitting effect, the movable effect, the display effect, and the like. It is possible to entertain the player, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[6. Configuration of Peripheral Control Unit]
Next, a peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 12 (on the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 168 to 170. FIG. 168 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 169 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 170 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500.

  As shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, the peripheral control unit 1500 has a cover body 1501 that is open at the rear and has a box shape that is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction, and a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. A peripheral control board 1510 capable of controlling the progress of the rendering based on a command from the main control board 1310, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral control board 1510 A liquid crystal output substrate 1530 that is connected to the base member 1502; Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions in the internal space of the cover body 1501, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502. Thus, a peripheral control board box 1505 (sealing board box) including the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is configured.

[6-1. Cover body]
Peripheral data that can store various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the peripheral control board 1510 is provided on various substrates attached in the internal space of the cover body 1501. There are a ROM board 1520 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 that can output drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having an area of about two-thirds when the cover 1501 is viewed from the back, and is arranged on the left side of the cover 1501. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged such that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a square shape, and On the other hand, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a square shape twice larger than the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and is disposed on the lower right side of the cover 1501.

  The board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later, and the board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later. Connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the same ground. (GND). The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. Connected.

  The cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate and is molded into an opaque black color. When viewed from the front, the top and left sides of a horizontally long rectangular cover flat plate 1501a (plate thickness: 2 mm) The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are respectively formed on the lower side and the right side so as to protrude rearward (front side of the pachinko machine 1) to form a box shape having an opening.

  The cover flat plate 1501a is for mounting the air-cooling fan FAN at a position slightly above and to the right of the center when viewed from the front side and corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 mounted on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa are respectively formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa along a plurality of concentric circles centered on the center of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. In addition, at the four corners of the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave part 1501aa, at the positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the air-cooling fan FAN having a square shape, a predetermined cylindrical shape inserted through the through holes th1 to th4 is provided. Guide projections 1501aab1 to 1501aab4 each having a height (distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air-cooling fan FAN) are formed so as to project toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501. By forming the slit 1501aaa in the shape of the arc, it is possible to prevent various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 from being illegally removed from the peripheral control board 1510.

  The cover flat plate 1501a has a pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 formed diagonally near the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the air-cooling fan FAN is mounted by being pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, the front surface of the air-cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal pan screw (not shown) having a shape integrally formed with a pan head and a flat washer is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the pan screw with the seat, comes into contact with the front of the air cooling fan FAN and the front of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the air cooling fan FAN jumps out of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Can be prevented.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model is printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

  The cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and is located at a position higher than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a distance shorter than the distance from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). ), A wiring extraction recess 1501ab is formed so as to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501. When the air-cooling fan FAN is attached and fixed to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN can be pulled out from the wire pull-out recess 1501ab.

  When viewed from the front, the cover flat plate 1501a is located at a position corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510d attached to the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side. The connector recess 1501ac is formed as one closed substantially horizontally elongated rectangular area (more precisely, a convex area having the volume control switch 1510d and the connector CN1 as an upper part and the connectors CN2 to CN7 as a lower part). It is formed to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface (a position having a distance dimension longer than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). I have. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 are formed at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Note that the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac substantially occupies a lower right region when the cover plate 1501a is viewed from the front. Therefore, as a measure against insufficient strength and warpage of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume control are provided on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. It is a position that does not interfere with the hole 1501ac8, and two vertically extending reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 are formed to protrude forward at a predetermined interval.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 become connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. And from the volume adjustment holes 1501ac8.

  When viewed from the front, the cover flat plate 1501a has one closed rectangular area along the lower side corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The opening of the cover body 1501 is located at a position where the connector concave portion 1501ad is lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa (a position having a distance dimension longer than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa). The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac are disposed on the same plane. Connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively.

  When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad. .

  The cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 along the left side thereof when viewed from the front. The mounting recess 1501af for mounting the horizontally long rectangular wiring cover body 1503 which communicates with the wiring drawing opening 1501ae and can close the wiring drawing opening 1501ae is smaller than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa described above. It is formed to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501 at a high position (a position having a shorter distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The mounting recess 1501af is provided at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover body 1503 at a predetermined height of a columnar shape inserted into the through hole 1503a (a distance shorter than a distance dimension in the depth direction of the wiring cover body 1503). A projection 1501afa having a dimension (dimensions) is formed so as to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the mounting holes 1501afb1 are formed at positions corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2.

  When the wiring cover 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover 1503 and the front surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. The wiring cover 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

  When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, the wiring cover opening 1501ae is closed, and a plurality of wirings (for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600) connected to the connector CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover for protecting the plurality of wirings from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive resin containing polycarbonate and carbon, and is molded in opaque black.

  When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are formed near the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left side wall 1501c and protrude outward at predetermined intervals in the center. In addition, a hinge hook 1501cc disposed above the guide 1501ca and protruding outward, and a hinge hook 1501cd disposed below the guide 1501cb and protruding outward are respectively formed. A chamfer is formed on the rear side of the left end of each of the guides 1501ca and 1501cb. On the other hand, L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda projecting forward are formed on the front side of the left ends of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd. A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea that protrudes outward is formed at the center of the cover body 1501 on the right cover side wall 1501e.

  The cover plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the rear so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged on the left side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At the position, four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed to protrude from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Around the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control. Copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 each having a circular shape are formed on the back surface side of the substrate 1510, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are respectively formed on the peripheral control board. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line 1510.

  When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by arranging and inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing them into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a, respectively. At the same time, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw part) of the metal pan screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan screw. Lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. As a result, the cover 1501 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is the same. Since the cover 1501 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan screw, the cover 1501 is grounded (ground) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. The cover body 1501 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan-head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 open the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are arranged inside (i.e., do not protrude outside the open side end faces).

  The cover plate 1501a corresponds to four through-holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when viewed from the back so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is disposed on the upper right side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss protruding portions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 are formed diagonally from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions where the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 are formed. Have been. Around the four through-holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520; Copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 each having a circular shape are formed on the back side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed respectively. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so as to be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

  When attaching the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are attached to the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. Thereby, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) and mounting boss holes of the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 are in contact with each other, lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back surface side of peripheral data ROM board 1520, and metal pan-head screws seat surfaces. Are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (thread portion) of the metal pan screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

  As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan screw. Lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 to be electrically connected. As a result, the cover body 1501 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is the same. Since the cover body 1501 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan head screw, the cover 1501 is grounded (ground) of the peripheral control board 1510. GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Since the cover 1501 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630.

  When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of a metal pan screw inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 and screwed into the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end face on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and on the back side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the back side of the cover plate 1501a. The fixed back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged on the same plane.

  The cover plate 1501a corresponds to four through-holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the back so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is disposed on the lower right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At a position, a pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed to project diagonally from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. Around the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and a liquid crystal output. Copper solder foils (so-called “lands”) 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 each having a circular shape are formed on the back side of the substrate 1530, and the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are respectively formed on the liquid crystal output substrate. A wiring pattern is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line 1530.

  When attaching the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and screwing them into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the liquid crystal output is performed. The substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a, and the mounting boss holes 1501am1. , 1501am2 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces), respectively, and the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the seat surface of the metal pan screw are respectively formed. It will be in contact. Further, the shaft (thread portion) of the metal pan screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a) is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a metal pan screw. 1530rf1 to 1530rb4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4. As a result, the cover body 1501 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and is the same. Since the cover 1501 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a metal pan screw, the cover 1501 is grounded (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. ) And the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are grounded to the circuit. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. The cover 1501 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630.

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of a metal pan screw inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 and screwed into the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. And is fixed to the back side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, in addition to being disposed inside the side end face (that is, so as not to protrude outside the opening side end faces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e). The rear surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the rear surface of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 fixed to the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane.

  As described above, when various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surfaces of the various substrates (cover flat plate 1501a A space having a predetermined distance dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed between the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, a gap having the above-mentioned predetermined distance dimension (2.3 mm in the present embodiment) is provided between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Is formed.

  In the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az are formed on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, respectively. When the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wings, thereby controlling the periphery. By taking in air from outside the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the space inside the cover body 1501 (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the up-down direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

[6-2. Base body]
A base body 1502 for closing the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing polycarbonate and carbon, is molded in opaque black, and has a horizontally long rectangular base flat plate 1502a when viewed from the front thereof. Base side walls 1502b to 1502e are formed on the left side, the lower side, and the right side so as to protrude forward (toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 1) to form a box shape having an opening. The size of the opening formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is slightly larger than the size of the opening formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. Accordingly, in a state where the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502 by covering the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are provided inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. Are fitted and inscribed (surface contact).

  When viewed from the front, the base plate 1502a is arranged at predetermined intervals along the lower side, at a position not interfering with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, for wiring to these connectors CN2 to CN7. Vertically elongated disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed to prevent the peripheral control board 1510 from warping due to the force at the time of inserting the connector for connection and disconnection of the electric wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510. Then, a force for inserting a connector for connecting a wiring to the connector CN1 or a force for operating the volume adjustment switch 1510d at a position not interfering with the connector CN1 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 is warped by the Electrical wiring pattern formed on the zero elongated disconnection preventing rib portion 1502aa4 in the lateral direction to prevent the breakage is formed.

  When the base body 1502 is viewed from the front, an engaging portion 1502ca projecting outward is formed near the opening side of the base body 1502 on the left base side wall 1502c. The engaging portion 1502ca has guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed at corresponding positions, respectively. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

  The plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca, 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa, 1502cab, and the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502cae, 1502caf. The L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover 1501 are inserted. The L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. By wrapping around, the L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are hooked on the U-groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. It can be engaged.

  In the center of the right base side wall 1502e, a base-side sealing portion 1502ea projecting outward at a position corresponding to the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 is formed. Further, through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for mounting the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 are formed on the upper side and the lower side of the right base side wall 1502e, respectively.

[6-3. Various connectors]
A peripheral control board 1510 mounted in the internal space of the cover body 1501 includes a CPU, a RAM, a VDP, a sound source, a serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as “SATA controller”), and various I / O interfaces. Defines a peripheral control IC 1510a that is integrated on one semiconductor chip, and various programs that can control the progress and demonstration of a game effect (demonstration performed in a waiting state for a player) and the progress of the effect. An SDRAM capable of transferring and storing various control information (peripheral data) stored in a control ROM 1510b that previously stores various schedule data and a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on a peripheral data ROM board 1520 An SDRAM 1510c composed of Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory (1510c1, 1510c2), a slide-type volume control switch 1510d that can control the volume, and a power supply to a real-time clock IC (not shown) can be supplied even when the power is turned off. A backup power supply 1510e, a power supply generating circuit (not shown) for generating various power supply voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7 are provided.

  The control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbits, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbits. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

  Various I / O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I / Os and various parallel I / Os. Various serial I / Os include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

  In the present embodiment, UART communication is employed as a communication method for receiving a command from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5), and various boards provided on the game board 5 side and various boards provided on the door frame side For example, SPI communication or I2C communication is adopted as a communication method for transmitting control data to the communication device (a communication is performed via a corresponding one of the connectors CN3, CN6, and CN7).

  In the present embodiment, an electrical drive source provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the back rear production unit 3100, the back right production unit 3300, the back upper production unit 3400, the back lower production unit 3500 using the SPI communication or the I2C communication). And the like, and communicates via the connector CN6.) And an electric drive source provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button up / down drive provided in the staging operation unit 300). The drive data is transmitted to a drive control IC that drives a motor 367 or the like, which communicates via a connector CN3, or a plurality of LEDs (communicated via the connector CN7) provided on the game board 5 side. ) And an LED control IC that drives a plurality of LEDs (communicating via the connector CN3) provided on the door frame 3 side. And various sensors provided on the game board 5 side (for example, various detection sensors provided on the back rear production unit 3100, the back right production unit 3300, the back upper production unit 3400, the lower back production unit 3500, etc. Signal is received via the CN 6) as detection data, and various sensors provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, various detection sensors provided in the production operation unit 300, and communicate via the connector CN3). Is received as detection data. In this embodiment, the transfer speed by the SPI communication is set to 250 kbps, and the transfer speed by the I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

  Various parallel I / Os include a GPIO (General Purpose Input / Output, general-purpose IO). In the present embodiment, a signal from the air-cooling fan FAN that transmits the rotation state of the air-cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), or is provided on the game board 5 side. Signals from various sensors for confirming the operation of the controlled object and the origin position are input to the GPIO (via the connector CN6), or a control signal for the controlled object (not shown) provided on the game board 5 is transmitted from the GPIO (to the connector CN6). And outputs a signal from the GPIO to the LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

  In the present embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to the connector CN1, and SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to the connector CN3 (that is, the connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , UART communication is assigned to the connector CN5, SPI communication and GPIO are assigned to the connector CN6 (that is, the connector CN6 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and GPIO coexist), and SPI communication is assigned to the connector CN7. Is assigned.

  The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and realizes a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (corresponding to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various types of control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed in accordance with an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , And SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2.

  The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) and can realize a high data communication speed. In the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  The peripheral control board 1510 further includes a special connector SCN1 for connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the board, and a special connector SCN2 for connecting the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the board. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a special connector SCN3 for connecting between the peripheral control board 1510 and the board. The liquid crystal output board 1530 includes a special connector SCN4 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 to the board.

  The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 in the form of a plurality of types of video signals. Examples of the plurality of types of video signal systems include a plurality of types such as an RGB system, an LVDS system, a Mobile Industry Processor Interface (MIPI) system, an Embedded Display Port (eDP) system, and a clockless system. In this system, four systems (a total of four systems) are adopted: one system for the RGB system, two systems for the LVDS system (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and the MIPI system. In the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS systems (for example, the first LVDS system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. A peripheral control board that employs, for example, the eDP system instead of the MIPI system, and uses one system for the RGB system, two systems for the LVDS system (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and one system for the eDP system 1510 can also be created.

  The peripheral control board 1510 further includes an LEDML1 near the control ROM 1510b, an LEDML2 near the SDRAM 1510c, an LEDML3 near the special connector SCN1, and an LEDML4 near the special connector SCN2. As will be described later, various voltages (DC +37 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) are directly supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The LED ML1 confirms (monitors) a state in which DC +5 V is supplied, and maintains the lighting state in a state in which DC +5 V is supplied. The LED ML2 is for confirming (monitoring) a state where DC +12 V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in a state where DC +12 V is supplied. The LED ML3 is for confirming (monitoring) a state where DC +37 V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in a state where DC +37 V is supplied. The LEDML4 is for confirming (monitoring) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the lighting state is maintained while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

  When various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted and fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the surfaces of the various substrates (covers) A space having a predetermined distance dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed between the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The space formed in this way can be brightly illuminated by the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 being turned on.

  The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are provided on the peripheral control board 1510 in that they have a floating mechanism. The structure is completely different from the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the connectors CN8 to CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. Each of these connectors CN1 to CN10 is a socket, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing in a plug of the corresponding connector in a direction perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 have a structure in which the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 do not move vertically when viewed from the front when they are fitted.

  The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, respectively, and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are sockets, respectively.

  The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, whereby the socket and the plug are fitted. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, the socket is in the front-rear direction when viewing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) from the front (the back and front of the pachinko machine 1). ), A floating mechanism capable of absorbing an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the user pushes in by moving a predetermined distance range toward the direction (1). The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached to the peripheral data ROM board 1520 in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the (peripheral control board 1510) moves to the maximum within the above-described predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 does not contact the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Further, a gap is formed between the front (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501.

  The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, whereby the socket and the plug are fitted. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front, the socket is in the front-back direction (the direction between the back and front of the pachinko machine 1). ) Is provided with a floating mechanism capable of absorbing an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the push-in operation is performed by moving a predetermined distance range toward (). Note that the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 may be mounted on the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control) in a state where the liquid crystal output board 1530 is mounted and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the board 1510) is moved to the maximum within the above-described predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, a special (so that the front (upper surface)) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 does not contact the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front (upper surface) of the socket of the connector SCN4 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover 1501.

  Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 is used for the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 is used for the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be briefly described. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a peripheral data ROM 1520a that can store various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. As various control information (peripheral data), image data such as a background image, a character image, and a design image for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 Light emission data defining the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishment, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on the vehicle, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, etc., the door frame 3 and the game board 5 Driving data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effectors provided can be given.

  The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (non-volatile) memory, is inexpensive, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed as compared with a NOR flash (non-volatile) memory. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

  As described above, by adopting a NAND flash (non-volatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a, it is possible to realize cost reduction, contribute to suppression of power consumption, and read out various stored data at a high transfer rate. it can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can reduce power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is easily affected by noise due to its low operating voltage. Further, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is not adopted in which the boards between the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected via wiring (harness). By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 and the control board 1510 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector, the influence of noise that enters the board-to-board transmission path is reduced.

  The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover 1501 will be described later. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 inserts the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided therein into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Since the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 need to be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a after being pushed in, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism is adopted. By connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket can be absorbed. Prevent damage to the surrounding The transmission path between the substrate and the control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be can be reliably formed.

  Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, although within the design dimensional distance tolerance. is there. Even in such a case, by employing the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-described floating mechanism, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing an error in the front-rear direction generated at the time of connection, damage to a plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket is prevented, and a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is formed. It can be formed reliably.

  The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control substrate 1510 from the connector CN10, so that the effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (for example, for a player). An image that informs that a big hit gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state occurs, an image that conveys that no big hit gaming state occurs, and a state where the big hit gaming state occurs although the big hit gaming state does not occur This is an important substrate for drawing an image (such as an image indicating that the user is approaching) as an image. Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit drawing data of an image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 are not electrically connected to each other via wiring (harness) between the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510. By adopting a configuration in which 1510 and 1510 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector, the influence of noise that enters the board-to-board transmission path is reduced.

  The procedure for attaching various substrates in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 inserts a socket of the special connector SCN4 included in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 into a plug of the special connector SCN2 included in the peripheral control substrate 1510. After being pushed in, it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, a socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism is adopted. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction generated when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510, the connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket can be removed. Peripheral control board to prevent damage The transmission path between the substrate 510 and the liquid crystal driving substrate 1530 can be can be reliably formed.

  Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, although within the design dimensional distance tolerance. is there. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing an error in the front-rear direction generated at the time, damage to a plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket is prevented, and a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is reliably formed. Can be formed.

  When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, as described above, the back side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 Since the rear surface and the rear surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the same plane, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the peripheral control substrate 1510 with respect to the front surface. Compared to the case of performing the three-dimensional arrangement, the distance dimension of the peripheral control unit 1500 in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) can be reduced, so that, for example, a large movable production unit (operating a movable production body) Electrical drive source and drive mechanism, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and operating position) It can contribute to ensuring the order in the depth direction of the distance dimension.

[6-4. How to assemble the peripheral control unit]
Here, a method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

  Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are connected to the cover flat plate 1501a. While being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached to the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. Insert As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 have an arrangement corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are formed. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed at the bottom.

  Subsequently, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. To fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and insert metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form it on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

  Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are formed of metal (not shown). The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a pan-head screw made of a screw and screwing it into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As described above, among the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, so that the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is restricted, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 includes the cover flat plate 1501a. The upper, lower, left, and right movements are restricted by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1, 1501an2 formed on the back side of the base plate. The boss protrusion is not formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This is because the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrict the vertical and horizontal directions, and the dimensional error due to such restraint is reduced by the peripheral control board 1510. When fixed to the back side of 1501a, absorption is performed by the respective dimensional tolerances of through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in peripheral control board 1510 and mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a. You can do it.

  Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are formed. The guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cab. It is inserted into the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the 1502.

  Subsequently, the L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. In a state in which the base body 1502 is wrapped around the cover body 1501 so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1502 and the base body 1502 is directly covered with the cover body 1501, a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 is made of a metal (not shown). The metal one-way screw into which the anchor rivet is inserted is inserted and screwed toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the distal end surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward at the base side sealing portion 1502ea, thereby forming the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. And the base side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed.

  In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 fit inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in a state of inscribed (surface contact). Thus, since the cover 1501 and the base 1502 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover 1501 and the base 1502 are in a conductive state. In order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be broken by a tool. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and a deterrent to the illegal operation of the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been raised.

  Subsequently, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN are drawn from the wire drawing recess 1501ab formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A pan screw with a metal seat (not shown) (a screw having an integrated pan head and flat washer) is screwed into the drawer and the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 are connected to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. And the wiring cover 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover 1501. A metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. Thus, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this manner is attached to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5, the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front and the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500). Is inserted into a mounting groove (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100, and through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 form a metal pan screw (not shown). Is inserted and screwed into a mounting hole (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100 to fix the game panel 1100.

  In the above-described assembling method, in the procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, first, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is placed at the above-described predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. (The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is disposed on the upper right side of the cover 1501 when the cover 1501 is viewed from the back.) The liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back of the cover plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. On the peripheral data ROM board 1520 after being fixed to the above-described predetermined position on the side (the liquid crystal output board 1530 is disposed on the lower right side of the cover 1501 when the cover 1501 is viewed from the back). A special connector having a socket for the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral control board 1510 The connector of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted into the predetermined position. (The peripheral control board 1510 can also be fixed to the left side of the cover 1501 when the cover 1501 is viewed from the back.) Even in such a mounting procedure of various substrates, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, by absorbing the error in the front-rear direction generated at the time of pushing, the plug and the socket can be connected. The connection paths formed between the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 can be reliably formed, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the periphery can be prevented. A transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board can be reliably formed.

  By the way, there are a plurality of types of game boards mounted on pachinko machines having different game specifications. In the present embodiment, various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be divided into three and attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common regardless of the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a according to the game specification of the game board. Are stored depending on the game specification of the game board by storing the peripheral data corresponding to the game data, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a board dependent on the type of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600.

  Accordingly, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board, and does not depend on the type of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused). Further, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 including a peripheral data ROM 1520a in which peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored, and a peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the above-described inter-board connector. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

  As a method of a video signal input to a display device such as an effect display device, for example, as described above, there are a plurality of types of systems such as an RGB system, an LVDS system, a MIPI system, an eDP system, and a clockless system. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these plural types are electrically connected by the above-mentioned board-to-board connector. That is, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be easily replaced according to the type of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS systems (for example, the first LVDS system) is used as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. Is adopted, the liquid crystal output board 1530 adapted to the method of the video signal (LVDS method) input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the above-described inter-board connector.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to the sides by metal pan screws, the circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of these various substrates. Is configured. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Connected. For this reason, electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is used as circuit ground to ground (GND) of various substrates, ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630, and FIG. 86 (b). Can be removed from the frame ground board 559 shown in FIG. Thus, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated filter for removing such electromagnetic wave noise on various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630), which contributes to cost reduction of various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630). Can be.

  Here, the arrangement of a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 will be described. As described above, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az can air-cool the inside space of the cover body 1501, and also have a function of confirming the presence or absence of tampering.

  Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 170, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az arranged on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are formed on the peripheral control board 1510. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided, the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin Number, etc.), that is, the state of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins, and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing can be checked from multiple angles. As much as possible, they are separately arranged so as to be larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510b and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed via the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. Further, the LED ML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b keeps the lighting state in a state where the DC +5 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, and therefore the LED ML1 is originally supplied with the DC + 5V. Although it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state of the control ROM 1510b, it also has a spotlight function of illuminating the control ROM 1510b brightly, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins. , And the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be improved.

  A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be checked. The area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and the peripheral data provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, connectors Pin number, IC direction, part number , Pin numbers, etc.), ie, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 by silk printing, respectively. And are arranged so as to be a large area where it can be almost confirmed from angles in multiple directions. Accordingly, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the content silk-printed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 In addition to the corresponding relationship, the modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, It can be confirmed through a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. Further, the LED ML3 arranged near the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lighting state in a state where DC +37 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Although it has a function of checking (monitoring) the state of supply, it is used as a spotlight for brightly illuminating the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the visibility of the state of the IC pins, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 by silk printing, respectively. Of visibility and peripheral control board 1510 And it is capable to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the substrate between the connector according to the the special connector SCN1 and peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 special connectors provided in SCN3 obtaining.

  Also, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be confirmed. This area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530), and further includes the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like. Are arranged in a distributed manner so that the contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) of each of them can be visually recognized. Thereby, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 by the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 by the silkscreen printing. In addition to the correspondence, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed via a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. Can be. In addition, the LEDML4 arranged near the special connector SCN2 keeps the lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, and therefore, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although having the function, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 have a function as a spotlight for brightly illuminating an inter-board connector with the special connector SCN4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The visibility of the contents printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 by silk printing is improved, and the visibility of the inter-board connector is improved by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. , Can contribute to It has become the jar.

  Further, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa are provided with the product number and model printed on the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. The state of the IC pins and the content (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be visually recognized, that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, The states of the IC pins and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing are distributed and arranged so as to be larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 so that the states can be confirmed from various angles. ing. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. . Further, since the LEDML2 disposed near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is kept turned on when DC +12 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, Although it originally has a function of confirming (monitoring) a state where DC +12 V is supplied, the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2) is further provided with a spotlight function of illuminating the SDRAM 1510c brightly. , The visibility of the state of the IC pins, the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, and the visibility of the IC. I have.

  In addition, among a plurality of blades constituting the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN, a gap between the blades (specifically, a gap between the blades when an inspector rotates the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN). From the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not an illegal board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az.

  In the present embodiment, since the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are of a surface mount type, have a wide angle of about 120 degrees, and have a weak directivity, Also suitable for lighting applications. When various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted and fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the surfaces of the various substrates (covers) A space having a predetermined distance dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed between the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. By illuminating the LEDs ML1 to ML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 which is also suitable for use as illumination, the space thus formed can be brightly illuminated.

  Further, the light emitted from the LEDML1 to the LEDML4 is reflected again on the area on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the periphery thereof, which face the light emitting surfaces of the LEDML1 to the LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Reflecting portions (not shown) that are directed to the peripheral control board 1510 are respectively formed. These reflection portions (not shown) may be glossy color paints in addition to bright color paints such as white, or a glossy metal sheet may be attached.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 near the game board 5 and the payout unit 560 is provided on the side of the game board 5. Are arranged, so that the game balls rub against each other in the ball path constituted by these, and are charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby becoming a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment that is affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall. As described above, the periphery of the game board 5 is in an environment that is extremely susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data A configuration was adopted in which a circuit ground was made so as to be electrically connected to the same ground (GND) as the ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. In the present embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the ground of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. A configuration was adopted in which the same ground (GND) was provided by electrically connecting to the (GND) line.

  Thus, the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Electromagnetic noise that enters through the base body 1502 or the like is used as circuit ground to ground (GND) various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630. ), And can be removed from the frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. 86 (b) by leading to the ground of the island facility in the game hall. In other words, the cover 1501 and / or the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Electromagnetic noise that enters through the base body 1502 can be removed from the frame ground board 559 shown in FIG. 86 (b) to the ground of the island facility of the game hall as circuit ground called circuit ground.

[7. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of the effect based on various commands from the main control board 1310. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a for controlling the payout of the game balls B and the like, and a firing control unit 633b for controlling the firing of the game balls B by rotating the handle 182.

[7-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is a microprocessor which is not shown in detail but is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. An MPU, a main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids The circuit includes a circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU has a built-in ROM and RAM, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting port sensor 3002 for detecting a game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, and a second starting for detecting a game ball B received in the second starting port 2004. A mouth sensor 2402, a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2401 for detecting a gaming ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, and a gaming ball received in the special winning opening 2005. B, a large winning opening sensor 2403, a first receiving opening sensor 2404 for detecting a game ball B received in the first receiving opening 2007 after being detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403, and a large winning opening sensor 2403. And a second reception sensor 2405 for detecting the game ball B received in the second reception port 2008 and an illegal magnet in the game area 5a. The magnetic sensor 3003 for sensing the detection signal from the like are input via the main control input circuits respectively to the main control I / O ports.

  The main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, thereby driving the start port solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, and the distribution solenoid 2416. A signal is output or a status display, a normal design display, a normal hold display, a first special design display, a first special hold number display, a second special display of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I / O port. A drive signal is output to a symbol display, a second special reserved number display, a round display, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, the special winning opening sensor 2403, the first receiving port sensor 2404, and the second receiving port sensor 2405 are not provided. While a contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate unit 2003, so that the first starting port sensor 3002 and the second starting port sensor 2402 are provided. , And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2401 frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches having high durability and long life are used for the first startup port sensor 3002, the second startup port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401.

  When an advantageous game state (eg, "big hit" game) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the special winning opening sensor 2403 and the first The detection of the game ball B by the entrance sensor 2404 and the second entrance sensor 2405 frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches having high durability and long life are also used for the special winning opening sensor 2403, the first reception sensor 2404, and the second reception sensor 2405. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball B does not frequently enter, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not frequently occur. For this reason, as the general winning opening sensor 3001, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used.

  Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands relating to control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the main control I / O port to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. When the main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Various voltages (DC +37 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 has an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. To be described). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various kinds of information in the RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages fall below the power failure warning voltage. This power failure notice signal is input not only to the main control I / O port of the main control MPU but also to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[7-2. Dispensing control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like performs a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, a firing control by the firing solenoid 542, and a firing that performs a ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. The control unit 633b includes an error LED display for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1, and an error release switch for releasing an error displayed on the error LED display.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control section]
Although not shown in detail, a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is a microcontroller having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. The payout control MPU has a built-in ROM and RAM as well as a function for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout in a payout control I / O port in a serial manner, or receives a command from the main control board 1310. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch being input to the payout control I / O port via the payout control input circuit, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 and a detection from the ball cut detection sensor 574 A signal, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to a payout control I / O port via a payout control input circuit.

  The detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are output through the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control I / O port of the MPU.

  A detection signal from a door frame opening switch that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main frame 4 and a detection signal from the main frame opening switch that detects the opening of the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are output from a payout control input circuit. Is input to the payout control I / O port of the payout control MPU.

  Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control I / O port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 from the payout control I / O to the payout motor 584 via the payout motor drive circuit, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. A signal for performing the operation is output from the payout control I / O port to the error LED display, and a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted from the payout control I / O port to the main control board 1310 in a serial manner. In addition, the number of the game balls B actually paid out is output from the payout control I / O port to the external terminal board 558. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by ascertaining the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The following are the contents displayed and notified by the error LED display. For example, when the figure “−” is displayed, it is notified that “normal”, and when the number “0” is displayed, it is “connection abnormal” (specifically, the main control board 1310 That the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board is abnormal), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "ball out" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it is "ball watching" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, that the game ball B bites between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and that the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, (Specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and when the number "5" is displayed, " "Retry error" (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed, it is "full". (Specifically, the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154), and the number “7” is displayed. Sometimes, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (that the electrical connection has been cut off at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), and when the number "9" is displayed, "S Tsu that is being click "(specifically, yet that the ball number of payout non game ball B has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port of the payout control MPU. . In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of the lent game balls B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220. It is input to the ball lending display unit of the operation unit 220 and displayed.

[7-2-2. Launch control section]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a A launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the launch ball; a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on the launch reference pulse; A ball feeding solenoid driving circuit that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on a clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls B are shot toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the generated reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number, and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 for detecting whether the palm or the finger is touching the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 for detecting whether or not is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the signal is input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal, and is input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 182, is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  The launch solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength appropriate for the rotational position of the handle 182, based on a signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, and the launch reference pulse. The input is output to the firing solenoid 542 as a trigger. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, and thereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. B is received into the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped, and the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side. send. As described above, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. Is controlled.

  Note that various voltages (DC +37 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) are directly supplied to the payout control board 633 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power-off process even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633.

[7-3. Peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of the effect based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and includes a CPU, a RAM, a VDP, a sound source, a SATA controller, and various I / O interfaces. Are integrated on a single semiconductor chip, a control ROM 1510b in which various programs and various schedule data defining the progress of the effect are stored in advance, and various types of data stored in a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on a peripheral data ROM board 1520. SDRAM 1510c composed of SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 capable of transferring and storing control information (peripheral data), a slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d capable of adjusting the volume, and a real-time clock (not shown). And it includes a backup power supply 1510e which can also supply power during power failure to the IC, and a power supply generating circuit (not shown) to create various supply voltages, and peripheral control input circuit (not shown), the. Various I / O interfaces include various serial I / O ports, various parallel I / O ports, and the like.

[7-3-1. Peripheral control IC]
The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 when the power is turned on (including a case where power is restored from a power failure). Control the transfer. As described above, since the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 have a transfer rate of 2 Gbps, control information stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. Transfers at high speed. As described above, as the control information (peripheral data), as described above, image data such as a background image, a character image, a design image, and a hold image for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, the door frame 3 and the game board. 5, light emission data for defining the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishment, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, and door frame. Drive data for driving and controlling various movable effectors provided in the game board 3 and the game board 5. Note that the background image, character image, design image, hold image, and the like are full-color images.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a to temporarily store information associated with the processing or delete the information. Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes the start-up of its own system, it reads various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on various commands from the main control board 1310 and proceeds with the effect. .

  Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes the start of its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on the various commands, and reads the various schedule data. In accordance with the schedule data, various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are read, control is performed to draw an image on the effect display device 1600, and the various LED light emission modes are adapted to the various effects. In such a manner, various effects are performed by performing control such that sound such as music and sound effects matched to the various effects flows.

  The VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, generates drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600, and outputs the drawing data to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Perform output control. The drawing data is transmitted to the effect display device 1600 via the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and various images are drawn on the effect display device 1600.

  The VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a employs a frame buffer method. The “frame buffer method” means that the drawing data for one screen (one frame) is held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) of the corresponding peripheral control IC 1510a, and the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) of these peripheral control ICs 1510a is held. In this method, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the VRAM) is output from the corresponding VDP output channel of the peripheral control IC 1510a. There are four channels CH1 to CH4 as VDP output channels of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In the present embodiment, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs control of outputting drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 of the four channels to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. When activating its own system, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a allocates and secures an area of a frame buffer (built-in VRAM) so as to correspond to these four channels.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a activates its own system, and the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a generates drawing data for one screen (one frame) in a predetermined area of the corresponding built-in VRAM and sends it to the outside. When output (transmitted), the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a accepts screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a (specifying the configuration of a screen drawn (displayed) on various display devices such as the effect display device 1600). A V blank signal that indicates that the peripheral control IC 1510 is in a ready state is output to the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads and generates sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and outputs the sound data. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects matched to various effects are played from the 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4, and the like. When a slide volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is operated, the volume control signal is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a can adjust the volume according to the input volume adjustment operation signal based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker An audio signal (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) is output to the base frame 464 and the main frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the main frame 4. By doing so, a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) can be provided.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes the startup of its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on the various commands, and reads the read schedule data. Along, outputs a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 or an LED for a light guide plate provided on each picture board of the game board 5. Board-side emission data for reading from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitting them from various serial I / O ports to each decorative board of the game board 5 and each picture board of the game board 5 via the effect drive board 1720 of the game board 5. To output drive signals to each drive motor and each drive solenoid provided on the game board 5. Technique board drive data is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted from various serial I / O ports to the effect drive board 1720 of the game board 5, the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, and the operation button up / down drive Door-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to the motor 367 and the like, and a door for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 The door-side driving light-emitting data composed of the side light-emitting data and the door-side driving light-emitting data is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and transmitted to the door frame 3 from various serial I / O ports.

  The detection signal from each detection sensor for detecting the position of the movable decorative body in the back rear production unit 3100, the back right production unit 3300, the back upper production unit 3400, and the lower back production unit 3500 provided in the game board 5 is located in the vicinity. It is received by various serial I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the control input circuit. The detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 381, the detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the detection signal from the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control input. The signals are received by various serial I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the circuit. Also, signals from the air-cooling fan FAN that convey the rotation state of the air-cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 are input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. .

  Various voltages (DC +37 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are directly supplied to the peripheral control board 1510. The power supply generation circuit (not shown) provided on the peripheral control board 1510 includes a plurality of control voltages corresponding to various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 from one voltage (for example, DC +12 V) among various voltages from the power supply board 630. Types are created and supplied.

  The peripheral control board 1510 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer), not shown, and the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the external WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is out of control.

[7-3-2. Control ROM]
As described above, the control ROM 1510b can previously store various programs and various schedule data that defines the progress of the effect. In the various schedule data, a plurality of types of data for performing an effect according to a plurality of types of effect patterns are defined. The various schedule data include, for example, a plurality of types of screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn (displayed) on various display devices such as the effect display device 1600, and a plurality of types of light emission mode generation for generating various LED light emission modes. There are schedule data, a plurality of types of sound generation schedule data for generating music, sound effects, and the like, and a plurality of types of electrical drive source schedule data for generating a drive mode of an electrical drive source such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets (determines) any one of a plurality of effect patterns based on various commands from the main control board 1310, the setting (from among the various types of schedule data) is performed. Various types of schedule data corresponding to the determined pattern are set (determined).

  Here, screen data arranged in a time series that constitutes the screen generation schedule data will be briefly described. The screen data defines the configuration of the screen to be drawn (displayed). Specifically, the screen data includes a command and a parameter for the command arranged for each line. Some commands have no parameters. The sprite in the description here is composed of character data, and one sprite is composed of one character data, and one sprite is composed of a plurality of character data. For example, one graphic including a background image may be composed of one character data, or may be composed of a plurality of character data arranged.

  Commands composing the screen data include an object addition command, an object insertion command, an object movement command, an object processing command, an object deletion command, an object replacement command, an object replacement command, and a one-frame end command.

  The object addition command is a command for adding one sprite. By specifying an object addition command, one piece of sprite information (sprite name or pointer indicating the address where the sprite is stored) to be added to the parameter is specified. When one sprite is added by the object addition command and the parameter, the value of the sprite index is added and registered as a number for individually identifying the one sprite. The value of the sprite index starts from the value 0 (zero) and increases by 1 each time one sprite is added. The smaller the value of the sprite index is, the more the screen is arranged and displayed on the innermost side. In other words, a screen is displayed in which a sprite having a large sprite index value is arranged and displayed on the front side.

  The object insertion command is a command for specifying one sprite index value and inserting one sprite into a plurality of sprites when there are a plurality of sprites already added by the object addition command. By specifying an object insertion command, one piece of sprite information (a sprite name or a pointer indicating an address where a sprite is stored) to be inserted is specified as a parameter, and a value of a sprite index to be inserted is specified. When one sprite whose sprite index value is specified by the object insertion command and the parameter is inserted, the specified sprite index value and the corresponding sprite index value registered immediately before the insertion are equal to or greater than the value of the registered sprite index value. Are shifted one by one and become larger. For example, when eight sprites have already been added as a plurality of sprites by the object addition command, the values of the sprite index are registered with the values 0 to 7 added. When a value of 6 is specified as a sprite index value to be inserted while one piece of sprite information is specified as a parameter, a new sprite is inserted as a value of the sprite index as a value 6 and a new sprite is specified. The value of the sprite index 6, which is equal to or greater than the value of the sprite index registered immediately before insertion corresponding to the index value and the value of the sprite index, and the value of the value 7 are shifted one by one to increase the value 7, and It will be re-registered as value 8.

  The object movement command is a command for setting the coordinates and size of one sprite. By instructing an object movement command, the value of the sprite index (that is, one sprite) is specified as a parameter, and the coordinates and size of one specified sprite are specified. The coordinates specify the XY coordinates of the screen, and the size specifies the size (width, height) of one sprite. One sprite in which the value of the sprite index is specified by the object movement command and the parameter is moved (arranged) to the coordinates with the designated size.

  The object processing command is a command for setting an arrangement (adaptation processing (work processing)). By specifying the object processing command, specifying the value of the sprite index (that is, one sprite) as a parameter, specifying the arrangement for one specified sprite (color adaptation processing (working processing)), and specifying various values for the arrangement . Arrangement (adaptation processing (working processing)) includes transmittance setting mode, noise addition setting mode, mosaic setting mode, oil painting style setting mode, ink painting style setting mode, stereoscopic setting mode, gray scale setting mode, monochrome 2 gradation There is a setting mode and the like.

  For example, the transmittance setting mode will be briefly described. The transmittance setting mode includes a sprite individual transmittance setting mode, a specific area transmittance setting mode, a screen transmittance setting mode, and the like. In the sprite individual transmittance setting mode, one sprite added by the object addition command is specified, and a value for setting the transmittance (0 (zero)% to 100%) of this one sprite is specified. It is a mode that can be. In the specific area transmittance setting mode, one sprite added by the object addition command is designated, a screen area corresponding to the one sprite is set as a specific area, and the transmittance (0 (zero)) in the specific area is set. % To 100%). The screen transmittance setting mode is a mode in which a value for setting the transmittance of the entire screen (0 (zero)% to 100%) can be designated. In this screen transmittance setting mode, as described above, since the transmittance of the entire screen is set, the value of the sprite index (that is, one sprite) is not specified in the parameter, and the arrangement (the adaptation processing (work processing) )), And specifies the transmittance (0% to 100%) of the entire screen. In addition, 0% is the smallest as the transmittance, and the transmittance increases toward 100%. When the transmittance is set to 0%, the light is not transmitted and the light is opaque, and the transmittance is set to 100%. And almost all light is transmitted to make it transparent. The sprite or the entire screen, for which the transmittance is set in this transmittance setting mode, can express the sense of depth that the rear side can be visually recognized, so that it is three-dimensionally drawn.

  For example, the noise addition setting mode will be briefly described. In the noise addition setting mode, one sprite added by the object addition command is specified, and the noise amount (0.1% This is a mode in which it is possible to specify a value for setting (50%), setting a distribution method (uniform distribution, Gaussian distribution), and setting ON / OFF of gray scale noise. As the amount of noise, 0.1% is the smallest, and the amount of noise increases toward 50%. As the amount of noise increases, an image in which pixels are randomly arranged becomes an image. When grayscale noise is set to ON, the noise is expressed as grayscale, while when grayscale noise is set to OFF, it is expressed as color noise. A sprite for which noise is set in the noise addition setting mode or the entire screen is two-dimensionally described.

  Further, for example, the mosaic setting mode will be briefly described. In the mosaic setting mode, one sprite added by the object addition command is designated, and the size of the mosaic (value 1 to value 15) is assigned to this one sprite. ), The shape of the mosaic area (the size of the rectangular area, the size of the elliptical area including the circular area), and the coordinates (X coordinate, Y coordinate) in the sprite. As the size of the mosaic, the value 1 is the smallest and the size of the mosaic increases toward the value 15. A value of 1 corresponds to a cell size of 1 square pixel, and a value of 15 corresponds to a cell size of 15 square pixels. As the size of the mosaic increases, the image in the mosaic area at the coordinates specified in the sprite becomes coarser mosaic. The sprite or the entire screen for which the mosaic is set in this mosaic setting mode is two-dimensionally described.

  In addition, for example, the oil painting style installation mode will be briefly described. In the oil painting style installation mode, one sprite added by the object addition command is designated, and the type of the brush to process the one sprite with a brush ( Value for setting narrow, standard, and wide), value for setting brush size (value 1 to value 50), value for setting sharpness intensity (value 0 (zero) to value 30) , And a mode in which the setting of the mesh effect can be designated. The value 1 is the smallest as the brush size, and the brush size increases toward the value 50. The value 0 is the smallest as the sharpness (no sharpness), and the sharpness increases toward the value 30. The sprite specified by this oil painting style installation mode is rendered three-dimensionally with irregularities.

  In addition, for example, the sumi-e style setting mode will be briefly described. In the sumi-e style setting mode, one sprite added by the object addition command is designated, and the stroke width (value 1 to value) is assigned to this one sprite. 15), a mode for specifying a value for setting pen pressure (value 1 to value 15), and a value for setting contrast (value 0 (zero) to value 40). is there. The value 1 is the smallest as the stroke width, and the stroke width increases toward the value 15. The value 1 is the smallest as the pen pressure, and the pen pressure increases toward the value 15. As the contrast, the value 0 is the smallest, and the contrast increases toward the value 40. The sprite or the entire screen processed in the sumi-e style in the sumi-e style setting mode becomes a Japanese style image drawn on Japanese paper, and is two-dimensionally drawn.

  In addition, for example, the stereoscopic vision setting mode will be briefly described. The stereoscopic vision setting mode includes a specific area stereoscopic vision setting mode, a screen stereoscopic vision setting mode, and the like. In the specific area stereoscopic view setting mode, one sprite added by the object addition command is specified, and a screen area corresponding to the one sprite is set as a specific area, and this specific area is set as an observer (player). By alternately arranging the right image that is the image for the right eye and the left image that is the image for the left eye of the observer (player), the observer (player) can stereoscopically image the image in the specific area. This is a mode that can be viewed. The image in the specific area specified by the specific area stereoscopic view setting mode is three-dimensionally described in a three-dimensional manner that emerges (protrudes) in front of the display area of the screen. In the screen stereoscopic setting mode, a right image that is an image for the right eye of the observer (player) and a left image that is an image for the left eye of the observer (player) are alternately arranged on the entire screen. This is a mode in which the observer (player) can stereoscopically view the entire screen. The image of the entire screen specified by the screen stereoscopic view setting mode is three-dimensionally described in a three-dimensional manner protruding (protruding) in front of the display area of the screen. When the stereoscopic setting mode is designated, it is necessary to further provide a switch liquid crystal behind a liquid crystal panel provided in various display devices such as the effect display device 1600. In this switch liquid crystal, a plurality of strip-shaped parallax barriers having a predetermined width and extending in the vertical direction corresponding to the strips forming the TFT liquid crystal as the liquid crystal panel are arranged in a row in the left-right direction at predetermined intervals. It is a liquid crystal, and the parallax barrier can be operated as an optical shutter by switching between the transparent state and the opaque state so as to be switched to each other. When the parallax barrier is controlled to the transparent state, the illumination light from the backlight disposed behind the switch liquid crystal is uniformly illuminated on the TFT liquid crystal, while the parallax barrier is controlled to the opaque state. In this case, the illumination light from the backlight arranged on the rear side of the switch liquid crystal is separated by the parallax barrier. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be configured to directly control the parallax barrier of the switch liquid crystal to control the parallax barrier to a transparent state or an opaque state. Further, by including information for controlling the parallax barrier of the switch liquid crystal into a transparent state or an opaque state in the above-described drawing data, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a may be configured to directly control the parallax barrier of the switch liquid crystal.

  For example, the gray scale setting mode will be briefly described. In the gray scale setting mode, one sprite added by the object addition command is designated, and the bit width of the gray scale (8 bits) is assigned to this one sprite. , 16 bits). If the bit width of the gray scale is set to 8 bits, the image is converted to an 8-bit grace scale, while if the bit width of the gray scale is set to 16 bits, the image is converted to a 16-bit grace scale. The sprite or the entire screen that is converted to grayscale in this grayscale setting mode is two-dimensionally described.

  In addition, for example, the monochrome two-tone setting mode will be briefly described. In the monochrome two-tone setting mode, one sprite added by the object addition command is specified, and two monochrome colors are assigned to this one sprite. This mode allows you to specify a value to be set. As two monochrome colors, white and black can be designated, white and red can be designated, and green and black can be designated. These two colors are specified as full colors in a 24-bit width having 8 bits each for red (R), green (G), and blue (B). The sprite or the entire screen set to monochrome two gradations in the monochrome two gradation setting mode is two-dimensionally drawn.

  As described above, the three-dimensionally described mode includes the transmittance setting mode, the oil painting style setting mode, and the stereoscopic setting mode as described above. On the other hand, in the two-dimensionally described mode, since one sprite added by the object addition command is processed two-dimensionally, the above-described noise addition setting mode, mosaic setting mode, and sumi-e A wind setting mode, a gray scale setting mode, a monochrome two-gradation setting mode, and the like are provided. Note that sprites for which no arrangement (adaptation processing (work processing)) is set by the object processing command for one sprite added by the object addition command are two-dimensional figures (pictures, photographs, sentences, values, and figures). Etc.), and are two-dimensionally described.

  The object deletion command is a command for deleting one sprite added by the object addition command. By specifying an object addition command, the value of the sprite index of one sprite added by the object addition command is specified as a parameter. When one sprite specified by the object deletion command and the parameter is deleted, a value larger than the value of the sprite index registered immediately before deletion corresponding to the value of the specified sprite index is shifted one by one. Smaller. For example, when eight sprites have already been added as a plurality of sprites by the object addition command, the values of the sprite index are registered with the values 0 to 7 added. When a value of 5, which is the value of the sprite index of the sixth sprite added by the add object command, is designated as a parameter, one sprite with the specified sprite index is deleted, and the sprite index of the sprite index is deleted. The value of the sprite index 6, which is larger than the value of the sprite index registered immediately before deletion corresponding to the value, and the value of the value 7 are shifted one by one, and the values are reduced to 5, 5, and 6. Will be re-registered.

  The object replacement command is a command for replacing one sprite already added by the object addition command with another sprite when there are a plurality of sprites already added by the object addition command. An object replacement command is instructed, and two sprite index values are specified as parameters. When two sprites to be exchanged are designated by the object exchange command and the parameter, the values of the two sprite indexes are exchanged with each other. For example, when eight sprites have already been added as a plurality of sprites by the object addition command, the values of the sprite indexes are registered with the values 0 to 7 assigned. Instructed, one sprite added to the parameter by the first object addition command (the value of the sprite index of one sprite added by the first object addition command is 0) and the fifth object addition command (The value of the sprite index of the one sprite added by the fifth object addition command is value 4) and the first sprite of the one sprite added by the first object addition command Splice The value of the index is changed from value 0 to value 4 and re-registered, and the value of the sprite index of one sprite added by the fifth object addition command is changed from value 4 to value 0 and re-registered. And interchange each other. As a result, the order of the one sprite added first by the object addition command and the fifth sprite added by the object addition command is reversed.

  The object replacement command is a command for replacing one sprite already added by the object addition command with another one sprite. An object replacement command is instructed, and one sprite added by the object addition command and another sprite (one replacement sprite) are designated as parameters. The sprite index value is not changed by the object replacement command and the parameter, and only the sprite is replaced. For example, when eight sprites are already added as a plurality of sprites by the object addition command, the values of the sprite indexes are registered with the values 0 to 7 assigned. By specifying the parameters, one sprite added by the eighth object addition command (the value of the sprite index of one sprite added by the eighth object addition command is 7) and another sprite (replacement) Is specified, the value 7 which is the value of the sprite index is not changed, and only the sprite is replaced. Thus, when eight sprites have already been added as a plurality of sprites by the add object command, one sprite added by the eighth add object command is arranged and displayed on the front side. Therefore, when one sprite arranged and displayed on the front side is replaced by another sprite (one sprite for replacement), for example, when a number is used as a sprite, countdown or counting is performed. A screen having an area to be raised can be provided.

  The one-frame end command is a command for notifying that all the structures of the screen data of one frame have been instructed. The one-frame end command is a single command that does not require setting of parameters.

  Next, an example in which a command is arranged as screen data of one frame will be briefly described. As described above, according to the screen generation schedule data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a converts the screen data arranged in time series into the screen generation schedule data from the first screen data by one every time a V blank signal is input. One by one, that is, one frame of screen data is output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Arrangement, movement, arrangement and the like of sprites are performed in a work area provided in a built-in VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a based on screen data of one frame, and sprite data of each sprite is created. Then, data superimposed as one screen from the sprite data of each sprite is written in an area of a built-in VRAM (an area for generating drawing data) corresponding to the channels CH1 to CH4 of the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a. .

  Here, the configuration of screen data of one frame that defines a screen displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600 will be briefly described. In the description here, there are some sprites in which one sprite is composed of one image data, and one sprite is composed of a plurality of image data. The arrangement, movement, arrangement, and the like of the sprites are performed in a work area provided in the built-in VRAM corresponding to the VDP channel CH1 of the peripheral control IC 1510a based on the screen data of one frame, and sprite data of each sprite is created. . In this work area, data superimposed as one screen for drawing on the display area of the effect display device 1600 from sprite data of each sprite is stored in an area of the built-in VRAM corresponding to the VDP channel CH1 of the peripheral control IC 1510a. By being written, drawing data is generated. The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is drawn (displayed) on the display area of the effect display device 1600 as, for example, a screen as shown in FIG.

  For example, one frame of screen data that defines a screen as shown in FIG. 194 (d) described below that does not perform a grayscale effect of switching from a full-color image to a grayscale image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and this grayscale The screen data of one frame that defines the screen as shown in FIG. 194 (s) for performing the effect is actually displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to be described later and the variable display. Since the image data is drawn, the screen data of one frame in this screen is arranged in the hundreds or thousands of lines from the first line (the first line) of the screen data. As shown in FIG. 194 (d), which does not perform the gray scale effect, For screen as shown in FIG. 194 which will be described later performs scale effect (s), it will be described below. Further, since the same command is arranged in the screen data a plurality of times, for convenience of explanation, a number is appended to the command and the following description will be given.

  The effect display device 1600 sets the upper left corner as the origin coordinates (the origin of the X coordinate and the origin of the Y coordinate) when the display area is viewed from the front. An XY space is set in which the Y coordinate increases downward from the coordinates, and the lower right corner is the maximum coordinate (the maximum value of the X coordinate and the maximum value of the Y coordinate) when the display area is viewed from the front. .

  A screen as shown in FIG. 194 (d), which will be described later, in which the grayscale effect is not performed will be described. First, the object addition command 1 is arranged in the first line of the screen data of one frame in the order of the sprites arranged from the innermost sprite to the foremost side, and specified as a parameter. As one piece of sprite information to be added, information of a background image (a background image 1640 in FIG. 194 (d) described later) (a pointer indicating the name of the background image or an address at which the background image is stored) is arranged. . This background image is configured by image data created in advance as one background image (the background image may be configured by aligning drawing data of a plurality of original images). As a result, a value of 0 (zero) is automatically assigned to the value of the sprite index as a number for identifying the background image and registered.

  In the second line of the screen data of one frame, the object addition command 2 is arranged, and a first reserved image (red in FIG. 194 (d) to be described later) as one piece of sprite information to be added specified as a parameter. (A pointer indicating the name of the reserved image or the address at which the reserved image is stored) of the first reserved display 1655a). As a result, the value 1 is automatically assigned to the value of the sprite index as a number for identifying the first reserved image and registered. In the third line of the screen data of one frame, an object addition command 3 is arranged, and a second reserved image (a second color having a white color in FIG. Information of the hold display 1655b) (the name of the hold image or a pointer indicating the address where the hold image is stored) is arranged. Thus, the value of the sprite index is automatically assigned and registered as the number for identifying the second reserved image. In the fourth line of the screen data of one frame, the object addition command 4 is arranged, and the first symbol image (the left decorative symbol 1650a in FIG. The information of the symbol 4) to be stopped and displayed (the name of the reserved image or a pointer indicating the address where the reserved image is stored) is arranged. As a result, the value 3 is automatically assigned to the value of the sprite index as a number for identifying the first symbol image and registered. On the fifth line of the screen data of one frame, an object addition command 5 is arranged, and a second symbol image (a medium decoration symbol 1650b in FIG. The information (the name of the reserved image or a pointer indicating the address where the reserved image is stored) of the symbol 5) to be stopped and displayed is arranged. Thereby, the value of the sprite index is automatically assigned and registered as a number for identifying the second symbol image. On the sixth line of the screen data of one frame, an object addition command 6 is arranged, and a third symbol image (a right decorative symbol 1650c in FIG. The information of the symbol 6 to be stopped and displayed (pointer indicating the name of the reserved image or the address where the reserved image is stored) is arranged. As a result, the value 5 is automatically added to the value of the sprite index as a number for identifying the third symbol image and registered.

  In this way, by setting the value of the sprite index, the third symbol image having the large value of the sprite index is arranged on the front side, and the second symbol image, the first symbol image, and the The two reserved images, the first reserved image, and the background image are arranged in this order (the background image with the smallest sprite index value is the deepest side).

  On the seventh line of the screen data of one frame, the object movement command 1 is arranged, and the value 0 which is the value of the sprite index of the background image specified as a parameter, coordinates, size (width, height) ) Is arranged. On the eighth line of the screen data of one frame, the object movement command 2 is arranged, and the value 1, which is the value of the sprite index of the first reserved image, designated as a parameter, coordinates, size (width, width, etc.) Height), are arranged. On the ninth line of the screen data of one frame, the object movement command 3 is arranged, and the value 2, which is the value of the sprite index of the second reserved image, designated as a parameter, coordinates, size (width, Height), are arranged. On the 10th line of the screen data of one frame, the object movement command 4 is arranged, and the value 3, which is the value of the sprite index of the first symbol image specified as a parameter, coordinates, size (width, Height), are arranged. On the eleventh line of the screen data of one frame, the object movement command 5 is arranged, and the value 4, which is the value of the sprite index of the second symbol image, designated as a parameter, coordinates, size (width, Height), are arranged. In the twelfth line of the screen data of one frame, the object movement command 6 is arranged, and the value 5, which is the value of the sprite index of the third symbol image specified as a parameter, coordinates, size (width, width, etc.) Height), are arranged. A one-frame end command 1 is arranged on the thirteenth line of the one-frame screen data, and indicates that all the structures of the one-frame screen data have been instructed.

  Thereby, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the first symbol image, the second symbol image, the third symbol image, the first reserved image, and the second reserved image are arranged without interfering with each other, A screen of a full-color image as shown in FIG. 194 (d) described below without performing the grayscale effect is displayed.

  Next, a screen for performing a grayscale effect as shown in FIG. 194 (s) will be described. The first line of the screen data of one frame to the twelfth line of the screen data of one frame include the screen data of one frame forming a screen as shown in FIG. Since they are the same, the description is omitted, and the contents of the thirteenth to nineteenth lines of the screen data of one frame will be described below.

  Of the contents from the 13th line to the 19th line of the screen data of one frame, the contents of the 13th line to the 18th line are not actually incorporated in the screen data of one frame in advance, and a grayscale effect is produced. The peripheral control is performed between the twelfth line and the thirteenth line of the one-frame screen data among the first line of the one-frame screen data to the thirteenth line of the one-frame screen data when not performed. The CPU of the IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a of an arrangement (adaptation processing (working processing)) independently selected in real time. Specifically, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines by lottery whether or not to perform a grayscale effect, and when performing a grayscale effect, the screen data of one frame described above in a case where the grayscale effect is not performed. After selecting the grayscale setting mode, the contents of the 13th to 18th lines following the twelfth line of the screen data of the 1st to 1st frames are independently arranged in real time (adaptation processing (working processing)). Instruct the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  When performing a grayscale effect, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a first selects the grayscale setting mode as the arrangement (adaptation processing (working processing)), and performs the object processing on the contents of the thirteenth line of the screen data of one frame. A command 1 is arranged, a value 0 which is a value of a sprite index of a background image specified as a parameter, a gray scale setting mode as an arrangement for one specified sprite (adaptation processing (work processing)), a bit width. (16 bits). In the contents of the 14th line of the screen data of one frame, the object processing command 2 is arranged, and the value 1 which is the value of the sprite index of the first reserved image specified as a parameter, and the one sprite to be specified A grayscale setting mode and a bit width (16 bits) are arranged as an arrangement (adaptation processing (working processing)) for. In the content of the fifteenth line of the screen data of one frame, the object processing command 3 is arranged, and the value 2 which is the value of the sprite index of the second reserved image, which is specified as a parameter, and the one sprite to be specified A grayscale setting mode and a bit width (16 bits) are arranged as an arrangement (adaptation processing (working processing)) for. In the content of the 16th line of the screen data of one frame, an object processing command 4 is arranged, and a value 3 which is a value of a sprite index of the first symbol image specified as a parameter, and one specified sprite A grayscale setting mode and a bit width (16 bits) are arranged as an arrangement (adaptation processing (working processing)) for. In the contents of the 17th line of the screen data of one frame, an object processing command 5 is arranged, and a value 4 which is a value of a sprite index of the second symbol image specified as a parameter, and one specified sprite A grayscale setting mode and a bit width (16 bits) are arranged as an arrangement (adaptation processing (working processing)) for. In the contents of the eighteenth line of the screen data of one frame, the object processing command 6 is arranged, and the value 5 which is the value of the sprite index of the third symbol image specified as a parameter, and one sprite to be specified A grayscale setting mode and a bit width (16 bits) are arranged as an arrangement (adaptation processing (working processing)) for. In the nineteenth line of the one-frame screen data, the one-frame end command 1 which is the content of the thirteenth line of the one-frame screen data when the grayscale effect is not performed is arranged. It indicates that all data structures have been specified.

  Accordingly, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the first symbol image, the second symbol image, the third symbol image, the first reserved image, and the second reserved image are arranged without interfering with each other, While using the same screen data as the screen data of one frame forming a screen as shown in FIG. 194 (d) described below without performing the gray scale effect, the gray scale is set by specifying the object processing command corresponding to the gray scale setting mode. A screen of an image converted into a gray scale as shown in FIG. 194 (s) for performing the effect is displayed.

[8. Ground wire system]
As described above, the frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. 86 can collect electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places once and ground it to the island facilities of the game hall. Here, the system of the ground wire by the frame ground substrate 559 will be described with reference to FIG. 172 is a diagram showing the configuration of the frame ground substrate 559, FIG. 172 (a) is a side view of the frame ground substrate 559, FIG. 172 (b) is a mounting surface of the frame ground substrate 559, and FIG. FIG. 172 (c) is a circuit diagram of the frame ground substrate 559, and FIG. 172 (d) is a table showing the description of each ground terminal provided on the frame ground substrate 559. As shown in FIG. 172 (a), the frame ground substrate 559 has a mounting surface facing downward (that is, a state where the connector insertion ports of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 are facing downward, respectively). It is housed and mounted inside the board housing part 551aa formed on the top plate part 551a of the payout base 551 shown in FIG. 86 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 172 (b), the frame ground board 559 has ground terminals ECN1, ECN5, ECN4, and ECN2 arranged in a line from the right side to the left side along the upper side thereof, and the center of the left side. A lower ground terminal ECN3 is arranged. The ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 will be briefly described. As shown in FIG. 172 (d), the ground terminal ECN1 serves as an interface ground and is provided on the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The connection terminal and the interface ground wire are electrically connected to each other. The ground terminal ECN2 is electrically connected to the ground connection terminal of the game hall and the ground connection terminal of the game hall. The ground terminal ECN3 is connected to the ball tank 552 shown in FIG. 86B (specifically, outside the side wall of the ball tank 552 near the substrate accommodating portion 551aa) as a ball tank ground. One end of the ball tank ground wire is attached by a metal screw (not shown), and The other end of the ground wire is electrically connected to the ground terminal ECN4. The ground terminal ECN4 is used as a metal ground for the main frame, and the metal frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main frame base unit 500 of the main frame 4 shown in FIG. (Specifically, one end of the main frame metal ground wire is attached to a metal screw (not shown) on the upper side of the main frame reinforcing frame 530, and the other end of the main frame metal ground wire is electrically connected. In addition, the ground terminal ECN5 is electrically connected to a ground connection terminal provided on a power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 95 as a power supply ground via a power supply ground wire.

  As shown in FIG. 172 (c), the circuit of the frame ground substrate 559 has a ground terminal ECN3 serving as a ball tank ground electrically connected to one end of a resistor ER1, and the other end of the resistor ER1 serving as a power ground. The ground terminal ECN5, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground, and the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground are each electrically connected, and the ground terminal ECN4 as the body frame metal ground is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER2. The other end of the resistor ER2 is electrically connected to a ground terminal ECN5 serving as a power supply ground, a ground terminal ECN2 serving as an island facility ground, and a ground terminal ECN1 serving as an interface ground. That is, the other end of the resistor ER1 and the other end of the resistor ER2 are electrically connected. In this embodiment, 510 ohms (Ω) and 2 watts (W) are employed as the resistors ER1 and ER2.

  Electromagnetic noise flowing to the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground is guided through the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground and the island facility ground wire to the ground of the island facility at the game hall, and is removed. Electromagnetic noise flowing to the terminal ECN3 is guided to the ground of the island facility in the game hall via the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground and the island facility ground wire, is removed, and flows to the ground terminal ECN4 as the main frame metal ground. The electromagnetic noise is guided to the ground of the island facility in the game hall via the earth terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground and the island facility ground wire, is removed, and the electromagnetic noise flowing to the ground terminal ECN5 as the power ground is the island facility. A game hall via the ground terminal ECN2 as the ground and the island equipment ground wire It is adapted to be removed is guided to the ground of the island facility.

  As shown in FIG. 82, a ball tank 552, a payout unit 560, and the like are attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. The ball 552 is supplied with game balls B from the island facilities of the game hall, and the ball tank 552 is supplied with the game balls B to the payout unit 560. The game balls B are polished in the island facility of the game hall, or rubbed with each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1, and emit electromagnetic wave noise by being charged and electrostatically discharged. For this reason, static electricity easily accumulates in the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 in which the game balls B can stay and the payout unit 560 are installed, and around the area.

  Accordingly, in the present embodiment, the frame ground substrate 559 is disposed near the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity is likely to accumulate. In the frame ground substrate 559, the ground terminal ECN3 serving as a ball tank ground, and the main body frame metal The ground terminal ECN4 and the ground terminal ECN2 are gradually connected to the ground terminal ECN2 as the ground terminal and the ground terminal ECN4 is connected to the ground terminal ECN2. It can be guided to the ground of the island facilities in the game hall via the ground wireIn other words, electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 or the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity easily accumulates is transferred from the frame ground board 559 via the ball tank 552 or the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 to a frame ground called a frame ground. By leading to the earth of the island facility of the game hall, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 can be removed by flowing to the earth of the island facility of the game hall.

  On the other hand, when electromagnetic wave noise enters the cover body 1501 and / or the base body 1502 constituting the peripheral control board box 1505 shown in FIG. 168, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board The ground terminal 1530 enters the ground (GND) line, flows into the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630, and the ground terminal as the power ground on the frame ground board 559 from the ground connection terminal of the power supply board 630 via the power ground wire. It flows to ECN5, is guided from the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground to the earth of the island equipment in the game hall via the island equipment ground wire, and is removed. In other words, the cover 1501 and / or the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Electromagnetic noise that enters through the base body 1502 is guided from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island facility of the game hall as a circuit ground called a circuit ground, thereby causing the cover body 1501 and / or the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 to move. Electromagnetic noise that intrudes through the ground can be removed by flowing to the earth of the island facility in the game hall.

  In the present embodiment, of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the ground terminal ECN3 serving as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 serving as the main frame metal ground are, as described above, in a region that is strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise. Therefore, a large-sized ground terminal is adopted, and the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground, as described above, transmits the electromagnetic noise flowing into the frame ground substrate 559 to the game hall. A large earth terminal is used because it is guided to the ground of the island facility for removal. The ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 employing this large ground terminal are square with a cross section of 1.14 mm on a side, rated current: 7 A (when AC / DC, AWG # 18 is used), rated voltage: It has general specifications of 250 V (AC / DC), applicable electric wire range: AWG # 22 to # 18, and has a height of 13.4 mm as shown in FIG. 172 (a) (ground terminals ECN2 to ECN2). When the housing corresponding to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height becomes 18.6 mm).

  On the other hand, the electromagnetic noise flowing into the ground terminal ECN1 serving as the interface ground and the ground terminal ECN5 serving as the power ground is smaller than the above-described ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4, and the current is small. For the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5, small ground terminals are employed. The ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 adopting the small-sized ground terminals are square having a cross-sectional shape of 0.64 mm on a side, rated current: 3 A (when AC / DC, AWG # 22 is used), and rated voltage: As shown in FIG. 172 (a), the height is 7 mm (the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 have a general specification of 250 V (AC / DC), applicable electric wire range: AWG # 30 to # 22). When the corresponding housing is inserted, the mounting height is 9.8 mm).

  In the present embodiment, the respective ground wires (the island facility ground wire, the ball tank ground wire, and the body frame ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 are electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. Since the current due to the electromagnetic noise is larger than the respective ground wires (interface ground wire, power supply ground wire), the respective ground wires (island facility ground wire, ball tank) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4. The thickness of the ground wire (main frame ground wire) is larger than the thickness of each ground wire (interface ground wire, power supply ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. In this embodiment, as the thickness of the frame ground substrate 559, 1.6 mm is adopted as shown in FIG. 172 (a).

  As described above, since the electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places is once collected on the frame ground substrate 559, the electromagnetic noise can be led from the frame ground substrate 559 to the ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed therefrom. The substrate 559 has a function of destaticizing.

  In addition, since the electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places is temporarily collected on the frame ground board 559 and guided to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall from the frame ground board 559, it can be removed. The ground wire (wiring) from the ball tank 552 disposed on the upper side is routed to the power supply board 630 disposed on the lower side of the pachinko machine 1, and the electromagnetic wave noise is once aggregated in the power supply board 630 to provide the island facilities of the game hall. The arrangement of the ground wire (wiring) becomes extremely simple as compared with the configuration of leading to the ground and removing.

  In addition, since the external terminal plate 558 and the frame ground substrate 559 can be arranged in the board accommodating portion 551aa of the payout base 551 in a state of being close to each other, a plurality of electric wire connections provided on the external terminal plate 558 can be provided. Terminal 558a (a plurality of external terminals (in the present embodiment, there are ten external terminals XCN1 to XCN10 arranged in a line from left to right as viewed from behind the payout base unit 550). ) And a hall computer provided in a game hall, respectively, by wiring, an earth terminal ECN2 as an island facility ground on the frame ground board 559, and a ground connection terminal provided in the island facility of the game hall. , And the work of electrically connecting the island equipment ground wire (wiring), and can be performed as a series of work Because, it is possible to contribute to improvement in workability.

  In addition, since the frame ground substrate 559 is configured to be able to be disposed in the substrate accommodating portion 551aa of the payout base 551, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground of the frame ground substrate 559 and the island facility of the game hall are provided. Various control boards provided on the game board 5 (for example, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 for controlling the progress of the game), Control board 1510 capable of controlling the progress of the control, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like). It is possible to eliminate adverse effects on electronic components (including connectors) provided in the device.

  Further, by disposing the frame ground substrate 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity easily accumulates, the main body frame 4 and the ball tank 552, which are strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise, and the vicinity of the dispensing unit 560 In contrast to the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the body frame base unit 500, the ground terminal ECN3 as a ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as a body frame metal ground on the frame ground board 559 are respectively provided. The length of the ground wire (ball tank ground wire, main frame metal ground wire) to be electrically connected is made extremely short, and electromagnetic wave noise is guided from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island facility in the game hall to remove it. Can be.

  In addition, by disposing the frame ground substrate 559 near the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity easily accumulates, the ball tank 552 where static electricity easily accumulates and the frame earth substrate 559 that exhibits a static elimination action are electrically connected. The length of the ball tank ground wire (wiring) is determined by the length of the body frame metal ground wire (wiring) for electrically connecting the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 to the frame ground substrate 559 that exhibits a static elimination action, and the length of the power supply. The length of a power supply ground line (wiring) for electrically connecting the substrate 630 to the frame ground substrate 559 that exerts the charge eliminating function, and the interface that electrically connects the interface substrate 635 to the frame ground substrate 559 that exerts the charge removing effect. It can be configured to be the shortest as compared with the length of the ground wire (wiring).

  Further, by disposing the frame ground substrate 559 near the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity easily accumulates, the ball tank 552, which is strongly affected by electromagnetic noise, and the main frame 4 near the dispensing unit 560. In contrast to the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the body frame base unit 500, the frame ground board 559 has a ground terminal ECN3 as a ball tank ground and a ground terminal ECN4 as a body frame metal ground. Although a large current flows, the resistance is reduced by the resistances ER1 and ER2 of the frame ground substrate 559, so that the operation of the power supply substrate 630 is not affected. It is led to the ground of the island facilities in the game hall through the ground wire and removed. Can.

  By the way, as disclosed in the related art, the respective grounds are temporarily integrated on a power supply board disposed on the CR unit side below the main body frame so as to easily supply the AC power of 24 V to the CR unit, and the power supply board is connected to the power supply board. There has been proposed a gaming machine which is connected to the ground of an island facility to be grounded (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-120593 (paragraph [0335], FIGS. 68 and 69)). Since the power supply board is generally heavy, it is often placed below the gaming machine. Therefore, in order to consolidate the ground on the power supply board, it is necessary to route the ground wire from the ball tank or the prize ball device on the upper part of the gaming machine toward the lower power supply board. By laying the ground wire in this way, electromagnetic noise may be transmitted to various control boards existing on the way and may have an unexpected effect. In addition, since the ground wire is integrated on the power supply board, if any problem occurs on the power supply board, the ground may be affected, or current may flow through the ground wire, which may affect the operation of the power supply board. there were. In addition, when the ground of the island facility is located above the gaming machine, it is necessary to route the ground wire collected by the power supply board from the lower side to the upper side again for connection, which may be complicated.

[9. Game content]
The contents of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3. Is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game balls B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the stronger the ball can be driven in the clockwise direction, the maximum of 100 game balls B can be continuously played in one minute. That is, the game ball B can be hit at 0.6 second intervals.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nail N. Thus, the falling speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B, so that the movement can be enjoyed. In addition, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill (not shown) which is rotated by the contact of the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 from the highest point in front view, it contacts the plurality of obstacle nails N, It flows down in the area on the left side of the center role 2500. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the left area of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2503 from the warp exit 2502.

  The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503, moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the center in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503 into the game area 5a, the portion is located right above the first start port 2002, and thus is accepted into the first start port 2002 with high probability. When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted in the first starting port 2002 or the general winning opening 2001 of the starting port unit 2100.

  By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed to the left side of the center role 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it is moved to the center in the left-right direction by the side slope 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. Alternatively, there is a possibility that the start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the general winning port 2001, or the like may be accepted. When the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B hit into the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 (so-called right-hand). Are discharged from the right guide passage 2510 of the center role 2500 to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400. Below the downstream end of the right guide passage 2510, a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 are provided, and pass through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

  Then, when the right-hitting game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery result obtained is “normal hit”, the closed second starting port is closed. 2004 is open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be paid out.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate unit 2003, a certain period of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result (for example, 0). .01 to 60 seconds, usually also referred to as fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

  Note that if the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 after the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the number of reserves of the ordinary lottery result is limited to four, and if it is more than that, even if the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, it is discarded without suspension. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit") Is generated. Then, the lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). Note that the special lottery results obtained by accepting the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include “losing”, “15R jackpot A”, “15R jackpot B”, and the like. .

  The special lottery results (first special lottery results and second special lottery results) drawn by receiving the game balls B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are used as special lottery results for generating an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the elapse of the special fluctuation time, the special winning opening 2005 becomes ready to accept the game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the gaming ball B is received in the special winning opening 2005 when the special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is provided from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the special winning opening 2005 is capable of accepting the game ball B, by allowing the special winning opening 2005 to receive the game ball B, a large number of game balls B can be paid out and the player can be entertained. it can.

  When the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the special winning opening 2005 is opened so that the game ball B can be received, or a predetermined winning When any one of the conditions of accepting the number (for example, 10) of the game balls B is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern for closing the game balls B in a non-acceptable closed state (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) Repeat a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, in the case of "15R big hit", 15 rounds are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In addition, in the “big hit”, when the special winning opening 2005 is in the open state due to the big hit gaming state, when the game ball received in the special winning opening 2005 is distributed to the second receiving opening 2008 by the sorting piece 2415, the big hit game After the end of the state, ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous gaming state. This ST is a certain change that changes the probability that a special lottery result such as a “big hit” is drawn during a predetermined number of changes, or a time reduction that changes the display time of the effect image indicating the special lottery result. Is maintained.

  In the present embodiment, during the period from the start of the special lottery to the indication of the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the first starting port 2002 and the When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is not started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Suspended. The maximum number of the reserved special lottery results to be retained is up to four for the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 indicates that a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined period of time, and thereafter, the special lottery result is indicated by a combination of the LEDs that are turned on.

  On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and suggests a special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 is such that the pattern rows composed of a plurality of pictures are displayed side by side in the left and right direction, and each of the pattern rows is fluctuated. Are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective picture rows are stopped and displayed such that the pictures of the three picture rows to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three picture rows are stopped and each picture is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, 15R big hit game A, 15R big hit game B, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  In addition, the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (the blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the fixed image due to the fluctuation of the pattern row is displayed). (The time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for indicating the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected by lottery. A player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 can be performed. In the player participation type effect, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate or vibrate the rotation operation unit 302, assist the rotation operation, inhibit the rotation operation, and operate the operation button lifting drive motor. With 367, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised to make it stand out, and the player's participation-type effect can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, and the back effect unit 3100 of the display effect unit 2600 and the back unit 3000, The lighting unit 3200, the back right unit 3300, the back unit 3400, the back unit 3500, the back unit 3600, and the like can be used as appropriate to perform light-emitting effects, movable effects, and the like. The effect can also entertain the player, and can prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control board 1510, in a player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, a correct operation is performed when a player makes a mistake or does not perform an operation to be performed. To the player. Specifically, for example, when a pressing operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is requested, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354. That effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for indicating the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the display effect unit of the table unit 2000 in the game board 5 in accordance with the special lottery result selected by lottery. 2600, back-side production unit 3100, back-side production unit 3200, back-right production unit 3300, back-up production unit 3400, back-under production unit 3500, back-up production unit 3600, etc. It is possible to perform a movable effect, a display effect, and the like, so that the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[10. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of a control process executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly, the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 173 (a) is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a control process performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 173 (a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment first stores the data in various registers and RAM as a process of step S1 on condition that the RAM clear switch is operated. Initialize the data that has been set. The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. The RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, one second) has elapsed since the power was turned on. When the determination is made, the initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize the data stored in the various registers and the RAM of the main control MPU.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process of storing information (for example, various flags) indicating the progress of the game in the RAM of the main control MPU is executed. If the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). Then, a restoration process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. When the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the pachinko machine 1 is set to an initial state by executing an initialization process without executing a recovery process.

  Next, as a process of step S2, a random number which is a number updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment, special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) provided for the lottery process on the display mode when the special symbol is stopped in the variable display, and the special symbol The variable random number provided for the lottery process for the predetermined time (variable time) required for the variable display control of the above, and the display of the decorative symbol performed by the effect display device 1600 in response to the variable display of the special symbol is reached. (The left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped at the same symbol and the middle decorative symbol has not been stopped yet, or the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are synchronously changed to be the same symbol. A state random number to be used in the lottery process of determining whether or not to make a big hit, and a symbol random number to be used in a lottery process for determining the type of the big hit when it is determined to be a big hit based on the special random number. A random number counter for holding random numbers such as one symbol random number, second symbol random number), and random number (ordinary random number) provided for a lottery process related to a hit at the time of operation of the second starting door 2411. I have.

  In this example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol use a common reach random number, that is, even if the first start port 2002 is started, the second start port 2004 is started. Even in this case, the reach random number is updated from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the reach random number is updated from a different counter. The first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second reach symbol corresponding to the reach determination table to be compared with the obtained reach random number may be different from the first reach determination table. The execution ratio of the reach effect may be made different by providing a second reach determination table in which a determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) which are not involved in the random numbers among the random numbers are updated. After the processes in steps S1 and S2 are performed, only the process in step S2 is basically repeatedly performed. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed, for example, every 4 ms.

  FIG. 173 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 173 (b), in this interrupt control, first, register save processing is performed as the processing of step S11. Next, as the processing in step S12, the gate sensor 2401, the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402, the special winning opening sensor 2403, the first receiving port sensor 2404, the second receiving port sensor 2405, and detection signals from various switches such as the above-described general winning opening sensor 3001 are input. Next, as a process of step S13, a random number updating process for updating the value of the random number counter for generating the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, the random number (special random number, ordinary random number) relating to the display mode when the variable design of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol is stopped is updated from among the random numbers described above. Counter operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this manner, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process including a lottery process according to a display mode when the special symbol variation display is stopped as the process of step S14. Execute Although the special symbol process process will be described later, here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, first special symbol process flag) indicating the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is described. The corresponding processing is selectively executed based on the two special symbol process flags).

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes, as the process of step S15, a normal symbol process process including a lottery process related to a hit at the moment of operation of the second starting door 2411. In the normal symbol process process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed in accordance with the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is configured to execute the lottery process so that the driving frequency of the second starting door 2411 becomes higher during a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game state. (So-called reduced working hours). In this embodiment, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is increased only for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state, and the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is shortened. When the result is a hit, the opening time of the second starting port door 2411 is extended to realize such a time saving state.

  When the special symbol process (step S14) and the normal symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 next executes the special symbol process as the process of step S16. Then, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM in the above-described normal symbol process process to, for example, the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then performs, as a process of step S18, an information output process of outputting data such as hit information (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B) supplied to the hall management computer, for example. I do.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402, the big winning port sensor 2403, and the general winning port sensor 3001 as the process of step S19. When the detection signals such as are on, the payout control command is output to the payout control board 633 so that the prize balls corresponding to those signals are paid out to the player. Thus, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board 633 outputs a drive signal from the payout control unit 633a to the payout motor 584, and pays out a prize ball to the player.

  Further, the main control MPU of the same main control board 1310 executes a storage process for checking an increase or decrease in the number of startup storages as a process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. After that, the drive control of the constantly operating actuator is performed (step S22), and the contents of the register are restored (step S23). When the interrupt is permitted (step S24), this control ends. Becomes

  According to the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process using a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be performed. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that the random numbers used for the various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 174, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first uses the first starting port sensor 3002 The first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the above random number counter on condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (step S31), and this is obtained from the RAM. A first opening opening passage process, such as storing in a special symbol holding storage area, is executed (step S32). Also, on condition that the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is replaced with the random number. A second starting port passage process such as acquiring from the counter and storing this in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM is executed (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is being controlled is set (step S35). If the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit game state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S39) is executed. In the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process on the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) becomes a mode suggesting “15R big hit A”, The opening and closing of the special winning opening 2005 is controlled in accordance with the 15R jackpot gaming state A, and the sorting piece 2415 for distributing the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 to either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 is provided. Drive control is performed, and a process of setting the game ball B to the valid state in the fifteenth round in which the game ball B can be distributed to the second reception port 2008 is executed. In addition, when the mode suggests “15R big hit B”, the large winning opening 2005 is controlled to be opened and closed according to the 15R big hit gaming state B, and the game ball B received by the big winning opening 2005 is set as the first entrance. The driving of the sorting piece 2415 to be allocated to either the 2007 or the second reception port 2008 is controlled, and a process of setting the valid state in the 15th round in which the game ball B can be allocated to the second reception port 2008 is executed.

  Here, the “valid state” and the “invalid state” will be described. First, in the present embodiment, the state when the game ball B is received in the second reception port 2008 has an “effective state”. Here, the “valid state” is set to a high level after the end of the jackpot game state by receiving the game ball B in the second reception port 2008 in the fifteenth round in which the game ball B can be distributed to the second reception port 2008. This is a state in which control to a probability state is allowed (enabled). Therefore, by receiving the game ball B in the second receiving port 2008 in the “valid state”, the state is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, in the present embodiment, as a state in which the game ball B is not received in the second reception port 2008, there is an “invalid state” different from the “valid state”. Here, the “invalid state” is a state in which the game balls B are not accepted in the second reception port 2008 in principle, such as the first to 14th rounds in which the game balls B are distributed to the first reception port 2007. Even if the game ball B is received in the second reception port 2008, it is not allowed (disabled) to control the game to the high probability state after the big hit game state ends. Therefore, even if the game ball B is received in the second reception port 2008 in the “invalid state”, the state is not controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. In addition, the “invalid state” enables information about such an occurrence to be notified to the hall management side when the game ball B is received in the second reception port 2008 due to the occurrence of an abnormality such as fraud. Therefore, the period for monitoring whether or not the game ball B has been received by the second reception port 2008 is set. In the present embodiment, a “valid state” is set in a predetermined round (15th round) that allows the game balls B to be distributed to the second reception port 2008, and a game is provided to the second reception port 2008. Whenever the ball B is received, the state is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. In addition, the predetermined round (1st to 14th round) in which the game ball B is not distributed to the second reception port 2008 is set to “invalid state”, but may be set to “valid state”. Even if the “valid state” is set in all rounds during the jackpot game state, the game balls B are not accepted in the second reception port 2008 in principle in the 1st to 14th rounds. As in the case of setting the “invalid state” in the 14th round, it is important whether or not the game ball B is accepted in the second reception port 2008 in the 15th round set in the “valid state”.

  In the big hit control process (step S41), after performing the opening control of the special winning opening 2005, each set process of the high probability flag, the time saving flag, and the time saving number counter is executed. The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state. During the execution of the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B), it is possible to distribute the game ball B to the second receiving entrance 2008 in the first to fifteenth rounds in which the big winning opening 2005 is opened. When the game ball B is received in the second reception port 2008 during the valid state in the fifteenth round, the game is controlled to the high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state) after the end of the jackpot game state, so that the high-probability flag is set. If the game ball B is not accepted in the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the fifteenth round, the state is controlled to the high probability state (high probability time saving state) after the end of the big hit game state. The high probability flag is not set. Then, when the high probability flag is set, when the next big hit or when the counter value of the time saving counter becomes “0”, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. The high probability flag is reset by a second special symbol stop process (not shown).

  The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the game is in a time saving state, and is a big hit (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B) for controlling to a time saving state (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state) after the end of the big hit gaming state. It is set when the big hit game state based on the game ends. Then, when the time saving flag becomes the next big hit or when the counter value of the time saving number counter becomes "0", the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. Reset by processing.

  The time reduction counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of times of the fluctuation display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuations of the time reduction state. When the big hit game state based on the big hit (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B) controlled to the time saving state and the low probability time saving state is ended, the number of continuations of the time saving state is set. The countdown is performed each time the special symbol change display is executed until the counter value becomes “0”, but when the next big hit occurs before the counter value becomes “0”, FIG. Is reset (the counter value is returned to "0") in the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG.

  If the jackpot execution flag is not set, the condition is that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is “0”. (Step S36), a first special symbol process process including a lottery process according to a display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (Step S37), and the second special symbol process stored in the second special symbol holding storage area is performed. On condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S36), a second special symbol including a lottery process according to a display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. The process is executed (Step S38). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first starting port passage process (step S32).

  Now, in the process of the step S31, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 3002 is in the ON state and that the game ball B has entered the first starting port 2002, it is shown in FIG. 175. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S41.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains, from the main control built-in RAM, a counter value by a first special reserved number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area. Based on the counter value, it is determined whether the first reserved storage number is the maximum value (upper limit value) “4” (step S42). In the process of step S42, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S43 to S43 to set the variable display control of the first special symbol to a new suspended state. The process of S45 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, in the process of step S44, each random number acquired in step S41 is stored in the first special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. To be stored.

  In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 displays the display result of the first special symbol variation display based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S41. Is a big hit, if a big hit, the type of big hit, if not, a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or a mode type of the game effect to be executed ( After performing effect pre-judgment processing for judging pre-judgment information such as the type of the fluctuation pattern) before starting the fluctuation display according to the start winning (step S45), the processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S42, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S43 to S45, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly held.

  In addition, when the first hold storage number changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special hold number display in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the first hold. In addition to updating to correspond to the number of storages, in the storage processing (step S20), a command (first reservation number designation commands 0 to 4) indicating the first number of storages to be stored is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. It is supposed to. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the above-described effect pre-judgment process (step S45). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-judgment process, the pre-judgment table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S41, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation Whether or not a big hit is achieved by comparing with a random number, if a big hit, the type of the big hit, and if the big hit is not made, a reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. The game production mode type is specified (step S61).

  Then, the specified pre-determination information (whether or not a big hit is to be made, if a big hit is made, if a big hit is not made, a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, Game production mode), the type of the obtained special random number (first special random number), and the number of storages to be stored (the value of the number of reservations counter) stored in correspondence with the obtained special random number. Set the pre-judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-judgment process related to the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first starting opening passage process, the specified pre-judgment information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the (The value of one special reserved number counter) and the first special symbol pre-judgment command corresponding to the value (step S62).

  Then, by transmitting the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the special symbol command control process (step S16), the command is stored in correspondence with the first start port 2002 in which the start winning has occurred. In addition to the number of reserved memories, whether the display result of the special symbol change display based on the generated starting prize is a big hit or not. The peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before the start of the variable display according to the start prize, such as executing the reach effect as the game effect to be performed or the type of the game effect to be executed. Can be grasped.

  When the peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is provided with a first holding storage area for storing advance determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol.

  The first hold storage area has storage areas 1 to 4 corresponding to the number of hold storages, and the peripheral control IC 1510a stores first (earliest) pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Store in order from the area. When the advance determination command is received when the advance determination information is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the advance determination information notified to the (n + 1) th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is received. When the first variation pattern command notifying the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is received, the advance variation stored in the first storage area of the first hold storage area in accordance with the received first variation pattern command is stored. The determination information is discarded, and the pre-determination information stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage area is moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Shift the stored pre-judgment information). As a result, the advance determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to specify the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest advance determination information.

  When the variable display control is set to the suspended state in this way, despite the fact that the variable display control is maintained in a non-executed state (reserved state), the big hit expectation degree of the variable display control (pseudo winning probability) ) Can be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, for example, at the time of new output of the hold display or at the time of shift display of the hold display corresponding to the hold exhaustion. .

  FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the second starting port passage processing (step S34).

  Now, in the process of step S33, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 2511 is in the ON state and that the game ball B has entered the second starting port 2004, it is shown in FIG. 177. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reserved stored number becomes the maximum value (upper limit value). ) Is determined (step S52). In the process of step S52, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S53 to S53 to set the variable display control of the second special symbol to a new suspended state. The process of S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as a process of step S54, each random number acquired in step S51 is stored in the second special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. To be stored.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S52 that the second reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S53 to S54, the above-mentioned variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  In addition, when the second reserved storage number changes based on the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved number display in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the second reserved state. In addition to updating to correspond to the storage number, a command (second reservation number designation command 0 to 1) for designating the second storage number is set in the storage processing (step S20) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. It is supposed to. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S37). Note that the first special symbol process executed in step S37 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and the random numbers used in the determination are used. Only the first special symbol process executed in step S37 of the special symbol process will be described. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process or the like for a display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Symbol normal processing (step S80)
2. A first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which a process of determining a mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on a result of a lottery process on a display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped. )
3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process in which a lottery process or the like is performed (step S82)
4. First special symbol variation process that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S83).
5. The state of the first special symbol when the variation control is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol so as to be performed (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 173).

  FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 179, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first executes step S101. In the processing of (1), it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value of the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state, the process is then stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU as a process of step S102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol is read out from the RAM. . Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reserved storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stored. The random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the special symbol change display is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in accordance with the occurrence of the start winning prize in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, if a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and a winning start occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first random number is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage areas is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. The various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. As a result, the order in which the variable display control of the first special symbol is suspended is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become.

  After that, as a process of step S105, a big hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the big hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S106) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), the process ends.

  FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S105).

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that if the current game state is a high probability state (high probability time reduction state, high probability non-time reduction state) (step S111), a high probability state shown in FIG. A big hit determination table is selected (step S112). If the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111), a large hit determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 181 (A) is selected (step S113) and selected. The calculated big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S114).

  The big hit determination table shown in FIG. 181 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and when the gaming state is a low probability state (a normal state (low probability non-saving time state) and a time reduction state (low probability time saving state)). And a large hit determination table used when the game state is a high probability (high probability reduced time state). Then, in the big hit determination table at the time of low probability, the big hit determination value indicating that one kind of first special random number has won the big hit, and the miss judgment indicating that the 299 kinds of first special random numbers are the above-mentioned misses. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the value (big hit probability at low probability: 1/300). In the second special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process, in the low probability big hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, the first special random number is compared. In the same manner as the big hit determination table at the time of low probability, which is referred to, a big hit determination value indicating that one kind of second special random number has won a big hit and 299 kinds of second special random numbers are out of the above. The above-mentioned second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the outlier determination value (the big hit probability at the time of low probability: 1/300).

  In the big hit determination table at the time of high probability, ten kinds of first special random numbers including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the big hit determination table at the time of low probability match the big hit determination value, The first special random numbers are associated with each other so that the 290 types of first special random numbers coincide with the outlier determination value (big hit probability at high probability: 1/30). As described above, in this embodiment, in the high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state), the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won is determined in the low-probability state (the normal state (low-probability non-time-saving state) and the time-saving state (low-time state). 10) times higher than the probability reduction time state)). In the second special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process, in the high probability big hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, the first special random number is compared. Similar to the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability referred to for the 10 big random numbers, including the same second special random number as the second special random number set in the big hit determination table at the time of low probability The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the jackpot determination value indicating that the game has been won and to match the loss determination value indicating that the 290 types of second special random numbers are the above-mentioned loss (when the high probability Jackpot probability: 1/30).

  When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected big hit determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, and determines that the big hit is determined (step S115). ), A big hit flag indicating that the change has won the big hit is set, and the process is terminated (step S116), and the selected big hit determination table and the first special read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process are set. As a result of the comparison with the random number, when it is determined that the data is out of the range, the reach determination table (not shown) is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S117). Then, as a result of comparison between the reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S102, when it is determined that the reach is out of reach (step S118), a reach flag indicating that the variation becomes reach is set and the process is performed. The process ends (step S119).

  FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 182, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the big hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The determination of the result of the lottery process is performed by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S121).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 181 (B). (Step S122), the type of the big hit is determined, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is determined (step S123). On the other hand, if the big hit flag has not been set in step S121, the first special symbol is determined to be a lost symbol as a mode at the time of stopping the change (step S124).

  As shown in FIG. 181 (B), in the symbol determination table, symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) are stored in association with each determination result (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B). ing. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of the big hit by specifying the determination result associated with the obtained symbol random number. In addition, in the symbol determination table of this example, it is set so that the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number and the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number are different. ing.

In particular,
1.15R The opening and closing of the special winning opening 2005 is controlled in accordance with the gaming state A of the big hit, and the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time in the 15th round (opening in which the game ball B is difficult to enter. 5 seconds) and a long time opening (easy opening in which the game ball B can enter (e.g., 20 seconds)). If the game ball B is received in the second reception port 2008 during the valid state in the fifteenth round, a special state is set after the big hit game state. While controlling the symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) to perform the variable display 100 times, the game is controlled to the high probability time saving state, and the game ball B is set in the second reception port 2008 during the valid state in the fifteenth round. Not accepted When the can, 15R jackpot A is controlled to a low probability time reduction mode until the variation display of the special symbol after the completion of the jackpot gaming state (first special symbol and the second special symbol) is executed 100 times
The opening and closing of the special winning opening 2005 is controlled in accordance with the 2.15R big hit gaming state B, and the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time at the 15th round (the opening in which the game ball B is difficult to enter. 5 seconds), the state is set to a valid state (a state in which the gaming ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 and the state is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state), and is valid in the 15th round. When the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 during the state, the high symbol is displayed until the change display of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is executed 100 times after the end of the big hit gaming state. On the other hand, if the game ball B is not accepted in the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the fifteenth round, the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second symbol) is set after the big hit gaming state. Determining 15R jackpot B which variation display of the special symbols) is controlled to a low probability time reduction until it is executed 100 times, from among the two types of jackpot to any jackpot.

  In the 15R jackpot gaming state A of this example, as the operation schedule of the special winning opening 2005 in the fifteenth round, the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds), and the interval time within the round is set to a predetermined time (4.5). After the elapse of the second), the special winning opening 2005 is set to be opened for a long time (20 seconds). When the opening of the special winning opening 2005 is started for a short time (0.5 seconds) as the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 in the fifteenth round, the sorting piece 2415 is started for a short time (0.2 seconds). Then, when the long winning opening 2005 is started to be opened for a long time (20 seconds), the distributing piece 2415 starts to be operated for a long time (10 seconds), and during the operation period of the distributing pieces 2415, the second receiving port 2008 is started. Is set so that the game ball B can be accepted. In addition, as a state setting schedule of the second reception port 2008 in the fifteenth round, a valid state (a state in which the game state is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state due to the reception of the game ball B in the second reception port 2008). ) Is set to

  On the other hand, in the 15R big hit gaming state B of this example, the operation schedule of the special winning opening 2005 in the fifteenth round is set so that the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 second). When the opening of the special winning opening 2005 is started for a short time (0.5 seconds) as the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 in the fifteenth round, the sorting piece 2415 is started for a short time (0.2 seconds). The game ball B is set to be able to be received in the second receiving port 2008 during the operation of the sorting piece 2415. In addition, as a state setting schedule of the second reception port 2008 in the fifteenth round, a valid state (a state in which the game state is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state due to the reception of the game ball B in the second reception port 2008). ) Is set to

  As described above, both the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B are valid in the fifteenth round (when the gaming ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008, the state becomes the high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends). However, in the 15R jackpot gaming state A, the large winning opening 2005 in the 15th round is opened for a long time (20 seconds) when the second opening is performed. It is extremely easy to accept the game ball B, and furthermore, the sorting piece 2415 is operated for a long time (10 seconds) during a period in which the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (20 seconds). It is extremely easy to distribute (accept) the accepted game ball B to the second entrance 2008. As described above, in the 15R big hit gaming state A, since the probability that the game ball B is accepted in the second entrance 2008 in the 15th round set to the valid state is extremely high, the state is controlled to the high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends. The probability of doing so is also extremely high. On the other hand, in the 15R jackpot gaming state B, since the special winning opening 2005 is only opened for a short time (0.5 seconds) in the fifteenth round, it is extremely difficult to receive the game ball B in the special winning opening 2005. Since the sorting piece 2415 is only operated for a short time (0.2 seconds) during the period in which the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds), the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 is the second. It is extremely difficult to be distributed (accepted) to the reception port 2008. As described above, in the 15R jackpot gaming state B, since the probability that the gaming ball B is accepted in the second reception port 2008 in the 15th round set to the valid state is extremely low, the state is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The probability of doing so is extremely low.

  The operation schedule of the distributing piece 2415 is such that the distributing piece 2415 is operated for a short time (0.2 seconds), and after a predetermined time (4.8 seconds) elapses, the distributing piece 2415 is opened for a long time (10 seconds). Second), and when the fifteenth round in the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B starts, the operation of such a distributing piece 2415 is performed. Schedule to start. In this way, by setting the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 to a single operation schedule, the data amount related to the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 is prevented from increasing as much as possible.

  In the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B of the present example, the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (20 seconds) as the operation schedule of the large winning opening 2005 in each of the 1st to 14th rounds. It is set as follows. In addition, as an operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 in each of the 1st to 14th rounds, the sorting piece 2415 is not operated, and during the period, the game ball B is placed not in the second receiving port 2008 but in the first receiving port 2007. Is set to be accepted. In addition, as a state setting schedule of the second reception port 2008 in each of the 1st to 14th rounds, an invalid state (in principle, the game ball B is not accepted in the second reception port 2008 and after the big hit game state ends) (A state in which control is not performed to the high probability state). In this way, in both the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, in the 1st to 14th rounds, the game balls B are distributed to the second receiving entrance 2008 when the big winning opening 2005 is opened as in the 15th round. Without playing the game whether or not (accepted), simply play the game whether or not the game ball B is accepted when the big winning opening 2005 is opened.

  In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. In the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the determination values is set to be different from that in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, and the determination ratio of each big hit is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 181 (B), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, of the 15R jackpot A and the 15R jackpot B, the 15R jackpot A (15 rounds) that is relatively advantageous to the player Distribution of 50 judgment values for the gaming ball B having a high probability of receiving the game ball B in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state of the eyes and a high probability of controlling to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state) Is set, the 15R jackpot B which is relatively disadvantageous to the player (the probability that the game ball B is accepted in the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round is low, and the jackpot game state ends 50 determination values are set for a large hit that has a low probability of being later controlled to a high probability state. On the other hand, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, among the 15R jackpot A and the 15R jackpot B, 65 determination values are set for 15R jackpot A which is relatively advantageous to the player. On the other hand, 35 determination values are assigned to the 15R jackpot B relatively disadvantageous to the player. As described above, at the time of the big hit on the first special symbol side, since either the 15R big hit A or 15R big hit B having different degrees of advantage of the player is determined, what kind of big hit is determined at the time of the first big hit is determined. Can be noticed. Further, in the time-saving state controlled after the end of the big hit game state, a game on the second special symbol side (a game that allows the game ball B to enter the second starting port 2004) is performed. At the time of the big hit on the symbol side, since the 15R big hit game A is determined with a higher probability than at the time of the big hit on the first special symbol side, it is possible to pay attention to how much a prize ball amount can be obtained at the time of extended play. it can. Therefore, since the game characteristics change between the time of the first big hit and the time of the extended holiday, the game is not monotonous.

  When the type of the big hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of the big hit is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the 15R jackpot A is determined, the 15R jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and when the 15R jackpot B is determined, the 15R jackpot B symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when the 15R big hit A is determined as the big hit symbol, the 15R big hit A symbol is determined as the big hit symbol.

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed, as a process of step S125, the lottery result (one of the jackpot type, the reach loss, and the loss is instructed (the state of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is changed). The determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the instruction may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, thereafter, as the process of step S126, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-described first variation pattern setting process (step S82), this process is ended. The peripheral control IC 1510a starts the variation display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command, and stops and displays in the order of the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → the middle decorative symbol. Display control of the effect display device 1600 as described above.

  Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is in a state of stopping the change (stop symbol) from the received determination result notification command in the form of a big hit related to the first special symbol. If the jackpot A is specified, it is determined to be a 15R jackpot A symbol (combination of the same decorative symbols), and if the jackpot B is specified, it is determined to be a 15R jackpot B symbol (common to the 15R jackpot A symbol). When the fluctuation time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the reach effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600. As described above, when the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped at any one of the 15R jackpot A symbol and the 15R jackpot B symbol, it can be determined that the decorative symbol is a big hit from the stop symbol. However, since a common symbol is used as the 15R jackpot A symbol and the 15R jackpot B symbol, either the 15R jackpot A or the 15R jackpot B cannot be determined.

  Further, the peripheral control IC 1510a, as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600, when the loss of reach is specified from the received determination result notification command, the unlock symbol with the reach. (Combinations of decorative designs that are not the same. However, if the decorative patterns on the left and right are the same), if a loss is specified, a loose design without a reach (a combination of decorative designs that are not the same. However, decorative patterns on the left and right. Are determined to be different), and when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600.

  FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 183, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag If it has been performed (step S141), the type of the jackpot determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and the change pattern table (not shown) at the time of the jackpot according to the current game state are selected (step S141). If the reach flag has been set (step S143), a reach variation pattern table (not shown) according to the current game state is selected (step S144), and both the big hit flag and the reach flag are set. If it is not set, that is, if it is a normal loss (a loss without performing the reach effect), It is to select a change pattern table (not shown) when (step S145).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S146). The variable pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S147). Further, the main control MPU sets the fluctuation time set in correspondence with the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S148). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 for the fluctuation time determined in this way.

  Note that a plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is included in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table. The variable random numbers are stored in association with each other. Thus, the main control MPU selects the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process from among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. Is obtained from the table, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of the present example, it is set so as to determine the type of the mode of the reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. . For example, among the reach effects, the super reach effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the jackpot gaming state is increased.

  When the first special symbol variation display control is started, the first special symbol process flag is set so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) as the process of step S149. At the time of updating, this processing ends.

  In this example, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second at the time of working hours is associated with the above-mentioned special symbol random numbers (the first special symbol and the second special symbol). At the time of working hours, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is set in such a manner that the fluctuation time information of the special symbol set to about 12 seconds is associated with the above-mentioned special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol). In other words, the variation pattern at the time of out-of-office selected during the time reduction is such that the time required for the variation display control of the special symbol is extremely short as compared to the variation pattern at the time of out-of-time selection during non-time reduction. Symbol fluctuation time information is set.

  FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol change process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 184, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first executes step S171. In the process (1), the variation timer for setting the variation time according to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is decremented by one. Then, when the variable time timer is 0, that is, when it is determined that the lottery variable time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process is ended.

  FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 185, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first executes step S181. As the processing of the above, while performing display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing derivation and display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the counter value of the time-saving counter in which the time-saving flag is set and the number of continuations of the time-saving state is set is “0”. (Step S183). If the counter value is not "0", after counting down the time-saving counter (step S184), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short-time counter is "0" (step S185). . If the counter value is "0", the time saving flag is reset, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset (step S186). When the counter value of the time-saving counter is determined to be “0” in the processing of step S183, or when the time-saving counter is determined to be not “0” in the processing of step S185, At this point, the process proceeds to the process of step S187.

  When the big hit flag is set (step S187), a big hit start command indicating that a big hit game state is started is set (step S188), and a big hit game state is started (a big hit round start command is set). The waiting time (period for displaying the start of the big hit game state) until the game is completed is set in the interval timer (step S189). Then, if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset. If the time reduction flag is set, the time reduction flag is reset. If it is not "0", after resetting the counter value (returning to "0"), a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set (step S190), and the first special symbol process is performed. When the flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value (step S191), the process ends.

  The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B). In step S188, a big hit start command (15R big hit A start command, 15R big hit B start command) according to the type of big hit is set. As a result, an effect corresponding to the type of the big hit indicated by the big hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

  FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S39).

  In the above step S189, the standby time until the big hit gaming state is started is set in the interval timer. However, in the processing in step S401, after the standby time set in this interval timer has elapsed, FIG. As shown in the figure, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening 2005 and is enabled in the fifteenth round. (The state in which the state is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the game) (S402) In addition to controlling the drive of the sorting piece 2415 so that it can be sorted, it is effective in the 15th round. Performing second receiving opening and closing process of monitoring whether the second receiving port 2008 gaming ball B is received in state (step S403), in sequence.

  FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening opening / closing process (step S402).

  If it is determined in the process of step S411 that the special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the special winning opening 2005 as shown in FIG. When a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds for long-time opening and 0.5 seconds for short-time opening) has elapsed from the opening state of the special winning opening 2005 according to the operation schedule (step S412), or When the game balls B have won the maximum winning number (for example, 9) in the open special winning opening 2005 (step S413), the open special winning opening 2005 is controlled to be closed (step S414). If it is determined that the current round is to be ended by controlling the special winning opening 2005 to the closed state (step S415), the type of the jackpot and the current number of rounds are transmitted as commands to the peripheral control board 1510. Is set (Step S416), and the routine goes to Step S428.

  If it is determined in the process of step S411 that the special winning opening 2005 is in the closed state, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the special winning opening 2005 as shown in FIG. When the timing for opening the special winning opening 2005 according to the operation schedule is reached (step S417), it is determined that a new round is to be started by controlling the special winning opening 2005 to the open state. (Step S418), a jackpot round start command corresponding to the type of jackpot and the new number of rounds is set as a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S419). When it is determined that it is time to set the valid state flag in accordance with the state setting schedule of the second entrance 2008, that is, the 15th round of the 1st to 15th rounds in which the special winning opening 2005 is opened If it is the start time (step S420), the valid state flag is set (step S421). If the valid state flag is set at the start of the fifteenth round in step S420, it is necessary to reset the valid state flag at the end of the fifteenth round. Then, the special winning opening 2005 in the closed state or the special winning opening 2005 is controlled to the open state (step S422), and the process proceeds to step S428. If it is determined that a new round is not to be started by controlling the special winning opening 2005 to be in the open state (such as opening the second round in the same round) (step S418), or the valid state flag is set. If it is determined that it is not the time to set (when it is not the start of the fifteenth round) (step S420), the special winning opening 2005 in the closed state is controlled to the open state (step S422), and the step S428 is performed. Move to As a result, the effect according to the type of the jackpot designated by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command and the current number of rounds can be executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

  Note that the valid state flag indicates that the state is set to a valid state (a state in which the gaming ball B is received in the second reception port 2008 and the state is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state). It is a flag to indicate. In the fifteenth round of the first to fifteenth rounds in which the special winning opening 2005 is opened, the game balls B received in the special winning opening 2005 in the second receiving opening / closing process (step S403) described later are transferred to the first receiving opening 2007. Alternatively, by controlling the drive of the sorting piece 2415 to be distributed to any one of the second reception ports 2008, the game balls B can be received in the second reception port 2008 and set to an effective state.

  If it is determined in the processing of step S428 that the game ball B has been received in the special winning opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 187, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 The special winning entrance ball entry command is set as the command transmitted to 1510 (step S429), and this processing ends. Accordingly, when the special winning opening ball entry command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, an effect according to the reception of the game ball B to the special winning opening 2005 is provided by the effect display device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker, and the like. Can be performed.

  If it is determined in the process of step S417 that it is not the timing to open the special winning opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 187, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets When all rounds are completed by repeating the open state and the closed state of the winning opening 2005 (step S423), the big hit execution flag is reset (step S424). Then, when it is determined that the later-described second entrance passage flag is set (step S425), the high probability flag is set (step S426), the time reduction flag is set, and the counter value of the time reduction counter is set. When an initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of continuations of the time saving state (step S427), this processing ends. When it is determined that the second reception passage flag is not set (step S425), the time saving flag is set without setting the high probability flag and the time saving state is set to the counter value of the time saving number counter. When an initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of continuations of (step S427), this processing ends. As described above, when it is determined that the second reception passage flag is set (the game ball B is received in the second reception 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round), the high probability flag is set. And the time reduction flag is set to control the state to the high probability time reduction state, but the second reception passage flag is not set (the game ball B cannot be received in the second reception 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round) When it is determined that the time saving flag has been set, only the time saving flag is set and the state is controlled to the low probability time saving state.

  FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second reception opening / closing process (step S403).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S431 that the second receiving port 2008 is in the open state (the state in which the game balls B are distributed to the second receiving port 2008 side by the sorting piece 2415), FIG. As shown in the figure, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 operates in accordance with the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 from the open state of the second reception port 2008 for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds when the second open port 2008 is opened for a long time). When 0.2 seconds have elapsed during the short-time opening (step S423), or when the current round (the 15th round) is to be ended by controlling the special winning opening 2005 to the closed state (step S423). S433), the second receiving port 2008 in the open state is closed (the game ball B is distributed to the first receiving port 2007 side by the sorting piece 2415). Controlled to be state) (step S434).

  If it is determined in the process of step S431 that the second receiving port 2008 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 188, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sends the sorting piece According to the operation schedule of 2415, when it is time to open the second reception port 2008 (step S435), the second reception port 2008 in the closed state is controlled to the open state (step S436).

  Next, when it is determined in the processing of step S437 that the game ball B has been received in the second receiving port 2008 in the open state, as shown in FIG. 188, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 Determines whether the game ball B has been received in the second reception port 2008 during the valid state in the fifteenth round while the valid state flag is set (step S438). Then, when it is determined that the game ball B has been received in the second reception port 2008 during the valid state in the fifteenth round (step S438), the second ball is received during the valid state in the fifteenth round. If the second entrance passage flag indicating that the game ball B has been accepted is not set at the entrance 2008 (step S439), the second entrance passage flag is set (step S440), and the peripheral control board 1510 is set. When the second reception pass command is set as the command to be transmitted (step S411), this processing ends. As described above, as long as the game ball B is not accepted in the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the fifteenth round, the second entrance passage flag is not set, and the high probability flag is set in step S426. Is not set, there is no control to the high probability state after the big hit game state ends. Further, when the second entrance passage command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, an effect according to the reception of the game ball B into the second entrance 2008 is produced by the effect display device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker and the like. Can be performed.

  FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary symbol process (step S15).

  Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 is in the ON state and that the game ball B has passed to the gate section 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs a gate section passing process such as acquiring the ordinary random number of the ordinary symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the ordinary symbol holding storage area of the RAM as the process of step S802. Execute.

  Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. The ordinary random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and based on the read ordinary random number, a normal symbol normal process in which a lottery process for a display mode when the variation control of the ordinary symbol is stopped is performed (step S803).
2. Ordinary symbol variation time determination process (step S804) in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the ordinary symbol variation random number.
3. Ordinary symbol variation process of waiting until the variation display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S805).
4. The normal symbol fluctuation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process on the display mode when the normal symbol fluctuation control is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Ordinary symbol stop processing to stop variable display of symbols (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped becomes a mode suggesting “per-universal”, the second starting port door 2411 rotates to play the game to the second starting port 2004. Normal electric accessory opening processing for executing processing for enabling control of acceptance of ball B (step S807)

  The ordinary symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the ordinary symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the above-described process of step S1 (see FIG. 173).

  FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate section passing process (step S802).

  Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 is in the ON state and that the game ball B has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. 190, The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains, from the RAM of the main control MPU, a counter value obtained by the ordinary reserved number counter as the process of step S811. Then, based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the reserved number of the ordinary symbols is the maximum value “4”.

  In the process of step S811, if it is determined that the number of reserved ordinary symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed in order to newly set the variable display control of the ordinary symbols to the suspended state. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S812, the ordinary reservation number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as the processing of step S813, the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned ordinary figure variable random number are acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter. Then, as a process of step S814, each of the random numbers thus obtained is stored in a normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal holding number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU.

  However, when it is determined in the process of step S811 that the number of reserved ordinary symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S812 to S814, the above-mentioned variable display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly put on hold.

  It should be noted that the gate portion passage processing (step S802) may be performed as another example described below. For example, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 is in the ON state and that the game ball B has passed to the gate unit 2003, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 The ordinary random number and the general variable random number are obtained from the random number counter and stored in the temporary storage area. Thereafter, the counter value of the above-mentioned ordinary reserved number counter is obtained from the RAM of the main control MPU, and it is determined whether or not the retained number of ordinary symbols is the maximum value “4” based on this counter value. Do. If it is determined that the number of stored ordinary symbols is not the maximum value, the ordinary reserved number counter is counted up (addition of 1) so that the variable display control of the ordinary symbols is newly held. Then, the previously-obtained ordinary random number and the ordinary figure variable random number (the ordinary random number and the ordinary figure variable random number stored in the provisional storage area) are stored in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. Is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value of the above normal hold number counter. On the other hand, as a result of acquiring the counter value of the ordinary pending number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU, when it is determined that this counter value is its maximum value of “4” (the reserved storage number of the ordinary symbol is the In the case of the maximum value), the previously acquired ordinary random number and the ordinary figure variable random number are discarded without being stored in the ordinary symbol holding storage area, and the acquired ordinary symbol change display control is newly performed. It may be configured not to be suspended.

  FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal processing (step S803).

  When the ordinary symbol process flag indicates that the ordinary symbol normal processing is to be performed, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the ordinary symbol in the suspended state based on the counter value of the ordinary suspended number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is the variable display control of the ordinary symbol in the suspended state, then as the process of step S822, the ordinary symbol stored in the ordinary symbol retaining storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is described. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, ordinary random number, ordinary figure variable random number) related to the display mode of the symbol is read from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, the normal holding number counter is counted down, and when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stopped. Are shifted in a first-in first-out manner (first-in first-out).

  Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted in accordance with the passage of the game ball B to the gate section 2003 are stored in the first (earliest) area. Store in order. When the random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, the random number extracted to the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area When the start condition of the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out, and the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage is performed. Various random numbers stored in the area are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. Thereby, the order in which the fluctuation display control of the ordinary symbols is suspended is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the fluctuation display control is sequentially released from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, if the current game state is the time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state) (step S826), the time reduction time ordinary drawing hit determination table (not shown). ) Is selected (step S826), and if the current gaming state is the non-time reduction state (low-probability non-time reduction state) (step S825), a non-time-saving time-of-day map hit determination table (not shown) is selected (step S826). S827), and compares the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table with the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol ordinary process (step S828).

  In addition, the normal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and is used when the game state is a time reduction (low probability time reduction state, high probability time reduction state). A non-working time non-working time state (low-probability non-working time state). Then, in the time saving time universal figure hit determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random numbers, all of the 251 types of ordinary random numbers match the universal figure hit determination value indicating that the winning has been achieved. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to coincide with a deviation determination value in a general figure indicating a deviation. As described above, when the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003 during the working hours, the game is always won per ordinary drawing, and the second starting port door 2411 rotates to move to the second starting port 2004. Of the game ball B is controlled.

  In addition, in the non-working time general map hit determination table referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, it is found that all of the 251 types of normal random numbers match the general map hit determination value indicating that the general map random was won. However, the above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the out-of-position figure determination value indicating that the out-of-position figure is out of place. As described above, in non-working hours, even if the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, the ball is not won per ordinary drawing, so that the second starting port door 2411 is rotated and the There is no control to allow the game ball B to be accepted into the second starting port 2004.

  When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected general symbol hit determination table with the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal process, and determines that the normal symbol hit is determined (step S829). ), After setting a general symbol hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the general symbol (step S830), the general symbol as a mode (normal symbol stop symbol) when the normal symbol fluctuation control is stopped. The symbol is determined (step S831). On the other hand, when the selected normal symbol hit determination table is compared with the ordinary random number read out in step S822 of the ordinary symbol ordinary processing, if it is determined that the symbol is a loss, the variation of the ordinary symbol is determined. A non-normal symbol is determined as a mode at the time of control stop (ordinary symbol stop symbol) (step S832). After that, when the above-described ordinary symbol process flag is updated (step S833) so as to proceed to the ordinary symbol variation time determination process (step S804), this process is ended.

  In this example, in the control of the time saving state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 251/251, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is always a hit, and the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is extremely long. To a short predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). Then, when the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is a hit, the second starting port 2004 is controlled to be opened and closed for an extremely long predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds). . That is, during the control of the time saving state, the probability that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is a hit is extremely high, the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is constant and short, and the open state of the second start port 2004 is opened. It is much easier for the second starting port 2004 to win the game ball B due to the long time, etc., and it is more efficient to aim the second starting port 2004 at the second starting port 2004 than at the first starting port 2002. B can be won. In the control of the non-time saving state, it is assumed that the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 0/251, and that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol does not always win, and that the aim is the second starting port 2004. Also, the game ball B cannot be won in the second starting port 2004.

  As described above, during the control in the non-time saving state, the game ball B cannot be won in the second starting port 2004 even if the second starting port 2004 is aimed at. Must be fired (so-called “left-handed”) aiming at the left side of the center role item 2500 so that the game ball B wins. In the game area 5a on the left side of the center role item 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B is placed on the obstacle nail. By contacting with N, the game ball B is given various movements and flows down. Therefore, even if the player plays the game ball B on the left side of the center role item 2500 aiming at the first starting port 2002, it does not always win the first starting port 2002 and wins the first starting port 2002. The game ball B that has not been played is discharged to the outside from an out port 1008 provided at the lower center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a.

  On the other hand, during the control of the time saving state, it is possible to make the game ball B win more efficiently by aiming at the second starting port 2004 than at the first starting port 2002. The game ball B must be fired (so-called “right-handed”) aiming at the right side of the center role 2500 so that the ball B wins. Also, due to the structure of the game board 5, when the second starting port 2004 is opened, when the game ball B is driven into the right side of the center role item 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2004, the gate portion 2003 is set. The passing game ball B wins the second starting port 2004 with an extremely high probability. For this reason, during the control of the time reduction state, the game ball B hit into the right side of the center role item 2500 is hardly wasted (is discharged to the outside from the out port 1008), and the control of the non-time reduction state is performed. As compared with the first starting port 2002 inside, the game ball B comes to the second starting port 2004 extremely efficiently.

  In addition, during the control of the time saving state, in addition to the structure of the game board 5, the probability of the lottery result of the ordinary symbol being a hit when passing through the gate portion 2003 is extremely high. The time required for the control is constant and short, and the opening time of the second start port 2004 is long, so that the game ball B can easily win the second start port 2004. When the game ball B wins, the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol is set to about 1 second, which is extremely shorter than the range of 10 to 120 seconds during the control in the non-time saving state. The special symbol change display control (suspension of the special symbol change display control) can be performed. In other words, when the time saving state is controlled after the big hitting game state ends, the game ball B is driven into the right side of the center role 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2004, so that the big hit is regained in a short time. Thus, it is possible to control the big hit game state and expect to obtain many game balls B. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of the game balls B paid out by winning the game balls B to the second starting port 2004 is set to one. Even if the prize of the ball B occurs frequently, it is possible to reduce the burden on the gaming hall while increasing the interest of the player.

[11. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for control performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 192, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a performs an initial setting process (step S501). In the initial setting process, for example, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T has been set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control IC 1510a generates an interrupt every time 2 ms elapses, and executes a 2 ms regular process. In the 2 ms steady-state process, a process of counting up the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter becomes 8, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, the 16 ms elapsed The flag T is set, and a process of resetting (clearing) the 16 ms progress monitoring counter to 0 is executed. As described above, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the normal 2 ms process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and the 16 ms steady processing is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 ms regular process, a process of controlling the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like is executed based on the command received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 ms regular process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T has not been set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is "0"), the loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 193 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the 16 ms regular process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms regular process, the peripheral control IC 1510a executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis processing in step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the variation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first variation pattern setting process, a process corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second variation pattern setting process)) is performed. Based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by being set, the control processing related to the effect display device 1600 is executed.

  In the sound control process of step S603, a control process related to a speaker or the like is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, a control process related to the lamp / LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process in step S605, a process of transmitting a lighting signal of a lamp / LED to the effect drive board 1720 and the like are executed. In the random number updating process of step S606, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) (for example, random numbers used for holding prefetch-related effects) is executed.

  Note that the processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 ms regular processing ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady-state process to the end of the 16 ms steady-state process, the 16 ms steady-state process is started immediately after the start of the 16 ms steady-state process (the command of step S601). Do not execute (from analysis processing). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady processing, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady processing, the 16 ms steady processing is performed. To start.

  Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms regular process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing and the 16 ms steady processing in the sub-main processing.

[12. Production related to pending changes]
In the present embodiment, based on the number-of-holds designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the effect display device 1600 performs a hold display before digestion (pre-digestion hold display). Then, a hold display after digestion (holding display after digestion) is executed in the decoration body 3511. That is, as the “hold display” of the present embodiment, “pre-digest hold display” indicating a pre-digestion hold that has not yet been provided for a game, and “digestion hold” indicating a digested hold currently being provided for a game. After the digestion hold display is executed, after the start of the display of the decoration design (variable display of the special design), the hold display is continuously displayed. It can be used for productions that suggest the degree of big hit expectation.

  Specifically, when the game ball is won in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (start condition is satisfied), the hold display (hold storage) specified by the hold number designation command is performed. As the number increases, one pre-digestion hold display (pre-digestion hold display) is additionally displayed on the effect display device 1600. On the other hand, when the decoration display (variable display of the special symbol) based on the hold display is started (start condition is satisfied) and one hold display before the digestion is completed, the hold specified by the number-of-reservations designation command is executed. In order to reduce the number (storage storage number) by one, to erase one pre-digestion hold display in the effect display device 1600, and to display the digestion target hold display as a post-digestion hold display, the decorative body body The light emission decoration 3511 is to be updated. In the present embodiment, as the hold display before digestion, a circular display body (see FIG. 194) is displayed and represented in a hold display area set above the display area of the effect display device 1600. As the hold display after digestion, the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body 3511 is displayed by light-emitting display in a predetermined color. Regarding the circular display body (see FIG. 194) displayed in the hold display area, since the color of the decorated part is expressed by a plurality of antique-like colors, the color of the part excluding the decorated part is displayed. Is one of four colors.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold display is changed from the execution of the hold display before the digestion is executed as the hold display to the end of the execution of the hold display after the digestion, so that the display based on the hold display is performed. It is possible to execute a hold announcement effect indicating the degree of expectation of the big hit with respect to the variation display of the decorative symbol (the variation display of the special symbol).

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 1310 transmits a reserved number designation command and a pre-judgment command based on a winning of a game ball in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (start condition is satisfied). . When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a receives the hold number designation command and the advance determination command in the command analysis process of step S601, the hold notice determination table corresponding to those commands, that is, the hold specified by the hold number designation command A hold advance notice determination table corresponding to the number (holding storage number) and the advance determination information (big hit, reach loss, loss, etc.) specified from the advance determination command is selected, and the determination value set in the hold advance determination table is read out. A hold change pattern (hold change scenario) set in the hold notice determination table is determined by comparing the random number for the hold notice determination, and a hold announcement effect is performed based on the determined hold change pattern. In the suspension notice determination table, the distribution of the determination value for each suspension change pattern differs for each advance determination information (big hit, reach loss, loss, etc.) specified from the preliminary determination command, and the appearance rate of each suspension change pattern Are different.

  As described above, in the hold announcement effect, during the display period from when the hold display before digestion is displayed on the effect display device 1600 to when the hold display changes to hold after digestion and ends, the hold change pattern (hold change scenario) is displayed. ), The display mode of the hold display is updated, and each time the display of the decoration design (the display of the change of the special symbol) based on the hold display different from the hold display is started (the start condition is satisfied), The display mode of the display can be changed.

  Next, the suspension notice determination table will be described. In the suspension notice determination table, a plurality of types of suspension change patterns are set for each suspension number (retention storage number) specified from the suspension number designation command, and are stored in the control ROM 1510b of the peripheral control board 1510. As the hold notice determination table, a hold notice determination table 1 used when hold 1 is lit (number of hold before digestion = 1), a hold notice determination table 2 used when hold 2 is lit (number of hold before digestion = 2), hold There are provided a reservation notice determination table 3 to be used when lighting 3 (the number of reservations before digestion = 3) and a reservation notice determination table 4 to be used when the reservation 4 is lit (number of reservations before digestion = 4). Each of these pending notice determination tables 1 to 4 defines a plurality of types of pending change patterns. Each of these pending change patterns includes the effect display device 1600 and the decorative body 3511 each time the pending display is exhausted. How the display mode of the hold display changes (what display mode changes and at what timing) is set.

  For example, the hold notice determination table 1 used when the hold 1 is turned on (the number of hold before digestion = 1) includes a hold change pattern 1A in which the display mode of the hold display on the effect display device 1600 does not change from the initial state, When the hold display in the effect display device 1600 is digested and the hold display after digestion is displayed on the decorative body main body 3511, a change-on-hold pattern 1B that changes only once from the initial mode is provided. Further, the hold notice determination table 2 used when the hold 2 is turned on (the number of hold before digestion = 2) includes a hold change pattern 2A in which the display mode of the hold display on the effect display device 1600 is digested without changing from the initial state. When the pre-digestion reservation is changed from the pre-digestion reservation to the post-digestion reservation, the reservation change pattern 2B in which the mode of the reservation display changes only once, and when the pre-digestion reservation number = 2 changes to the pre-digestion reservation number = 1 state And the hold change pattern 2C in which the hold display mode changes only once, and the hold display mode changes when the number of reserves before digestion = 2 changes from the state of reserve before digestion = 1 to the state of hold before digestion. And a hold change pattern 2D or the like in which the mode of the hold display further changes when changing from hold to digestion hold. Similarly, the hold advance notice determination table 3 used when the hold 3 is turned on (number of reserves before digestion = 3) and the hold advance notice determination table 4 used when the hold 4 is lit (number of reserves before digestion = 4) are also displayed on hold. There are provided a plurality of hold change patterns in which the display mode of the hold display is changed by a predetermined number of times before the user digests.

  Further, as the display mode (including the initial display mode) of the hold display set in the hold change pattern, four display modes are set such that the hold display is displayed in any one of white (basic color), blue, yellow, and red. A display mode is prepared. Then, when determining the hold change pattern from the hold notice determination table, as a result of the display mode of the hold display changing to the end, the big hit expectation increases in the order of white (basic color) → blue → yellow → red. It is set as follows. In other words, when the lottery result is specified as the jackpot as the preliminary determination information, a hold change pattern that is a display mode (for example, red) with a high expectation of the jackpot is determined with a high probability as the final hold display mode. When the lottery result is identified as information (losing, reaching loss) as information, the hold change pattern that becomes a display mode (for example, white) with a low jackpot expectation as the final hold display mode is determined with a high probability. When the display mode of the final hold display is displayed in a display mode having a high jackpot expectation, the player's expectation for the jackpot game is increased.

  Note that the hold change pattern is such that the display form of the hold display does not change in the reverse order of white → blue → yellow → red, and the display form of the hold display is maintained when the hold display is consumed. Or the next display mode is set to a display mode with a high expectation of big hits. For this reason, even if the display mode of the hold display is displayed in the display mode with a low jackpot expectation, there is a possibility that the display mode changes to the display mode with the high jackpot expectation when the hold display is exhausted. Aspects can be brought to the attention with hope.

  Also, in the hold change pattern, it is not necessary to change the display mode of the hold display in white (basic color) in the order of blue → yellow → red after the display mode is displayed in white (basic color). (For example, starting from the beginning with a hold change pattern when Hold 1 is turned on in yellow) or skipping one or more display modes and changing to the next display mode (for example, a hold change pattern when Hold 2 is turned on) Is changed from white (basic color) to red). For this reason, even if the opportunity (the number of holdings) for changing the display mode of the hold display is small, the display mode of the hold display can be displayed in a display mode with a high jackpot expectation. Further, even if the display mode of the hold display is displayed in the display mode with a low jackpot expectation, it is not possible to predict which display mode the next display mode will change to, and the display mode of the hold display will be completed to the end. We can draw attention with expectation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a to output various sound effects corresponding to the display mode of the hold display after the change. Speakers (for example, the vibration speaker 354 provided on the door frame 3 and the body frame 4, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4, and the like) flow. In the present embodiment, the sound effect is set in advance so as to be different depending on the display mode (color) of the hold display after the change. For example, when the display mode of the hold display after the change is blue, the effect is changed. When the sound effect is output as “Pe” and the display mode of the hold display after the change is yellow, the sound effect is output as a “Pe, Pico” sound effect, and the display mode of the hold display after the change is performed. Is red, a sound effect of "pico-piko" is output.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, white is set in advance as the initial color of the hold display, as described above. This white color is the same color as the white color set as the color of the hold display when the hold change suggestion effect is not performed.

  In addition, the hold notice determination table may determine a special hold change pattern that is a rainbow color as the final hold display mode only when the jackpot is specified as the advance determination information from the advance determination command. By determining such a special hold change pattern, if the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a rainbow color, it is determined that the lottery result will be a big hit when the hold display is consumed, and the big hit game The expectations of players for are increasing.

  In addition, when a loss is specified as advance determination information from a preliminary determination command in the suspension notice determination table, a suspension change pattern that is white (basic color) or blue is determined as a final display mode of suspension display. When the jackpot and the reach are specified as the pre-determination information from the pre-determination command, it is set so that the hold change pattern of yellow or red as the final display mode of the hold display can be determined. For this reason, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in yellow or red, it is determined that at least the reach is performed and the reach effect is executed after the hold display is digested, and the expectation of the player for the big hit game is increased. It has become.

  In the present embodiment, a series of changes until the display mode of the hold display finally changes is determined by determining the hold change pattern when adding the hold display before digestion. As a determination method, when the display of the hold display is started, only the display mode of the hold display at the start and the final display mode of the hold display may be determined. If the display mode of the hold display at the start is different from the display mode of the final hold display, the display mode of the final hold display is at least before the target hold display is consumed. May be displayed, and it may be determined how the display mode of the hold display changes each time a timing at which the display mode of the hold display can change is reached. Even with such a determination method, the display mode of the hold display can be sequentially changed until the hold display on the effect display device 1600 or the decoration body 3511 ends.

  Next, a hold change suggestion effect performed in addition to the hold notice effect will be described. The hold change suggestion effect is an effect that suggests a possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes during the display period of the hold display (pre-digestion hold display, post-digestion hold display). In other words, in the above-described hold announcement effect, during the display period of the hold display, each time the decorative symbol change display (special symbol change display) is started (start condition is satisfied), the hold display is performed based on the hold change pattern. Although the display mode can be changed, a hold change suggestion effect that suggests the possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes at the timing when the display mode of the hold display changes can be executed.

  Specifically, at the time when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts the change display of the decorative symbol (the change display of the special symbol) (start condition is satisfied), the display mode of the hold display changes based on the hold change pattern. Is determined, a hold change suggestion effect determination table corresponding to the determination result is selected, and the determination value set in the hold change suggestion effect determination table is compared with the read random number for hold change suggestion effect determination. By doing so, one suggestion effect pattern is determined from a plurality of suggestion effect patterns set in the pending change suggestion effect determination table.

  In the hold change suggestion effect determination table, a plurality of types of suggestion effect patterns are set, and suggestion effect pattern 1 that does not execute any hold change suggestion effect (only the display mode of the hold display is changed in accordance with the update display by the hold digestion). Effect pattern), a suggestion effect pattern 2 in which a hold change suggestion effect of causing a specific image or the like to appear prior to a change in the display mode of the hold display (a specific character image prior to the change in the display mode of the hold display) And the like, and a pattern for performing an effect that suggests a possibility of change depending on the type of the character image) is set. The pending change suggestion effect determination table is stored in the control ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, in the pending change suggestion effect determination table, the distribution of the judgment values for each of the above suggestion effect patterns is substantially the same, and the appearance rates of the respective pending change suggestion effects are the same, but if the distribution of the judgment values is different, However, the appearance rates of the pending change suggestion effects may be different.

[13. Grayscale production]
Next, as an example of the effect displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control substrate 1510 by various commands from the main control board 1310, the above-described gray scale by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a described above. A grayscale effect in which various image elements displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 with the setting mode expanded will be switched from a full-color image to a grayscale image will be described. Hereinafter, an example of an effect displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 when performing a grayscale effect will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 194 to 196. FIG. 194 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a grayscale effect, FIG. 195 is an explanatory diagram following FIG. 194, and FIG. 196 is an explanatory diagram following FIG. 195. Here, based on various commands from the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 113 based on reception of a game ball to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. Peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a shown in FIG. 171) indicates a pending change suggestion effect without a grayscale effect (preliminary notice effect) and peripheral control IC 1510a of peripheral control substrate 1510 indicates a pending change suggestion effect with a grayscale effect. (Pending notice effect) will be briefly described.

  The grayscale effect is executed by performing a grayscale effect availability lottery at a predetermined time to determine whether or not to perform the grayscale effect, and determining that the grayscale effect is to be performed. Specifically, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether the game ball has won the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (start condition is satisfied), Upon receiving the pre-determination command, the above-mentioned selection of the pending announcement determination table, when the type of the pending change pattern set in the pending announcement determination table and the determination of the suggested effect pattern are determined, regardless of the determination results, A gray-scale production possibility lottery will be conducted. In other words, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the present embodiment can set the execution of the grayscale effect at the same time as the setting of the hold announcement effect and the hold change suggestion effect. It is possible to advance a grayscale effect, or to advance a grayscale effect independently of the various pending change suggestion effects described above. Further, in the present embodiment, the probability that it is determined that any pending change suggestion is to be performed is set to 1/20, whereas the probability that it is determined that the grayscale rendering is determined by the grayscale rendering possibility lottery. Is set to 1/50, and the probability that the grayscale effect is performed in parallel with the pending change suggestion effect is lower than the probability that the grayscale effect is not performed in parallel with the pending change suggestion effect. It is set as follows.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines to perform a grayscale effect in the grayscale effect availability lottery, the CPU sets the grayscale effect flag indicating execution of the grayscale effect to ON, and the main control board 1310 Start the grayscale production when you start the digestion. When the grayscale effect is started, an instruction is given to the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a so that the grayscale setting mode by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is developed, and various image elements displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are displayed. Is a process of switching from a full-color image to a grayscale image and changing all the emission colors of the various LEDs to white when performing the emission control of the various LEDs provided on the door frame 3 including the decorative body 3511 and the game board 5. To start. Since various processes related to the grayscale effect are continuously performed while the grayscale effect flag is set to ON, the process of the grayscale setting mode by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is performed when the grayscale effect flag is set to ON. This is repeatedly performed when each frame is generated during the set period. The end time of the grayscale effect is described in the later-described effect example, but a predetermined end time is set. When the end time comes, the grayscale effect flag is set to OFF and the grayscale effect is set. The production will end.

  In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a randomly determines whether or not to perform a hold change suggestion effect by adding a hold when the gray scale effect is already being performed and the main control board 1310 is holding and exhausting. In the case of performing a pending change suggestion effect, it is set so that a new grayscale effect lottery is not performed. This prevents the grayscale production from being overwritten and unnecessarily extended because the grayscale production is already being performed. This is to prevent the scale effect from being canceled.

  Next, a description will be given of an example of an effect in the case where the pending change suggestion effect and the grayscale effect proceed in parallel, or in the case where the effect proceeds without being parallel. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a of this embodiment starts the progress of the effect displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 based on various commands from the main control board 1310, the CPU instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a. As shown in FIG. 194 (a), a background image 1640 representing the outer space (the earth and the moon) is displayed on the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and the background image 1640 is located in front of the background image 1640. The left decorative symbol 1650a is on the left side of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the middle decorative symbol 1650b is in the center of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the right decorative symbol 1650c is on the right side of the display area of the effect display device 1600. Start the variable display respectively. At this time, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a recognizes that there are two game balls not yet provided for the game (there are two reserve balls), and does not perform the reserve change suggestion effect, Instructing the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the first hold display 1655a having a white color from the upper center of the display area of the effect display device 1600 to the upper right side on the near side of the background image 1640 as the hold display. , And a second hold display 1655b having white color. Also, at this time, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, for example, decorates the decorative body 3511 with white, blue, yellow, or red to emit light, so as to correspond to the current decorative pattern change display. A plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the lower back movable decorative body decorative board 3512 shown in FIG. 130 are controlled.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to display the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c in a variably-displayed manner so that the background image 1640 is translucent. In the embodiment, the left decorative pattern 1650a is from the upper left to the lower left of the display area, the middle decorative pattern 1650b is from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right decorative pattern 1650c is from the upper right to the right of the display area. The display is variably displayed as if the reels were rotating downward.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to stop displaying the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c until the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310 based on the acceptance of the game ball to the player, a hold display is provided for notifying the number of balls that are not yet used for the game.

  For example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to increase the number of reserved balls from two to one by the time the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c are stopped and displayed. If it is recognized that there are three balls, and if it is determined that the holding change suggestion effect is not to be performed with respect to the additional ball that has been added by one ball, the holding display is set to the right of the second holding display 1655b. A third hold display 1655c having white color is displayed. Thus, the three balls of the reserved spheres are, from the upper center of the display area of the effect display device 1600, toward the upper right side, the first reserved display 1655a having white, the second reserved display 1655b having white, and the second having white. The three reserved displays 1655c are displayed in a line.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to further increase the number of reserved balls from three to one until the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c are stopped and displayed. In this case, it is recognized that there are four balls, and in response to the additional ball which is added by one ball, a specific suspension change pattern for changing the final color of the suspension display to red (for example, white → blue → yellow → red → When it is determined that a hold change suggestion effect (effect of suggestion effect pattern 1) according to the hold change pattern corresponding to the change of red is made, a white display is displayed on the right of the third hold display 1655c as a hold display. Is displayed. As a result, the four reserved balls are arranged such that the first reserved display 1655a having white, the second reserved display 1655b having white, and the third having white are arranged from the upper center to the upper right of the display area of the effect display device 1600. The reserved display 1655c and the fourth reserved display 1655d having a white color are displayed in a line. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and then stops and displays the left decorative symbol 1650a at the symbol 1 and stops the middle decorative symbol 1650b at the symbol 2 as shown in FIG. 194 (b). Then, the right decorative symbol 1650c is stopped and displayed at the symbol 3 to inform that it is out of position.

[13-1. Production suggesting pending change without grayscale production]
Subsequently, when performing the effect of suggesting the pending change and not performing the grayscale effect, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to perform the main control board as shown in FIG. 194 (c). In accordance with the reservation digestion by 1310, the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c are variably displayed, and it is recognized that there are four to three balls to be reserved, and this is shown in FIG. 194 (b). The second hold display 1655b to the fourth hold display 1655d are moved one by one to the left, and the first hold display 1655a having white color is displayed from the upper center to the upper right of the display area of the effect display device 1600. Are displayed in a line in the order of the second hold display 1655b having the blue color and the third hold display 1655c having the blue color. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as the third hold display 1655c to perform the hold change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 194 (b). The color of the fourth reserved display 1655d for which red has been determined is changed from white to blue when the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c are variably displayed, and the effect proceeds. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and thereafter, stops and displays the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c, and informs the user of the loss.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to variably display the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c as the main control board 1310 suspends and consumes. Recognizing that there are two to three reserve balls, the second reserve display 1655b and the third reserve display 1655c shown in FIG. 194 (c) are moved one by one to the left, and the effect display device 1600 From the upper center of the display area to the upper right side, the first reserved display 1655a having white and the second reserved display 1655b having yellow are displayed in a line. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as the second reserved display 1655b, and changes the color of the third reserved display 1655c shown in FIG. 194 (c) from blue to yellow. Produce the stage. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and thereafter, stops and displays the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c, and informs the user of the loss.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to variably display the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c as the main control board 1310 suspends and consumes. Recognizing that the number of the reserved balls is one from two, the second reserved display 1655b is moved to the left by one, and the first reserved display having a red color in the upper center of the display area of the effect display device 1600. 1655a is displayed. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as the first hold display 1655a, and changes the color of the above-mentioned second hold display 1655b from yellow to red, and proceeds with the effect. At this time, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as a hold display to increase the number of holds by one to two when the main control board 1310 is holding and using the hold. A second hold display 1655b having a white color is displayed on the right of the first hold display 1655a (here, it is assumed that the lottery of the hold change suggestion effect for the addition of the hold has been lost (the hold change suggestion effect is not performed)). . Thereby, the two balls of the reserved balls are arranged in a line in the order of the first reserved display 1655a having red and the second reserved display 1655b having white from the upper center of the display area of the effect display device 1600 to the upper right. Is displayed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and then stops and displays the left decorative symbol 1650a at the symbol 4 and stops the middle decorative symbol 1650b at the symbol 5, as shown in FIG. Then, the right decorative symbol 1650c is stopped and displayed at the symbol 6 to notify that it is out of position.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and as shown in FIG. 195 (e), the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, 194 and the right decoration pattern 1650c is changed, and it is recognized that there are two to one reserved balls, and the second reserved display 1655b shown in FIG. A first hold display 1655a having white color is displayed in the upper center of the display area of 1600. At this time, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is mounted on the lower back movable decorative body decorative board 3512 shown in FIG. 130 so that the color of the first reserved display 1655a shown in FIG. 194 (d) becomes red. By controlling the plurality of full-color LEDs, the red light emission decoration of the decoration body 3511 is started. In other words, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the hold change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 194 (b), and sets the decorative body as the red color of the fourth hold display 1655d determined as the final color of the hold display. Light emission decoration of 3511 is started.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to stop and display the left decorative symbol 1650a and the right decorative symbol 1650c in the same symbol (symbol 7) as shown in FIG. 195 (f). The reach is formed, and the variable display of the middle decorative pattern 1650b is continued.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to express the outer space (the earth and the moon) in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. 195 (g). The background image 1640 is switched to a background image 1645 in which warp navigation that can move between stars is expressed, and the image reaches the super reach. In this embodiment, since a plurality of types are set in advance as the super reach (the background image is different, and some of them take a long time to evolve to the super reach, while others have a short time. When a reach is formed and evolves into a super-reach, the type of the super-reach corresponds from the background image 1640 in which the outer space (the earth and the moon) is represented in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600. Background images (eg, a representation of the Earth's supply base, a representation of docking to a supply ship, a representation of a lunar base, a representation of escape from a black hole, the approach of a giant meteorite Is displayed, and the one where an encounter with an unidentified ship is expressed.).

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to place the pressing operation unit 303 shown in FIG. 1 in the center of the display area of the effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. A button effect in which the imitated button figure 1647 moves upward is displayed. At this time, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to move the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c toward the lower left side of the display area of the effect display device 1600. The moving image is reduced while moving, and the left decorative symbol 1650a and the right decorative symbol 1650c are stopped and displayed in the same symbol (symbol 7), and the variable display of the middle decorative symbol 1650b is continued. After that, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to stop and display the middle decorative symbol 1650b at the symbol 6, and notifies the user of the loss.

  Here, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to change the left decorative symbol 1650a and the right decorative symbol 1650c as the middle decorative symbol 1650b as shown in FIG. 196 (i). 6), a normal background image 1640 in which outer space (the earth and the moon) is represented from a background image 1645 in which warp navigation capable of moving between stars is represented in the entire display area of the staging display device 1600. (Back to the original normal background image 1640), and the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c stopped and displayed on the lower left side of the display area of the effect display device 1600 are changed to the original position. The display is stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 while being enlarged. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to variably display the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c as the main control board 1310 suspends and exhausts.

  Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to stop and display the middle decorative symbol 1650b with the symbol 7 in FIG. 196 (h), thereby notifying that it is a big hit. Thereafter, a big hit game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state occurs. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a and does not develop into the super reach shown in FIG. 195 (g), the CPU proceeds to the effect shown in FIG. 196 (i). proceed.

[13-2. Production suggesting pending change accompanied by grayscale production]
Returning to FIG. 194, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and as shown in FIG. 194 (b), the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c. Is stopped and then the effect of suggesting a pending change is performed, and when no grayscale effect is accompanied, the effect shown in FIG. 194 (c) is in progress. On the other hand, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to expand the gray scale setting mode when performing the hold change suggestion effect and performing the gray scale effect in parallel. Following 194 (b), as shown in FIG. 194 (r), all the images displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a are grayed with the suspension of the main control board 1310. In addition to the conversion to the scale, when performing the emission control of the various LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 including the decorative body main body 3511, a process of changing all the emission colors of the various LEDs to white is started. Here, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to display the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c converted to gray scale in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Is displayed, and it is recognized that there are four to three reserved balls, and the second reserved display 1655b to the fourth reserved display 1655d shown in FIG. From the upper center to the upper right of the display area of the display device 1600, a first reserved display 1655a having a color obtained by converting white to gray scale, a second reserved display 1655b having a color obtained by converting white to gray scale, and blue Are displayed in a line in the order of the third reserved display 1655c having the color converted to gray scale. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as the third hold display 1655c to perform the hold change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 194 (b). The color of the fourth reserved display 1655d for which red has been determined is rendered with a color that is changed from white to blue and converted to gray scale when the left decorative pattern 1650a, the middle decorative pattern 1650b, and the right decorative pattern 1650c are variably displayed. To progress. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and thereafter, stops and displays the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c, and informs the user of the loss.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to display all the images to be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as the main control board 1310 suspends and exhausts. Convert to grayscale. Here, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to variably display the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Recognizing that there are two to three reserve balls, the second reserve display 1655b and the third reserve display 1655c shown in FIG. 194 (r) are moved one by one to the left and displayed on the effect display device 1600. Displayed in a line from the upper center to the upper right of the area, in the order of a first reserved display 1655a having a color obtained by converting white to gray scale, and a second reserved display 1655b having a color obtained by converting yellow to gray scale. I do. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as the second reserved display 1655b, and changes the color of the third reserved display 1655c shown in FIG. 194 (r) from blue to yellow. The production proceeds with the color converted to grayscale. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and thereafter, stops and displays the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c, and informs the user of the loss.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to display all the images to be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as the main control board 1310 suspends and exhausts. Convert to grayscale. Here, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to variably display the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c, and there are two to one reserved balls. The second hold display 1655b described above is moved to the left by one, and a first hold display 1655a having a color obtained by converting red to gray scale is displayed at the upper center of the display area of the effect display device 1600. I do. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as the first reserved display 1655a, and changes the color of the above-mentioned second reserved display 1655b from yellow to red and converts it to gray scale. The production proceeds. At this time, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as a hold display when the number of holds increases by one while the main control board 1310 is on hold and the number of holds increases to two balls. A second hold display 1655b having a color obtained by converting white to gray scale is displayed on the right side of the first hold display 1655a (here, the lottery of the hold change suggestion effect for the addition of the hold was lost (the hold change suggestion effect was No)). Accordingly, the two reserved balls are the first reserved display 1655a having a color obtained by converting red to gray scale from the upper center to the upper right side of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and white is converted to gray scale. Are displayed in a line in the order of the second reserved display 1655b having the selected color. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and then stops and displays the left decorative symbol 1650a at the symbol 4 and stops the middle decorative symbol 1650b at the symbol 5, as shown in FIG. 194 (s). Then, the right decorative symbol 1650c is stopped and displayed at the symbol 6 to notify that it is out of position.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and as shown in FIG. 194 (t), the effect display device 1600 is generated by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a with the suspension of the main control board 1310. Converts all images displayed in the display area to grayscale. Here, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to variably display the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c, and has two balls to one ball. 194 (s), the second holding display 1655b shown in FIG. 194 (s) is moved by one to the left, and a second color having a color converted from white to gray scale is displayed at the upper center of the display area of the effect display device 1600. 1 Hold display 1655a is displayed. At this time, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the color of the first reserved display 1655a shown in FIG. 194 (s) before conversion to gray scale is red but white. By controlling a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the lower back movable decorative body decorative board 3512 shown in 130, the luminous decoration of the decorative body main body 3511 is started. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a changes the white color of the fourth hold display 1655d determined as the final color of the hold display to white instead of the red in the case of performing the hold change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 194 (b). Light emission decoration of the decoration body 3511 is started.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to stop and display the left decorative symbol 1650a and the right decorative symbol 1650c in the same symbol (symbol 7) as shown in FIG. 195 (u). The reach is formed, and the variable display of the middle decorative pattern 1650b is continued. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and then ends the grayscale effect immediately before the development to the super reach shown in FIG. 195 (g). In the present embodiment, the predetermined timing after the end of the normal reach and before the development to the super reach is set as the end time of the grayscale effect, and the arrival of the individual end times causes the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a to: The grayscale effect flag is turned off, the process of converting all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to grayscale by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is ended, and the pending change illustrated in FIG. In the case where the suggestion effect is performed, the process of changing the fourth hold display 1655d determined as the final color of the hold display to red as the light emission decoration of the decorative body main body 3511 without changing the color to red is ended. In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a ends the process of changing all the emission colors of the various LEDs to white when performing the emission control of the various LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, a plurality of types are set in advance as the super reach (the background image is different, and there are some that take a long time to evolve to the super reach, others that are short, and some When the reach is formed and develops into the super reach, the type of the super reach is obtained from the background image 1640 in which the outer space (the earth and the moon) is expressed in the entire display area of the staging display device 1600. And corresponding background images (e.g., a representation of the Earth's supply base, a representation of docking to a supply ship, a representation of a lunar base, a representation of escape from a black hole, a giant Examples include those that represent the approach of meteorites and those that represent encounters with unidentified ships.) Thus, in the present embodiment, a plurality of times for ending the grayscale effect can be set, and a full-color image that allows the player to identify the color by the time for ending the grayscale effect. The type of the effect image can be made different.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to proceed to the above-described effect of developing into super reach shown in FIG. 196 (g). As a result, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the background image 1645 of the full-color image, the left decorative pattern 1650a of the full-color image, the medium decorative pattern 1650b of the full-color image, the full-color image The right decorative pattern 1650c is switched to the first hold display 1655a having a full-color image of white, and the whole is returned to the original full-color image, and the light-emitting decoration of the decoration body 3511 is changed from the color changed to white to the figure. In the case where the holding change suggestion effect shown in 194 (b) is performed, the fourth holding display 1655d determined as the final color of the holding display is switched to red and returns to the original color. In addition, when all of the luminescent colors of the various LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 proceed to the stage of developing into a super-reach, from the white color until the end of the gray scale stage, the super-reach stage corresponds to the super-reach stage. Luminescence color (full-color luminescence mode).

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to proceed to the button effect shown in FIG. 196 (h), and to the effect shown in FIG. 196 (i). The left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c are variably displayed as the main control board 1310 suspends and digests.

  Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to stop and display the middle decorative symbol 1650b with the symbol 7 in FIG. 196 (h), thereby notifying that it is a big hit. Thereafter, a big hit game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state occurs. In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to perform grayscale rendering if the super reach shown in FIG. 195 (g) is not developed following the above-described FIG. 195 (u). finish. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the process of converting all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to gray scale by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a and the effect of indicating the pending change shown in FIG. 194 (b). In this case, the process of changing the fourth hold display 1655d determined as the final color of the hold display to red as the light emission decoration of the decorative body 3511 instead of red is ended, and the door frame 3 and the game board 5 , The process of changing all the emission colors of the various LEDs provided to the white color to white is ended, and the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is instructed to proceed to the above-described effect shown in FIG. 196 (i).

  As described above, in the hold change suggestion effect for performing the grayscale effect illustrated in FIGS. 194 (r) to 195 (u), the grayscale effect is not performed as all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. 194 (c) to 195 (f) in the effect of suggesting a pending change, in which all images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are converted into gray scales. It is difficult to determine to what color the color has changed (reserved change). Thus, in the grayscale effect, the suggestion of the expected value by the hold display can be hidden.

  194 (r) to 195 (u), in the hold change suggestion effect accompanied by the gray scale effect, all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 show the hold change without the gray scale effect. In the suggested effect, all images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIGS. 194 (c) to 195 (f) are converted to gray scale. Accordingly, in the case where any one of a plurality of predetermined hold change patterns is set and a hold change is performed, even if a hold change is performed using the same hold change pattern, the above-described screen is displayed. In one frame of screen data that defines the image processing, the effect is to be advanced with a full-color image without specifying the grayscale setting mode as the object processing command (that is, without performing the grayscale effect). Depending on the case where the grayscale setting mode is specified as the object processing command in the screen data (that is, the grayscale rendering is performed) and the rendering is promoted by the grayscale image, a different rendering giving a completely different impression to the player can be created. it can.

  When the grayscale effect is finished, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a ends the process of converting all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to grayscale by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and outputs the image shown in FIG. In the case where the hold change suggestion effect shown in b) is performed, the process of changing the fourth hold display 1655d determined as the final color of the hold display to red as the light emission decoration of the decorative body main body 3511 without using the red color is ended. As a result, when proceeding to the effect that evolves to the super reach shown in FIG. 196 (g), the display region of the effect display device 1600 displays the background image 1645 of the full-color image, Switch to the left decorative pattern 1650a of the full-color image, the middle decorative pattern 1650b of the full-color image, the right decorative pattern 1650c of the full-color image, and the first hold display 1655a having the white color of the full-color image, and the whole returns to the original full-color image, The luminous decoration of the decorative body 3511 is a red color of the fourth hold display 1655d determined as the final color of the hold display when the hold change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 194 (b) is performed from the color changed to white. To switch back to the original color. In other words, while the grayscale effect is in progress, the hint of the expected value is hidden by the hold display, whereas in the effect that the grayscale effect ends and the super reach is reached, the expectation by the hold display hidden by the grayscale effect When the value is released, an extremely novel effect of indicating the expected value by the hold display can be advanced.

  195 (t) to 195 (u) shown in FIG. 195 (e), in the pending change suggestion effect of performing a grayscale effect, the decoration with the blue color shown in FIG. 195 (e) in the pending change suggestion effect of not performing the grayscale effect. Since the luminous decoration of the body main body 3511 and the luminous decoration of the decorative body main body 3511 in yellow shown in FIG. 195 (f) are all changed to white to start the luminous decoration of the decorative body main body 3511, the decoration is performed. It is difficult to determine the color of the hold display based on the color of the light emission decoration of the body main body 3511. This makes it possible to hide the suggestion of the expected value due to the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body 3511 in the grayscale effect.

  When the color of the hold display is changed, sound effects corresponding to the color of the hold display are output from various speakers (for example, a vibration speaker 354 provided on the door frame 3 or the body frame 4, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker). The speaker 464 and the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4) allow the player to listen to and compare what color the hold display has changed from what color by the sound effect. Can be enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed even in a grayscale effect.

  194 (r) to 195 (u), in the pending change suggestion effect of performing a grayscale effect, all images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are displayed as a pending change in which the grayscale effect is not performed. Since all images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIGS. 194 (c) to 195 (f) in the suggested effect are converted to gray scale, the image data converted to gray scale is converted to gray scale. By eliminating the need to previously store the data in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 shown in FIG. 171, it is possible to increase the effect variation without increasing the capacity of the image data.

[14. About volume control]
Next, the volume control function mounted on the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described below.

  First, as the volume control means that can be operated by the game management side (the hall side) (cannot be operated by the player side), the peripheral control board 1510 stores a main set value of the volume in predetermined steps (for example, large, medium, small). ) Is provided. When the game management side (hall side) operates the volume adjustment switch 1510d, a volume adjustment operation signal is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a is based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and has a main set value of the volume according to the input volume adjustment operation signal. An effect sound can be output from speakers such as 354, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4.

  Further, as a sound volume adjusting means that can be operated by the player, the effect operation unit 300 sets a sub-set value of the sound volume in a predetermined stage (for example, 6 stages of 1 to 6; 6 is the maximum) by rotating the player. The rotation operation unit 302 of the rotation drive unit 340 that can be adjusted to the right is provided. The sub setting value can be adjusted in six steps regardless of the setting step of the main setting value, but the sound volume that can be actually heard by the player is changed based on the setting step of the main setting value. That is, the volume that the player can actually hear is based on the value obtained by multiplying the main setting value and the sub setting value. When the main setting value is “high” and the sub setting value is “6”, the maximum volume is obtained. When the main set value is “small” and the sub set value is “1”, the minimum volume is set. When the player operates the rotation operation unit 302, the detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347 provided in the rotation drive unit 340 and the detection signal from the second rotation detection sensor 348 are transmitted via the peripheral control input circuit. Input to various serial I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The peripheral control IC 1510a monitors whether or not the rotation operation unit 302 has been operated. When it is determined that the rotation operation unit 302 has been operated in the right direction, the sub-setting value of the volume is set according to the operation amount. When it is determined that the rotation operation unit 302 has been operated in the left direction, the sub-setting value of the volume is reduced according to the operation amount.

  Then, in the peripheral control IC 1510a, the volume adjustment processing by the rotation operation unit 302 is performed in a period before the game is started and the symbol change according to the big hit determination has not been performed yet (a period in which a demo display or the like can be performed). ) As well as during the period in which the game is started and the symbol change according to the jackpot determination is being executed, the reception by the player is allowed, and the volume is increased when a more important effect appears. The value of the setting can be changed flexibly to maintain the entertainment of the game. It should be noted that the volume adjustment processing by the rotary operation unit 302 is performed in a period before the game is started (a period in which a demo display or the like can be performed) and the symbol change according to the big hit determination has not been performed yet. When the sub-set value of the volume is changed, a setting confirmation sound (for example, a sound effect of “pi”) corresponding to the sub-set value of the changed volume is output from various speakers, while the game is not played. When the volume adjustment process is performed by the rotation operation unit 302 during the period in which the symbol change according to the big hit determination is started and the sub-set value of the volume is changed, the setting confirmation sound is not output. I'm supposed to. This is because during the period in which a demonstration display or the like can be performed, since there is a possibility that no effect sound is output, it is necessary for the player to recognize the volume by the setting confirmation sound, while symbol fluctuation is executed. During this period, there is a high possibility that any one of the effect sounds has been output, so that the player can recognize the volume by the change in the effect sound itself, but rather the setting confirmation sound hinders the effect sound. I try to prevent that.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, during the period in which the symbol fluctuation is being performed, the player can adjust the volume (change the sub setting value) by rotating the rotation operation unit 302. During the period in which the symbol fluctuation is being performed, at least during the period in which the specific rendering using the rendering operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303) operable by the player is being performed, Even if the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302, the volume is not adjusted.

  First, a case where an operation effect that can change the effect by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 by the player is performed as the effect during the execution of the symbol change will be described with reference to FIG. 197. As an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302, for example, a player rotates the rotation operation unit 302 from among a plurality of types of selected images displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600. There is an effect in which any one of the selected images is selected, and after a predetermined period has elapsed, the selected image selected by the player is changed to an image indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 197, in the period from the timing t1 after the start of the symbol change to the timing t3 after the elapse of the predetermined period, a plurality of types of selected images are displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600. An instruction effect of instructing the player to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 to select one of the selected images is performed. Further, in a period from timing t2 after the start of the directed effect to timing t3, which is the end time of the directed effect, an effect operation receiving period in which the rotation operation of the rotary operation unit 302 can be accepted is set. The effect operation accepting period is a period in which the player can switch the selection of the selected image by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 without confirming the selection of the selected image.

  Then, at the timing t3, which is the end time of the instruction effect, the selection of the selected image is determined with the end of the effect operation reception period. Further, during a period from timing t3, which is the end time of the instruction effect, to timing t4 after the elapse of the predetermined period, an operation-corresponding effect in which the determined selected image is changed to an image indicating the big hit expectation degree is performed. . That is, in the operation-response effect, as a result of the player selecting the selected image by rotating the rotation operation unit 302, it is possible to know what big hit expectation degree is suggested.

  Further, when the operation effect including the instruction effect and the operation-response effect is performed, the volume adjustment is performed in a period from the timing t0 before the start of the instruction effect to the timing t5 after the end of the operation-response effect. Is controlled to be turned on. That is, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be in the ON state for a period longer than the period from the timing t1 to the timing t4 when the operation effect is executed. When the volume change prohibition flag is in the off state, the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a process of changing the sub-set value of the volume by rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and the volume change prohibition flag is in the on state. Thus, even if the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302, the process of changing the sub-set value of the volume is not performed. As described above, at least during the period in which the operation effect including the instruction effect and the operation-response effect is being executed, the volume adjustment by the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is prohibited, so that the player does not intend. It is possible to prevent the volume from being adjusted. In the peripheral control IC 1510a, when the volume change prohibition flag is in the ON state, the process of changing the sub-set value of the volume is not performed even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302. Even if the change of the sub setting value is being restricted, when the game management side (the hall side) operates the slide type volume adjustment switch 1510d, the process of changing the main volume setting value is performed. I have.

  More specifically, the volume is changed not only during the period from the timing t1 to the timing t4 when the operation effect is executed, but also from the timing t0 (for example, 2 seconds before) before the timing t1 at which the operation effect is started. The prohibition flag is controlled to be on. For example, if the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be on from the timing t1, which is the start time of the operation effect, the rotation operation unit 302 is operated to rotate before and after the start of the operation effect to adjust the volume, In the operation effect, there is a possibility that a selection image not intended by the player is selected. On the other hand, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be turned on from timing t0 before timing t1, which is the start time of the operation effect, so that the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 before and after timing t0. Even so, it becomes noticed that the volume cannot be adjusted during the period from the timing t0 to the timing t1, and it is possible to prevent the player from selecting an unintended selection image in the operation effect. it can.

  Further, the volume change is performed not only during the period from the timing t1 to the timing t4 when the operation effect is executed, but also during a period from the timing t4 which is the end time of the operation effect to a timing t5 (for example, two seconds later). The prohibition flag is controlled to be on. For example, when the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be turned off from the timing t4 when the operation effect ends, the rotary operation unit 302 is operated to rotate before and after the operation effect ends, and after the operation effect ends. In, there is a possibility that the sound volume adjustment not intended by the player is performed. On the other hand, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be in the ON state for a period up to timing t5 after timing t4, which is the end time of the operation effect, so that the player can rotate the rotation operation unit 302 before and after timing t4. Even if is rotated, the volume adjustment is not performed, and it is possible to prevent the volume adjustment not intended by the player from being performed after the end of the operation effect.

  Next, a description will be given of a case where a drive effect in which the player rotationally drives the rotation operation unit 302 without rotating the rotation operation unit 302 is performed as the effect during the execution of the symbol change, with reference to FIG. 198. . Also in the case where the driving effect using the rotation operation unit 302 is performed, similarly to the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302, the player performs the driving effect for a period longer than the period during which the driving effect is executed. Does not perform volume adjustment even if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated.

  As shown in FIG. 198, in a period from timing t1 after the start of the symbol change to timing t2 after the elapse of the predetermined period, a driving effect of rotating the rotary operation unit 302 is performed. The driving effect using the rotation operation unit 302 is performed as an effect indicating that the big hit expectation degree is higher than when the driving effect is not performed.

  Further, when the driving effect using the rotation operation unit 302 is executed, the volume adjustment is prohibited from the timing t0 before the start of the driving effect to the timing t3 after the end of the driving effect. The volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be turned on. That is, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be in the ON state for a period longer than the period from the timing t1 to the timing t2 when the driving effect is executed. As described above, by prohibiting the volume adjustment from being performed at least during the period in which the drive effect using the rotary operation unit 302 is being performed, the player can drive the rotary operation unit 302 by performing a rotation operation or the like. It is possible to prevent the execution of the effect from being hindered.

  More specifically, the volume is changed not only during the period from the timing t1 to the timing t2 at which the driving effect is executed, but also at a timing t0 (for example, two seconds before) before the timing t1 at which the driving effect is started. The prohibition flag is controlled to be on. For example, if the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be turned on from the timing t1, which is the start time of the driving effect, the rotation operation unit 302 is operated to rotate before and after the start of the driving effect to adjust the volume, There is a possibility that the execution of the driving effect is hindered. On the other hand, by controlling the volume change prohibition flag to the ON state from timing t0 before timing t1, which is the start time of the driving effect, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302 before and after timing t0. Even if it does, it becomes noticed that the volume could not be adjusted during the period from the timing t0 to the timing t1, and it is possible to prevent the execution of the driving effect from being hindered.

  Further, the volume change is performed not only during the period from the timing t1 to the timing t2 when the driving effect is executed, but also during a period from the timing t2 which is the end time of the driving effect to a timing t3 (for example, two seconds later). The prohibition flag is controlled to be on. For example, if the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be turned off from the timing t3, which is the end time of the driving effect, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is stopped even though the rotation driving of the rotation operation unit 302 is only temporarily stopped by the driving effect. The rotation operation may be performed, and the execution of the driving effect may be hindered. On the other hand, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be in the ON state over a period up to timing t3 after timing t2, which is the end point of the driving effect, so that it is recognized that the driving effect has ended. Later, the player can rotate the rotation operation unit 302 to adjust the volume, and it is possible to prevent the execution of the driving effect from being hindered.

  Next, a case in which an operation effect that can change the effect by the player pressing the pressing operation unit 303 is performed as the effect during the execution of the symbol change will be described with reference to FIG. 199. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the pressing operation unit 303 is provided near the rotation operation unit 302 such that the rotation operation unit 302 is located around the pressing operation unit 303. Also in the case where such an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed, similarly to the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302, the player performs the operation effect for a period longer than the period in which the operation effect is being executed. Does not perform volume adjustment even if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated. Further, as an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303, for example, a player may perform the pressing operation unit 303 a predetermined number of times (one time or a plurality of times) on the screen of the effect display device 1600. An effect is given in which an instruction is given to perform a pressing operation, and when the player performs a pressing operation on the pressing operation unit 303 by the number of times specified, an image indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit is displayed. In the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303, an effect in which the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes may be performed before the player instructs the pressing operation unit 303 to perform the pressing operation a predetermined number of times. The effect in which the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes is performed as an effect indicating that the big hit expectation degree is higher than in the case where the pressing operation unit 303 does not protrude.

  As shown in FIG. 199, during the period from the timing t1 after the start of the symbol change to the timing t3 after the elapse of the predetermined period, the player operates the pressing operation unit 303 a predetermined number of times on the screen of the effect display device 1600. (It may be one time or a plurality of times.) An instruction effect to instruct to perform the pressing operation is performed. Further, in a period from timing t2 after the start of the instruction effect to timing t3 which is the end point of the instruction effect, an effect operation accepting period in which acceptance of the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is allowed is set. The effect operation accepting period ends when the player presses the pressing operation unit 303 by the number of times instructed on the screen of the effect display device 1600 or when a predetermined period has elapsed. Accordingly, the instruction production is also to be ended.

  Then, during a period from timing t3, which is the end point of the instruction effect, to timing t4 after the elapse of the predetermined period, an operation-response effect that displays an image indicating the big hit expectation degree is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600. Done. That is, in the operation-response effect, it is possible to know what big hit expectation is suggested as a result of the player performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation unit 303 by the number of times instructed on the screen of the effect display device 1600.

  When an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 including the instruction effect and the operation-response effect is performed, the operation effect is performed in a period from the timing t0 before the start of the instruction effect to the timing t5 after the end of the operation-response effect. In addition, a volume change prohibition flag for prohibiting volume adjustment is controlled to be turned on. That is, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be in the ON state for a period longer than the period from the timing t1 to the timing t4 when the operation effect is executed. Here, the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are integrally configured as a rendering operation unit 301, and since the rotation operation unit 302 is located around the pressing operation unit 303, the player presses the rotation operation unit 302. When the operation unit 303 is pressed, the rotation operation unit 302 may be erroneously operated. However, at least during the period in which the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 including the instruction effect and the operation-response effect is being executed, the volume adjustment is prohibited even if the player erroneously operates the rotation operation unit 302. By doing so, it is possible to prevent volume adjustment that is not intended by the player.

  More specifically, not only the period from the timing t1 to the timing t4 when the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is executed, but also the timing t0 (for example, 2) before the timing t1 which is the start time of the operation effect. Secondly), the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be on. For example, if the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be on from the timing t1, which is the start time of the operation effect, the rotation operation unit 302 is operated to rotate before and after the start of the operation effect to adjust the volume, After the start of the operation effect, there is a possibility that a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 that is not intended by the player is performed due to an erroneous operation. On the other hand, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be turned on from timing t0 before timing t1, which is the start time of the operation effect, so that the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 before and after timing t0. Even if it is, it becomes noticed that the volume could not be adjusted during the period from the timing t0 to the timing t1, and after the start of the operation effect, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 that the player did not intend due to an erroneous operation was performed. Can be prevented.

  Further, not only the period from the timing t1 to the timing t4 in which the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is executed, but also a timing t5 (for example, two seconds later) after the timing t4 which is the end time of the operation effect. During this period, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be in the ON state. For example, if the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be turned off from the timing t4 when the operation effect ends, the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed before and after the operation effect ends, and after the operation effect ends. In, there is a possibility that the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 due to an erroneous operation may cause an unintended volume adjustment of the player. On the other hand, by controlling the volume change inhibition flag to be in the ON state for a period up to timing t5 after timing t4 which is the end time of the operation effect, the player can press the pressing operation unit 303 before and after timing t4. Even if the player presses the button, the player does not rotate the rotation operation unit 302 due to an erroneous operation after the end of the operation effect, so that it is possible to prevent the volume from being adjusted unintentionally by the player.

  As described above, when the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is executed, the player rotates during the period from the timing t0 before the start of the instruction effect to the timing t5 after the end of the operation corresponding effect. Although the volume control is prohibited even if the operation unit 302 is rotated, if the player continues to rotate the rotation operation unit 302, the display on the effect display device 1600 Specific notification, such as "The volume cannot be changed." For example, during the period from the timing t1 to the timing t4 in which the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is executed, when the player performs the pressing operation on the pressing operation unit 303, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated. There is also a possibility that the rotation operation unit 302 is being rotated in an attempt to adjust the volume without noticing that the volume adjustment is prohibited, rather than simply an erroneous operation. However, even in such a case, by performing the above-described specific notification, it is possible to clearly recognize that the volume adjustment is not performed even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, and the rotation operation unit It is possible to prevent the rotation operation of 302 from being performed uselessly.

  Next, a specific effect example in the case where the volume is adjusted by the player rotating the rotary operation unit 302 during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed will be described with reference to FIG. .

  First, when a command relating to a variation pattern is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, variation display of a decorative symbol is started on the screen of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 200 (A)). When it is determined that the rotary operation unit 302 has been operated in the right direction during the period in which the decorative symbol change display is being executed, a process of increasing the volume sub-setting value according to the operation amount is performed. Do. At this time, a volume adjustment bar whose display amount increases or decreases as the sub-set value of the volume increases or decreases is displayed below the screen of the effect display device 1600. The sub-set value of the volume that has been increased accordingly is displayed on the volume adjustment bar (FIG. 200 (B)). Note that, on the screen of the effect display device 1600, an area in which a decorative pattern is fluctuated and an area in which a volume adjustment bar is performed are divided, and the volume that appears when the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated is operated. The adjustment bar prevents the variable display of the decorative symbol from being hidden, and prevents the visibility of the variable symbol of the decorative symbol from being reduced.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the rotary operation unit 302 has been operated in the left direction during the period in which the decorative symbol change display is being executed, a process of lowering the volume sub-setting value according to the operation amount is performed. Do. At this time, a volume adjustment bar is displayed below the screen of the effect display device 1600 so that the display amount increases or decreases as the sub-set value of the volume increases or decreases. The sub-set value of the volume that has been reduced accordingly is displayed on the volume adjustment bar (FIG. 200 (C)).

  Then, after the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 is stopped, the sub-set value of the changed volume is displayed on the lower part of the screen of the effect display device 1600 until a predetermined period (for example, 1.8 seconds) elapses. The displayed volume display bar is continuously displayed (FIGS. 200 (D) and (E)).

  As described above, during the period in which the symbol variation is being performed, when the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302, the drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 are performed. Indicates that the volume change prohibition flag is turned on at a point in time (for example, two seconds before) before the effects are started, and the volume is adjusted even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302. I try not to. In this regard, after the volume change prohibition flag is turned on, the sub-set value of the volume displayed on the volume adjustment bar on the screen of the effect display device 1600 does not increase or decrease. As shown in (E), a volume display bar on which the sub-set value of the changed volume is displayed is continuously displayed for a predetermined period. Therefore, even when the volume adjustment is suddenly prohibited, it is possible to know at which volume the sub-setting value has prohibited the volume adjustment, and it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player.

  In the above description, when an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302, a drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation effect using the press operation unit 303 are performed, the effects are not started. From the time when the previous volume change prohibition flag is turned on (for example, two seconds before), the volume adjustment bar displaying the sub-set value of the changed volume is continuously displayed. The volume adjustment bar is erased before the production starts. In other words, even after the volume change prohibition flag is turned on, during the period in which the volume adjustment bar is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600, the volume change prohibition flag is turned on and then the above-described effect (rotation operation unit 302) is performed. , An operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302, and an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303). Accordingly, at the start of the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302, the drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303, a volume adjustment bar is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600. It is not possible to prevent the visibility of these effects from being lowered.

  In the present embodiment, during the period in which the symbol fluctuation is being performed, the player can adjust the volume by rotating the rotation operation unit 302, but as described above, the symbol fluctuation is being performed. During the period, when an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302, a drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 are performed, the operation effect is performed during the period in which the effects are performed. For a long period of time, the volume change prohibition flag is set to the ON state so that the volume is not adjusted even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302. In addition to the above, during the volume adjustment prohibition period in which the volume change prohibition flag is on, the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302, the drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation using the pressing operation unit 303 are performed again. When any of the effects is performed, the volume change prohibition flag, which was to be turned off after the end of the initial effect, is maintained in the on state, and the volume control prohibition period is extended. . Thus, during the period in which the symbol change is being performed, one of the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302, the drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed. Thereafter, even when the same effect is performed again, it is possible to reliably prevent the volume adjustment that the player does not intend to perform.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during the period in which the symbol change is performed, the operation effect (operation operation) is performed regardless of whether the operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302 or the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed. Until the timing t5 after the end of the corresponding effect, the volume change prohibition flag is turned on so that the volume is not adjusted even if the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302, but as another example. Alternatively, the volume change prohibition flag may be turned off at a timing after a predetermined period has elapsed from the end of the instruction effect in which the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated in the operation effect. That is, the volume change prohibition flag may be controlled to be in the ON state for a period longer than the period during which the instruction effect is being executed among the operation effects, and if the timing is a predetermined period after the end of the instruction effect, The control may be turned off before the operation corresponding effect after the instruction effect ends. In the instruction effect among the operation effects, the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 is required, whereas in the operation corresponding to the operation after the instruction effect, the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 is required. However, since only the results of these operations are notified, even if only the volume control prohibition period is provided for a period longer than the period during which the instruction production is being performed among the operation productions, the player's Unintended volume adjustment can be prevented.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during the period in which the symbol change is being performed, not only the case where the operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302 and the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 are performed, but also the case where the symbol change is performed. If any of the operation effects using the rotary operation unit 302 and the operation effects using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed even during a period in which the jackpot game is not performed or during a period in which the jackpot game is being executed, those effects are performed. The volume change prohibition flag is set to the ON state over a period longer than the period during which the operation is performed, so that the volume is not adjusted even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302. For example, when the above-mentioned holding notice effect is executed, the display mode of the holding display can be changed every time the display of the decoration symbol (the display of the change of the special symbol) is started (the start condition is satisfied). At the stage before the symbol change is started, the player rotates one of the plurality of types of selected images displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600 by rotating the rotary operation unit 302, and thereby, selects one of the images. At the time when the selected image is selected and the symbol change is started, an operation effect in which the selected image selected by the player is changed to the display mode of the hold display based on the hold change pattern can be executed. In such a case, the volume change prohibition flag is set to the ON state during the period of continuous symbol fluctuation so that the period in which the symbol fluctuation is not executed is included, and the player operates the rotation operation unit 302 to perform the rotation operation. Even if it does, the volume is not adjusted. Further, for example, when a big hit game is executed, a player selects one of the music pieces (selected images) by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 in a specific round (for example, the first round). Then, it is possible to execute an operation effect in which the music selected by the player is played from the speaker. As described above, even during the period of performing the continuous symbol change or during the period in which the big hit game is executed, any one of the operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302 and the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed. Is performed, a volume adjustment prohibition period is provided over a period longer than the period in which the effects are being performed, thereby making it possible to prevent the volume adjustment that is not intended by the player from being performed.

  After a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) elapses without the symbol change being performed again after the symbol change is completed, the volume can be adjusted only by the player rotating the rotary operation unit 302. Instead, the player can rotate the rotation operation unit 302 to adjust the light amount in the effect display device 1600. For example, in the peripheral control IC 1510a, in addition to monitoring whether or not the rotation operation unit 302 has been operated, whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 has been operated is monitored, and the pressing operation unit 303 has been operated during volume adjustment. If it is determined, the mode is switched to light quantity adjustment. When it is determined that the rotary operation unit 302 has been operated in the right direction during the light amount adjustment, a process of increasing the set value of the light amount (brightness) according to the operation amount is performed, and the rotation operation unit 302 When it is determined that the operation has been performed in the direction, a process of reducing the set value of the light amount (luminance) according to the operation amount is performed. On the other hand, during the period in which the symbol change is being performed, even if it is determined that the pressing operation unit 303 has been operated, the light amount adjustment is not switched, and the light amount adjustment not intended by the player is performed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the effect during the execution of the symbol change from being difficult to recognize.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, during the period from timing t0 to timing t5 when the operation effect (see FIG. 199) using the pressing operation unit 303 is executed, the player operates the rotation operation unit 302. When the rotation operation is performed, a specific notification such as “the volume cannot be changed” such as “cannot change the volume” is made on the screen of the effect display device 1600 so as to recognize that the volume adjustment is prohibited. Such a specific notification may be made when the operation effect used is performed. For example, when an operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302 (see FIG. 197) is performed during the period in which the symbol change is being performed, the operation effect is performed during the period (from timing t1 to t4). For a long period of time (from timing t0 to t5), the volume change prohibition flag is set to the ON state so that the volume is not adjusted even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, but the volume adjustment is prohibited. During the period (timing t0 to t2, timing t3 to t5) of the period that is not the above-described effect operation effective period, when the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302, it is recognized that volume adjustment is prohibited. Specific notification may be performed. During the period (timing t0 to t2, timing t3 to t5) which is not the effect operation validity period, it is not a period during which the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 for the operation effect is requested, but the volume adjustment is prohibited. Instead, there is a possibility that the rotation operation unit 302 is being rotated in order to adjust the volume. However, by performing the above-described specific notification, it is possible to clearly recognize that the volume adjustment is not performed, and perform the rotation operation. It is possible to prevent the rotation operation of the unit 302 from being performed uselessly. In such a case, the specific notification may be not the sound output from the speaker but the light emitted from various decorative substrates or the display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 so that the effect sound related to the operation effect is not disturbed. (For example, "Volume cannot be changed"). Similarly, at the time of the drive effect (FIG. 198) in which the rotary operation unit 302 is rotationally driven, the period (timing t0 to t1, time t0 to t1, From timing t2 to t3), the above-described specific notification may be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, if either the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 or the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed during the period in which the symbol change is being performed, the operation effect (operation operation Until the timing t5 after the end of the corresponding effect, the volume change prohibition flag is turned on so that the volume is not adjusted even if the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302. On the other hand, when the operation of various movable bodies is performed following the operation effect by performing the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, a predetermined period from the end of the operation period of the movable body. It is preferable to continue the volume change inhibition flag in the ON state until the timing after the lapse of. As described above, during the operation period of the movable body following the operation effect, by prohibiting the volume adjustment by the rotation operation of the rotary operation unit 302 from being performed, it is possible to concentrate on the operation of the movable body. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, when an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 is performed during the period in which the symbol change is being performed, the volume is increased over a period longer than the period in which the operation effect is performed. The change prohibition flag is set to the on state, and the volume is not adjusted even if the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302. However, as a special operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302, Without turning the volume change prohibition flag on during the period in which the special operation effect is being performed, the player performs the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 so that the volume change and the reflection on the effect are performed in parallel. It may be performed. An example of such a special operation effect is an effect in which a player is required to rotate the rotary operation unit 302 to raise or lower the volume.

[15. About common operation unit]
Next, in the above-described embodiment, the operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302 and the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 have been described. It may be configured. FIG. 201 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as another embodiment viewed from the right front.

  As shown in FIG. 201, the door frame 3 of this configuration is provided with a common operation unit 255 (a dual-purpose button) that can be pushed in the depth direction on the right side of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. This common operation unit 255 is provided at a position where the index finger can be pressed in the depth direction when the player properly rotates the handle 182, and is more conspicuous than the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303. There is no light emission decoration by a large number of LEDs such as the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 so that the operation receiving unit is smaller in area than the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 and has a conservative appearance. ing. Note that the common operation unit 255 is not limited to the door frame 3 and may be provided in another part as long as the part can be operated when the handle 182 is rotated. Further, the common operation unit 255 may not be able to change the sub-set value of the volume relating to the effect sound.

  The above-described common operation unit 255 is effective when an operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302 and an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 are performed. Specifically, in this configuration, when the player operates the common operation unit 255, a detection signal from the common operation unit detection sensor is input to various serial I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. It has become. In the peripheral control IC 1510a, the operation status of the common operation unit 255 is monitored during the production operation effective period in the operation production using the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, and the detection signal from the common operation unit detection sensor is input and shared. When it is determined that the operation unit 255 has been operated, the effect operation effective period of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 ends, and it is considered that the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 have been operated, and Execute the corresponding operation corresponding effect. That is, in the present configuration, when performing an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303, if the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of pressing the pressing operation unit 303, it is assumed that the pressing operation unit 303 has been operated. Corresponding production will progress. Also, if the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of the pressed operation unit 303 in the protruded state, the operation corresponding to the operation is performed assuming that the operation unit 303 has been operated. In this case, Based on the operation of the common operation unit 255, the push operation unit 303 that is not operated is moved so as to return to a normal state (a state that is not a protruding state). When performing an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302, pressing the common operation unit 255 instead of rotating the rotation operation unit 302 causes the rotation operation unit 302 to move in a specific direction (for example, clockwise (rightward direction)). )), The operation corresponding to the rotation operation is performed assuming that the rotation operation unit 302 has been rotated rightward so as to exhibit the same behavior as when the rotation operation is performed. As described above, in this configuration, a plurality of operation units (rotation operation unit 302 and pressing operation unit 303) having different operation modes can be shared by the common operation unit 255, and the player operates the handle 182 to play the game. Various operation effects can be advanced with one hand while shooting the ball B, and convenience can be enhanced.

  In addition, in the course of the game, as the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, a continuous hitting effect that requires a plurality of pressing operations on the pressing operation unit 303, or in the left-right direction with respect to the rotation operation unit 302 A specific operation mode such as a mutual rotation effect that requires a gradual rotation operation, or a long operation effect that requires a long operation on the same operation unit of the pressing operation unit 303 or the rotation operation unit 302 (long pressing effect, long turning operation, etc.) Also, in the case where an operation effect requiring is performed, such a specific operation mode is set on condition that the above-described common operation unit 255 is operated in a shared mode (for example, long press) associated with the above-described specific operation mode. The operation of the common operation unit may be reflected in the required operation effect.

  In addition to the above, when a player operates the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 in an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, predetermined vibration means (driving of a vibration speaker or a vibration motor) is performed. And the like, the predetermined portion of the pachinko machine 1 vibrates to give the player a sense of vibration through the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, even when the common operation unit 255 described above is operated. Similar to the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, a predetermined portion of the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated by vibration means (such as driving a vibration speaker or a vibration motor) and the player is assisted through the assistance operation unit 255. Vibration may be given. This makes it possible to more effectively realize the gaming effect of enhancing the convenience described above.

  Instead of the above, the common operation unit 255 may be configured to be able to change the sub-setting value of the sound volume related to the effect sound. For example, when changing the sub-setting value of the volume, pressing the common operation unit 255 instead of rotating the rotation operation unit 302 has the same effect as rotating the rotation operation unit 302 clockwise (rightward). Show behavior. Further, similarly to the above-described embodiment, when an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302, a drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 are performed, a volume change inhibition flag is set. May be turned on, and the role of the common operation unit 255 may be switched from a volume operation to a staging operation to the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303. That is, during the volume adjustment prohibition period in which the volume change prohibition flag is set to the ON state, it is regarded that the rotary operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated without performing the volume adjustment even if the common operation unit is pressed. The operation corresponding effect may be advanced. In this way, by prohibiting the volume adjustment not only for the rotary operation unit 302 but also for the common operation unit 255, it is possible to prevent the volume adjustment not intended by the player from being performed.

[16. Characteristic operation and effect of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the rear side so as to close the inside of the transparent frame-shaped front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, and a plurality of Obstacle nails N are implanted in a predetermined gauge array, and a panel plate 1110 of a transparent flat plate-like game panel 1100 having a game area 5a formed on the front surface thereof is located at the upper right of the center of the game area 5a in front view. After having an opening 1112 for attaching the center role 2500 at a position eccentric to the center, the center of the game area 5a and the opening 1112 pass through the center of the opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The side of the direction in which the opening 1112 is eccentric with respect to a line orthogonal to the line connecting the center of the opening 1112 is a decorative pattern non-forming region 1102, and the opposite side is Since the decoration pattern 1150 is formed on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the decoration pattern formation region 1101 and the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the decoration pattern formation region 1101, a panel that allows light to enter from the side surface of the panel plate 1110. In a state where the panel decoration LED 1130a of the decoration substrate 1130 is not emitting light, the light from the light emitting decorative body provided in the present pachinko machine 1 or the effect display device 1600, etc., in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The appearance of the decorative pattern 1150 varies depending on the illumination light, light from other pachinko machines installed nearby, and the position of the eyes of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. This is clearly different from the conventional pachinko machine in which a decorative sheet is attached to the game panel. It is possible for the player to show the inside of the game area 5a having an impression (atmosphere) of the pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of the player and that has a high appeal to the player. The decoration of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 can be enjoyed by the player, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  When the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 emits light, light incident from the side surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is reflected forward by the decoration pattern 1150, so that the light can be seen through the transparent panel plate 1110. Since the decorative pattern 1150 looks shining and the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 can be luminously decorated, the decorative pattern 1150 can be made more conspicuous, the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, and the player's appearance can be improved. Interest can be strongly attracted, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced. In addition, since the decoration pattern 1150 is illuminated and decorated, the appearance of the decoration pattern 1150 can be made different from when the illuminated pattern is not illuminated. Therefore, the gaming panel 1100 (panel) which cannot be seen with the conventional pachinko machine. Since the light emission of the decoration of the board 1110) can be shown, the decoration pattern 1150 is illuminated and decorated, so that the player thinks that there is something good such as the arrival of a chance. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the decorative pattern 1150 is formed outside the normal light guide region 1103 and the radiating portion 1151 formed in the normal light guide region 1103 within a predetermined range from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 in the game panel 1100. A radiating portion 1151 and a radiating light guiding portion 1152 for reflecting light incident from the side surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 forward and guiding the light to the radiating portion 1151 away from the normal light guiding region 1103. Since the radiating light guide 1152 of the decorative pattern 1150 guides the light to the radiating portion 1151 formed outside the normal light guiding region 1103, even the radiating portion 1151 far from the panel decoration LED 1130a can be used as a panel. Same brightness as the radiating part 1151 near the decorative LED 1130a It is possible to emit light decoration, decorative pattern 1150 can be uniformly luminescent decorative whole, it is possible to improve the appearance of the light emitting decoration decorative pattern 1150.

  In addition, since the light can be guided to the radiating portion 1151 at a position far from the panel decoration LED 1130a by the radiation light guiding portion 1152, the panel decoration LED 1130a is partially disposed on the outer peripheral side surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. , The decorative pattern 1150 can be uniformly illuminated. This eliminates the necessity of disposing the panel decoration LED 1130a over the entire periphery of the panel plate 1110, and allows the panel decoration LED 1130a to be disposed at the upper left and lower left positions in front view where it is easy to secure a space. It is possible to prevent the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from being reduced in size in order to secure an arrangement space for the LEDs 1130a.

  Further, the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 passes through the center of the opening 1112 penetrating eccentrically to the upper right for mounting the center role 2500, and the center of the game area 5a (panel board 1110) and the opening. The panel plate 1110 has a narrow width on the side (upper right side) where the opening 1112 is eccentric with respect to a line orthogonal to a line connecting the center of the panel 1112 and a panel on the opposite side (lower left side). Since the width of the plate 1110 is wide, the wide side is the decorative pattern forming region 1101 and the narrow side is the decorative pattern non-forming region 1102, the wide decorative pattern forming region 1101 of the panel plate 1110 is provided. Since the decorative pattern 1150 is formed in the decorative pattern 1150, the decorative pattern 1150 can be made larger so that the decorative pattern 1150 can be easily seen. 0 of decoration can be to entertain the player. Also, since the decorative pattern 1150 is not formed in the narrow decorative pattern non-formed area 1102 of the panel board 1110, the appearance in the game area 5a is poor even if the decorative pattern 1150 is not formed in the area. It is possible to prevent the decorative pattern 1150 from being wastefully formed in a narrow and hard-to-see area, and to reduce the labor required for forming the decorative pattern 1150.

  Also, since the decorative pattern 1150 is formed on a part of the rear surface (decorative pattern forming area 1101) of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, the decorative pattern 1150 is formed on the entire rear surface of the panel plate 1110. As compared with the case of the above, the labor required for forming the decorative pattern 1150 can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

  In addition, on the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, a predetermined radius in front view centered on the specific obstacle nail N1 that affects the game content among the plurality of obstacle nails N is set as the decoration prohibited area 1104, and the decoration prohibited area 1104 is avoided. Thus, the decorative pattern 1150 is formed. Thereby, the innumerable game balls B abut on the specific obstacle nail N1, and the specific obstacle nail N1 is distorted or tilted, so that the predetermined flow of the game ball B cannot be provided. In order to prevent this, when the specific obstacle nail N1 is hit and adjusted to a preset state, the decorative pattern 1150 is not formed around the specific obstacle nail N1 (decoration prohibited area 1104). The current degree of distortion of N1 can be made easily visible, and maintenance of the specific obstacle nail N1 can be facilitated. Further, since the decorative pattern 1150 is not formed around the specific obstacle nail N1, even if the specific obstacle nail N1 is hit during maintenance, the impact transmitted from the specific obstacle nail N1 to the panel board 1110 is not affected. It will be attenuated to some extent before reaching the decorative pattern 1150 in the part near the nail N1, and even if stress concentrates, the panel plate 1110 may be cracked or cracked due to the weakened force. However, the maintenance of the specific obstacle nail N1 can be easily performed.

  Furthermore, since the decoration prohibited area 1104 is provided, a portion of the panel board 1110 where the decoration pattern 1150 can be formed can be clarified. Therefore, the decoration pattern 1150 is unnecessary for the specific obstacle nail N1. Can be avoided, and it is possible to easily form a variety of decorative patterns 1150, and it is possible to form a decorative pattern 1150 with high decorativeness, thereby further enhancing the appeal to the player. be able to.

  Further, since the decorative pattern 1150 is formed avoiding the specific obstacle nail N1 by the decoration prohibition region 1104, the decorative pattern 1150 and the decorative pattern 1150 are located behind the site where the obstacle nail N is planted except for the specific obstacle nail N1. Since the overlapping nails also exist, in the case of the obstacle nail N implanted so as to overlap with the decoration pattern 1150, the tip of the obstacle nail N is irradiated with light by the decorative pattern 1150 which is illuminated and decorated, so that the obstacle N The tip of the nail N can be illuminated, and the player can enjoy the light emitting effect that could not be seen with the conventional pachinko machine in which the tip of the nail N shines.

  Further, when the decoration pattern 1150 is illuminated and decorated by the panel decoration LED 1130a, the light of the illuminated decoration can cause the part between the outer periphery and the inner periphery of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a to emit light. it can. Since the portion between the outer periphery and the inner periphery of the front component 1000 can be illuminated and decorated by the luminous decoration of the decorative pattern 1150, the function display unit 1400 and the certificate stamp affixing portion 1012 attached to the portion can be illuminated. Since it is possible to irradiate the attached stamp with light from behind, the function display unit 1400 and the stamp can be illuminated and decorated, and the function display that does not emit light with the conventional pachinko machine. When the unit 1400 and the stamp are decorated with light, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is strongly thought that there is something good for the player by being decorated with light. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation of the player for the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the decorative pattern 1150 that is always visible has a portion along the outer edge facing the inside of the back front decorative board 3603 in the back front effect unit 3600 arranged behind the game panel 1100. In addition, the corresponding portion of the decorative pattern 1150 can make it difficult to recognize the outer edge of the front back decorative board 3603 when viewed through the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. In addition, since the decorative pattern 1150 has a portion along the outer edge of the back front decorative board 3603, the decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 and the shape (decoration) of the back front decorative board 3603 are similar. Therefore, the decoration with a sense of unity can be shown by the back front decorative substrate 3603 and the decoration pattern 1150, and the decoration with a sense of depth can be shown, and the appearance in the game area 5a in a front view is improved. be able to.

  Further, in a state where the light guide plate LED 2612a, the light guide plate LED 3172a, and the light guide plate LED 3221a are not emitting light, the front light guide plate 2610, the back second light guide plate 3160, and the back first light guide plate 3210 are transparent. The front display light plate 2610, the back second light guide plate 3160, and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 disposed behind the first back light guide plate 3210 can be visually recognized from the front, and the panel plate of the game panel 1100 can be viewed. The decorative pattern 1150 formed on 1110 can be visually recognized. In this state, when any one of the light guide plate LED 2612a, the light guide plate LED 3172a, and the light guide plate LED 3221a and the panel decoration LED 1130a emit light, the second pattern 2622 of the front light guide plate 2610 and the second light guide plate 3160 of the back second light guide plate 3160 Since the player can see the light-emitting decoration in which the decoration pattern 1150 and the decoration of any of the six patterns 3162 and the third pattern 3211 of the back first light guide plate 3210 are integrated, the player has a strong impact. Can give the player a strong interest in the game, as well as make the player think that something is good, and raise the sense of expectation for the game. Can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect display device 1600 is disposed in the center of the game area 5a through the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) so as to be visually recognizable when viewed from the front. A transparent back first light guide plate 3210 and a back second light guide plate 3160 are disposed in front, and a transparent back light guide plate 3210 and a transparent second light guide plate 3160 extending from the outside to the inside position. A decorative lens 3202 inside the back and a decorative lens 3152 behind the back are arranged. Then, the LED 3171a for the light guide plate of the fifth design substrate 3171, the LED 3172a for the light guide plate of the sixth design substrate 3172, the LED 3221a for the light guide plate of the third design substrate 3221, and the LED 3222a for the light guide plate of the fourth design substrate 3222. Is not emitting light, the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160 are in a transparent state, and the rear effect display device 1600 passes through the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160. Can be visually recognized, the displayed effect image can be enjoyed, and the back-side decorative lens 3202 and the back-side decorative lens 3152 are hard to see.

  In this state, when the light guide plate LED 3172a or the light guide plate LED 3221a and the LED 3203a, the LED 3221b, the LED 3222b, the LED 3153a, the LED 3171b, and the LED 3172b emit light, the front of the effect display device 1600 at the center in the front-view game area 5a. A third pattern 3211 or a sixth pattern 3162 as a specific pattern on which a specific object (broken glass) is drawn is displayed by light emission, and a third pattern 3211 or a sixth pattern 3162 is displayed around the third pattern 3211 or the sixth pattern 3162. The unit base 3151, the back decoration lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back middle decoration lens 3202 having the same shape as the object of the 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 are decorated with light emission, and the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 emit light. Display and unit base 3151, decorative lining behind The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 becomes hard to see due to the light emitting decoration of the 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back inner decorative lens 3202, and the light emitting decoration is performed with the third pattern 3211 or the sixth pattern 3162 displayed with the light emitting. The unit base 3151, the back-side decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back-side decorative lens 3202 are clearly visible.

  That is, the light emission display of the third pattern 3211 or the sixth pattern 3162 by the back first light guide plate 3210 or the back second light guide plate 3160 and the light emission of the unit base 3151, the back decoration lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back middle decoration lens 3202. When the light emission effect by the decoration is executed, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 becomes hard to see, and instead, the third pattern 3211 or the sixth pattern 3162, the unit base 3151, the back decoration lens 3152, Since the unit base 3201 and the back decoration lens 3202 can be seen conspicuously, a strong impact can be given to the player, so that the player can think that there is something good, and a sense of expectation for the game. Can be increased. At this time, since the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 are separated from the unit base 3151, the back decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back middle decorative lens 3202 in the front-rear direction, the third pattern 3211 is provided. And the sixth pattern 3162, the unit base 3151, the back decoration lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back decoration lens 3202 overlap in the front-back direction, so that the overlapping part is protruding forward. Or, as if it is retracted backward, it can be seen, and a three-dimensional pattern with a sense of perspective can be displayed by light emission, so that the player can be wondered, and the back first light guide plate 3210 or the back. Second light guide plate 3160, unit base 3151, back decoration lens 3152, unit base 3201, back middle decoration The light emitting effect by the lens 3202 can be made hard to get tired, and the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160, the unit base 3151, the back back decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, the back middle decorative lens 3202, Can be enjoyed by the player, and a decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, a transparent unit base 3151, a back-side decorative lens 3152, a unit base 3201, and a back-side decorative lens 3202 formed in the same shape as the specific target portion drawn as the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 are provided. , The third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 are provided before and after the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160 in which light is displayed, and at least three members having different positions in the front-back direction are provided. With this configuration, the sense of perspective when each of them emits light can be further emphasized, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Further, the inner end surfaces of the back middle decoration lens 3202 and the back decoration lens 3152 are inclined, and the LED 3203a, LED 3221b, LED 3222b, LED 3153a, LED 3171b, and LED 3172b are replaced with the back middle decoration lens 3202 and the back decoration lens. Light is applied to the inside of the back middle decorative lens 3202 and the back decorative lens 3152 in a direction parallel to the surfaces of the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160 toward the inner end surface of the 3152. Therefore, the light applied to the inside of the back-side decorative lens 3202 and the back-side decorative lens 3152 is reflected forward on the inner end face (the outer peripheral edge facing inward), and emitted forward. Facing the inside of the back decorative lens 3202 and the back decorative lens 3152 The peripheral edge can be luminously decorated in a strip shape, and the player can easily recognize the shapes of the back middle decorative lens 3202 and the back back decorative lens 3152, and the back middle decorative lens 3202 and the back back decorative lens 3152 can be made. Is emphasized, and the outer peripheral shapes of the back middle decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 are emphasized, so that the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern of the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160 are enhanced. It is possible to make it easy to recognize that the positions of the front and rear decoration lenses 3162 and 3202 and the back decoration lens 3202 are different from each other in the front-rear direction, and it is possible to perform a three-dimensional pattern light emission effect with a more perspective. .

  In addition, the inner end surfaces (outer peripheral edges facing inward) of the back middle decorative lens 3202 and the back back decorative lens 3152 are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, and as described above, the back middle decorative lens 3202 In addition, since the reflection direction (or the refraction direction) of the outer peripheral edge of the back-side decorative lens 3152 is different from that of the flat front surface, the light of illumination in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and other pachinko machines are used. Depending on the state of light emitted from the front into the game area 5a, such as light from the front, the front of the back middle decorative lens 3202 and the back back decorative lens 3152 looks transparent, whereas the back middle decorative lens 3202 and the back The outer peripheral edge of the rear decorative lens 3152 looks shiny or translucent, and the shape and existence of the rear middle decorative lens 3202 and the rear rear decorative lens 3152 are given to the player. The can be easier to recognize, it is possible to enhance the decorative effect in the game area 5a by back in decorative lens 3202 and back after decoration lens 3152.

  In addition, after the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160 are arranged apart from each other in the front-rear direction, the objects as the third picture 3211 and the sixth picture 3162 drawn respectively are time-series. , The back first light guide plate 3210 and the back first light guide plate 3210 in the time series order of the objects drawn as the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162, or in the reverse order of the time series. When the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 of the second light guide plate 3160 are sequentially illuminated and displayed, it is possible to show a moving luminous effect to the player. Not only can entertain the player, but also have a strong impact on the player and make them think that there is something good, The decrease in the flavor can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is provided, by displaying an effect image adapted to be combined with the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 to be illuminated and displayed, the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 and the back middle are displayed. A collaboration effect using the decorative lens 3202 or the back-side decorative lens 3152 and the effect image (for example, an effect in which the character displayed as the effect image causes the glass to be broken by the luminescent display of the third pattern 3211 or the sixth pattern 3162, The effect that the character of the effect image appears when the glass is broken by the light emission display of the three patterns 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162, etc.) can be performed. The decrease can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the state where the back-side movable decorative body 3120 in the back-side effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is in the standby position, the transparent game panel that partitions the rear end of the game area 5a. Through 1100 (panel board 1110), effect display device 1600 in which an effect image is displayed in the center of game area 5a when viewed from the front is located, and effect display device 1600 is provided at an upper front part of effect display device 1600. The movable decorative body 3120 behind the large back effect unit 3100 extending so as to straddle the display screen in the left-right direction is located. In this state, the lock member 3141 is in the lock position, and the lock protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 of the back movable decorative body 3120 is in contact with the restricting portion 3141c of the lock member 3141 from above. The movement of the back movable decorative body 3120 to the lower side than 3141c is restricted. In addition, the lock member 3141 is urged from the release position side to the lock position side by the lock spring 3143 via the transmission slider 3142, and the stopper 3141e contacts the rotation restricting member 3144 to move from the lock position to the release position. Is restricted from turning to the opposite side.

  Then, in accordance with a game state that changes as a game is performed in the game area 5a, the lock member 3141 is moved to the lock position by the downward movement of the slide guide 3134 driven by the rear drive motor 3135 of the rear rear movable mechanism 3130. Is rotated to the release position, the regulating portion 3141c moves to a position where it does not come into contact with the lock projection 3122a of the back movable ornamental body 3120. It falls (moves) to a lower moving end (down position) so as to cross the front of 1600. When the slide guide 3134 is moved upward after the rear movable decorative body 3120 falls, the lock member 3141 rotates from the release position to the lock position by the urging force of the lock spring 3143. Thereafter, when the rear movable ornamental body 3120 is moved upward by the slide guide 3134 of the rear rear movable mechanism 3130, the lock projection 3122 a of the rear movable ornamental body 3120 comes into contact with the guide portion 3141 d of the lock member 3141, and the lock is performed. The member 3141 rotates to the release position side, and the rear movable decorative body 3120 can move upward to a position beyond the restricting portion 3141c of the lock member 3141. Then, when the lock protrusion 3122a of the back movable movable body 3120 moves above the lock member 3141, the lock member 3141 rotates to the lock position by the urging force of the lock spring 3143, and the back movable movable body 3120 is viewed from the front. It will return to the state located in the upper part in the game area 5a.

  As described above, when the lock member 3141 is moved from the lock position to the release position by the transmission slider 3142 of the back rear movable mechanism 3130 according to the game state, a large back movable decorative body that straddles the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction. Since the 3120 falls (moves) so as to traverse the front side of the effect display device 1600, the rear movable ornament 3120 blocks the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, thereby providing the player with It is possible to notice the movement of the back-side movable decorative body 3120, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player to the back-side movable decorative body 3120. In addition, the large back movable decorative body 3120 falls, which can give a strong impact to the player, and can strongly attract the interest of the player to the back movable movable body 3120, and can play the game. This makes it possible for the player to strongly think that an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage will occur, thereby increasing expectations for the game and suppressing a decrease in interest.

  By the way, since the back movable decoration 3120 is sized so as to straddle the effect display device 1600 in the left and right directions and both ends in the left and right directions are movably attached by the slide shafts 3132, respectively. Becomes easy to tilt in the left-right direction (horizontal). On the other hand, when unlocking the back movable ornamental body 3120 by the lock member 3141, the restricting portion 3141c of the lock member 3141 is positioned on the opposite side to the downward direction in which the back movable ornamental body 3120 tends to move. The lock member 3141 is rotated so as to move to the upper side of the rear, so that the lock projection 3122a of the rear movable decorative body 3120 is hard to come off from the regulating portion 3141c. Thereby, even if the back movable ornamental body 3120 is inclined, the lock projection 3122a does not come off from the restricting portion 3141c, and it is possible to prevent the back movable ornamental body 3120 from dropping undesirably downward. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the rear movable ornamental body 3120 from dropping on its own, it is possible to prevent the player from having a distrust of the rear movable ornamental body 3120 due to the automatic fall. Can be released, and at the desired timing according to the game state, the lock can be released and the back movable ornamental body 3120 can be dropped, and the effect of the movable effect using the back movable ornamental body 3120 can be reliably exhibited. be able to.

  In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is provided, by displaying an effect image on the effect display device 1600, the player can be entertained by the effect image, and a decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. Can be. Furthermore, by displaying on the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image an effect image adapted to the movement of the back movable ornamental body 3120, a collaborative effect by the back movable ornamental body 3120 and the effect image (for example, An effect such that the back movable ornamental body 3120 is moved by the character displayed as the effect image, or an effect such that the character is moved by moving the back movable ornamental body 3120). Various effects make it difficult for the player to get bored and can suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, when the lock of the back movable movable body 3120 is released, since the lock member 3141 is rotated so that the restricting portion 3141c moves upward, the effect display device 1600 can be used. By making the back movable ornamental body 3120 sized so as to straddle in the left-right direction, even if the weight of the back movable ornamental body 3120 increases, the lock projection 3122a of the back movable ornamental body 3120 is removed from the regulating portion 3141c. Since it can be made difficult, the back movable ornament 3120 can be sufficiently locked by one lock member 3141. Since only one lock member 3141 is provided, it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the lock member 3141 as compared with a case where a plurality of lock members 3141 are provided. Can be made as small as possible, and the rear movable decorative body 3120 can be relatively large and stand out.

  Furthermore, since the lock member 3141 is attached near the upward moving end of the back movable ornamental body 3120, the lock member 3141 moves from the restricting portion 3141c (standby position) to the downward moving end (down position). The distance can be made as long as possible. Therefore, the rear movable decorative body 3120 falls over a long distance, so that the player's attention can be easily attracted to the rear movable movable body 3120, and a strong impact can be given to the player. In this way, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the lock member 3141 is attached near the upward moving end of the rear movable movable body 3120, a certain distance (space) is provided between the lock member 3141 (the regulating portion 3141c) and the upward moving end. ) Is ensured, so that when the lock member 3141 is rotated from the lock position to the release position by the back-and-back movable mechanism 3130, it is possible to secure a space in which the restricting portion 3141c can move upward. The member 3141 can be reliably turned to the release position, and the movement of the back movable ornamental body 3120 can be locked or unlocked by the lock member 3141.

  In addition, since the lock member 3141 is provided with the guide portion 3141d extending obliquely, when the rear movable movable body 3120 is moved upward to return to the original position, the lock is performed by the rear movable mechanism 3130. Even if the member 3141 is not rotated to the release position side, the lock member 3141 is automatically rotated to the release position side by the lock projection 3122a abutting on the guide portion 3141d with the movement of the back movable movable body 3120. Can be moved. Therefore, when the back movable movable body 3120 is returned to the original state, it is not necessary to control the back drive motor 3135 of the back movable mechanism 3130, and the load on the effect control can be reduced, and the overload can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the effect control becomes unstable and the player cannot be enjoyed, thereby reducing the interest.

  Further, the rotation of the lock member 3141 from the lock position to the side opposite to the release position is restricted by the contact of the stopper 3141e with the rotation restriction member 3144, so that the lock member 3141 contacts the restriction portion 3141c at the lock position. Even when a strong force acts downward from the lock projection 3122a side of the back movable ornamental body 3120, the lock member 3141 rotates to the opposite side to the release position, and the lock projection 3122a of the back movable ornamental body 3120. Can be prevented from coming off from the restricting portion 3141c, and the rear movable movable body 3120 can be reliably prevented from dropping without permission.

  Further, the slide guide 3134 is moved downward by the drive of the back-side drive motor 3135 of the back-side movable mechanism 3130 to rotate the lock member 3141 from the lock position to the release position via the transmission slider 3142, and then the back-side movable. When the slide guide 3134 is moved upward by the back rear drive motor 3135 to return the decorative body 3120 to the original state, the lock member 3141 is automatically rotated from the release position to the lock position by the urging force of the lock spring 3143. Therefore, after the lock is released by the back rear movable mechanism 3130 and the back rear movable decorative body 3120 is dropped, the lock member 3141 is not returned to the lock position by the back rear movable mechanism 3130, but is returned to the lock position by the lock spring 3143. be able to. Accordingly, it is not necessary to drive (control) the back-side drive motor 3135 of the back-side movable mechanism 3130 just to return the lock member 3141 to the lock position (the original state), so that the load on the effect control can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the effect control from becoming unstable due to an overload, thereby preventing the player from being entertained and deteriorating the interest.

  In addition, since the rear movable ornamental body 3120 is moved (falls) downward by the constantly acting gravity, it is necessary to provide a mechanism for moving the rear movable ornamental body 3120 downward. In addition, the configuration related to the movement of the rear movable ornamental body 3120 can be simplified, the configuration related to the movement can be made compact, and the rear movable ornamental body 3120 can be reduced by the space made compact. This makes it possible to increase the size of the movable decorative body 3120 so as to make the rearward-facing movable decorative body 3120 stand out, thereby attracting the player's attention.

  Furthermore, since the back movable mechanism 3130 for moving the back movable decorative body 3120 upward is provided, the lock member 3141 and the back movable mechanism 3130 prevent the back movable decorative body 3120 from falling. It is possible to prevent it. In other words, since the lock member 3141 and the slide guide 3134 of the back rear movable mechanism 3130 can be double-locked, there is a problem that the back movable ornamental body 3120 falls to the lower moving end without permission. Thus, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 of FIG. 107 as a result of the lottery based on the establishment of the starting condition. When the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is drawn by the player is a hit, a profit can be given to the player, and the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 107 as a display device, image information storage means 168 includes a peripheral data ROM 1520a of a peripheral data ROM board 1520 of FIG. 168, and a peripheral control IC 1510a of a peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 168 as an effect pattern setting unit and an image display control unit.

  The peripheral control IC 1510a as the effect pattern setting means can set an effect pattern related to the lottery from a plurality of patterns based on the result of the lottery. Specifically, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a plurality of types of effects based on various commands (commands corresponding to the first special lottery result or commands corresponding to the second special lottery result) from the main control board 1310. When one of the patterns is set (determined) from the patterns, various schedule data corresponding to the set (determined) pattern is set (determined) from a plurality of types of various schedule data.

  The effect display device 1600 as a display device can display an effect image corresponding to the effect of the pattern set by the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  The peripheral data ROM 1520a as image information storage means stores image data such as a background image, a character image, and a design image for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, as image information constituting the effect image. Can be done.

  The peripheral control IC 1510a as image display control means generates drawing data of an image to be rendered on the effect display device 1600 as an effect image from the image information stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600. Is what you can do.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player can recognize the degree of expectation of a hit depending on the mode of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the effect progress. Specifically, from the execution of the pre-digestion hold display as the hold display to the end of the execution of the post-digestion hold display, by changing the display mode of the hold display, the decorative pattern based on the hold display is changed. A hold announcement effect indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit with respect to the fluctuation display (special symbol fluctuation display) can be executed.

  The peripheral control IC 1510a as an image display control unit performs an effect corresponding to the effect of a pattern set by the peripheral control IC 1510a as an effect pattern setting unit when performing a hold change suggestion effect accompanied by a grayscale effect assuming that a predetermined condition is satisfied. As an image, a special effect image that has been subjected to a specific process different from the normal process can be generated and displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a normal effect image not subjected to the specific process Can be made difficult to identify. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a displays all images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in the hold change suggestion effect accompanied by the grayscale effect shown in FIGS. 194 (r) to 195 (u). By converting all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIGS. 194 (c) to 195 (f) in the pending change suggestion effect not accompanied by the gray scale effect to gray scale, r) to a special effect image used for the suggested change effect with the grayscale effect shown in FIG. 195 (u), and the reserved change without the grayscale effect shown in FIG. 194 (c) to FIG. 195 (f). It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the normal effect image used for the suggestion effect and the normal effect image.

  As the effect of the pattern set by the peripheral control IC 1510a as the effect pattern setting means progresses, the special effect image is continuously generated by the peripheral control IC 1510a as the image display control means and displayed on the effect display device 1600. By generating a period in which a grayscale effect is performed as a specific period (for example, a frame for one screen is equivalent to a predetermined frame), an effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 for this specific period. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify the hit expectation through the game. After the end of the specific period, the player is able to identify the hit expectation to the player through the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. It can be made easier. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that all the images to be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in the hold change suggestion effect accompanied by the grayscale effect shown in FIGS. 194 (r) to 195 (u). All the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIGS. 194 (c) to 195 (f) in the hold change suggestion effect without the gray scale effect are converted into gray scale, and the hold display is performed. It is difficult to determine which color has changed from what color (reserved change). Thereby, in the grayscale effect, by hiding the suggestion of the expected value by the hold display, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify the expected value (the expected degree of hit). Then, when the peripheral control IC 1510a progresses to the effect that evolves to the super reach shown in FIG. 196 (g), the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the full-color image from the image that is entirely converted to gray scale. The display is switched to the background image 1645, the left decorative pattern 1650a of the full-color image, the medium decorative pattern 1650b of the full-color image, the right decorative pattern 1650c of the full-color image, and the first hold display 1655a having the white color of the full-color image. 194, and the fourth suspension display determined as the final color of the suspension display in the case where the suspension change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 194 (b) is performed from the color in which the luminous decoration of the decorative body main body 3511 is changed to white. The color is switched to 1655d red and returned to the original color. Thereby, after the end of the grayscale effect, the expected value (hit expectation) can be easily identified to the player by suggesting the expected value by the hold display.

  As described above, while the effect of the pattern set by the peripheral control IC 1510a as the effect pattern setting means progresses, the special effect image is generated by the peripheral control IC 1510a as the image display control means and displayed on the effect display device 1600. By generating a specific period in which the player performs the action continuously, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the degree of expectation of hit through the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the specific period. Then, it is possible to make it easier for the player to identify the degree of expectation of hitting through the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 after the end of the specific period. Therefore, by executing a new effect with a simple control, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, during a game effect period in which a symbol change or a big hit game is being executed, the volume can be adjusted by the player rotating the rotary operation unit 302. If an operation effect using the rotary operation unit 302 and a drive effect using the rotary operation unit 302 are performed during the effect period, the volume change prohibition flag is displayed over a period longer than the period during which the effect is being performed. Is turned on, and the volume is not adjusted even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302. According to this, it is possible to prevent the sound volume adjustment that is not intended by the player from being performed by the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, during a game effect period in which a symbol change or a big hit game is being executed, the volume can be adjusted by the player rotating the rotary operation unit 302. When an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed during the effect period, the volume change inhibition flag is set to the ON state at least for a period during which the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed, and the player Restricts that the volume is not adjusted even if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated. According to this, when operating the pressing operation unit 303 for the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303, the player does not intend to operate the rotation operation unit 302 located near the pressing operation unit 303 erroneously. It is possible to prevent the sound volume from being adjusted, and to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the rotation operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the volume, a volume adjustment bar indicating the adjusted volume is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600, When a predetermined period elapses from the reception of the final adjustment, the volume adjustment bar is deleted, and the rotation operation unit 302 is operated during a game effect period in which a symbol change or a big hit game is being executed. When the volume change prohibition flag, which restricts (prohibits) volume adjustment, is turned on, the volume adjustment bar displayed at the time the volume change prohibition flag is turned on is displayed. The display is continued even after the change prohibition flag is turned on. According to this, while the rotation operation unit 302 is being operated during the game effect period, even if the volume change inhibition flag is turned on, it is possible to determine at what volume the adjustment has been restricted. As can be seen, it is possible to continue displaying the volume adjustment bar even after the volume change prohibition flag is turned on, which may cause discomfort when the volume adjustment is suddenly restricted. And it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game.

[17. Another example]
Note that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment at all, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be implemented in various modes as long as it belongs to the technical scope of the present invention.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, as the decorative pattern 1150, a pattern formed by a plurality of linearly concave grooves is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be constituted by a plurality of grooves, constituted by a plurality of linearly protruding ridges, constituted by a plurality of point-swelled projections, or the like.

  Further, in the present embodiment described above, the pattern (pattern) of the decorative pattern 1150 is shown as a cracked pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pattern of the decorative pattern 1150 may be a wave pattern, a geometric pattern, or the like. , Check pattern, basket pattern, scale pattern, pattern imitating the character in line with the concept of pachinko machine 1, pattern imitating items in line with the concept of pachinko machine 1, and logo in line with the concept of pachinko machine 1 Pattern, a pattern imitating a background according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, only the decorative pattern 1150 is formed on the rear surface of the transparent panel board 1110 (game panel 1100). However, the present invention is not limited to this. A decorative pattern 1150 may be formed in the decorative pattern 1101 and a decorative sheet with a decoration may be pasted on the decorative pattern non-formed area 1102 ”, or“ decoration may be performed so as to avoid the decorative pattern 1150 in the decorative pattern forming area 1101 ”. A decorative sheet provided with a decorative pattern 1150 may be attached to the decorative pattern 1150, or a part of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 may be formed so as to cover the decorative pattern 1150 from behind after forming the decorative pattern 1150 in the decorative pattern forming area 1101. Alternatively, a decorative sheet with a decoration may be attached to the entire surface. "

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the movable decorative body on which the force for constantly moving to one side in the moving direction is acting, the back surface on which the force for constantly moving to the lower side due to gravity acts. Although the rear movable decorative body 3120 is shown, the present invention is not limited to this. The movable decorative body 3120 is mounted so as to be movable in the left-right direction, and is constantly moved to one side in the moving direction by the biasing force of the elastic member. It may be a movable decorative body on which a force is acting, or a movable decorative body which is mounted so as to be movable in the vertical direction and which is constantly moved upward by a biasing force of an elastic member. Is also good.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment described above, when the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the effect of indicating the change in hold, the final color of the decorated circular hold display is determined, and the color of the hold display is changed from the initial color to the final color. As the main control board 1310 progresses toward the reserved state, an effect that changes so as to increase the expected value proceeds. In addition to the circular reserved display, a triangular reserved display, a square-shaped reserved display, and the like. In addition to combining the reserved displays, an effect of changing the color of the reserved display from the initial color to the final color so that the expected value becomes higher as the reserved color of the main control board 1310 progresses may be advanced. In this way, in the grayscale effect, the suggestion of the expected value by the hold display can be hidden.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control IC 1510a determines the timing of the color change and the color to be changed by lottery as a mode in which the color of the hold display changes from the initial color to the final color (hold change pattern). The main control board 1310 side can determine various commands to be transmitted to the peripheral control IC 1510a by determining by lottery or by extracting from a predetermined table on the main control board 1310 side. It may be included.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control IC 1510a ends the process of converting all images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to gray scale by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a at the end of the grayscale effect. Accordingly, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a background image 1645 of a full-color image, a left decorative pattern 1650a of a full-color image, a medium decorative pattern 1650b of a full-color image, a full-color image Is switched to the right decoration pattern 1650c and the first hold display 1655a having the white color of the full-color image, and the whole is returned (switched) to the original full-color image at once. Instead of returning (switching) from the grayscale-converted image to the full-color image at once, the grayscale image is gradually released and gradually returned (switching) to the full-color image. Is also good. At this time, the background image 1645, the left decorative pattern 1650a, the middle decorative pattern 1650b, and the right decorative pattern 1650c are gradually released from the grayscale converted image and returned to the full color image (switching). The hold display 1655a may be gradually released and returned (switched) to a full-color image.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the hold change suggestion effect accompanied by the grayscale effect, it is difficult to determine from what color the hold display changes to what color (hold change). However, the present invention is not limited to such a pending change, but it is possible to use the grayscale setting mode in the one-frame screen data that defines the screen described above. The effect related to the suggestion of the degree) may be kept secret. For example, when the grayscale effect is not performed, when the effect of instructing the button operation on the screen can indicate the expected value (degree of expectation) using the color of the button, the effect of instructing the operation of the button is grayed out. By setting the scale effect, it can be difficult to determine whether the button is a red button or a blue button.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment described above, the effect relating to the suggestion of the expected value (degree of expectation) is concealed by using the gray scale setting mode in the screen data of one frame that defines the screen described above. In addition to the grayscale setting mode, the effect related to the suggestion of the expected value (degree of expectation) may be concealed using another setting mode. For example, using the above-described mosaic setting mode, it can be difficult to determine whether the display is a red hold display or a blue hold display.

  Further, in the present embodiment described above, the effect related to the suggestion of the expected value (degree of expectation) is concealed using the gray scale setting mode in the screen data of one frame that defines the screen described above. Not only in such a grayscale setting mode but also in the case of concealing an effect related to suggestion of an expected value (expected degree) using another setting mode, an expected value (expected degree) which is a big hit differs for each setting mode. You may do so. For example, an expected value (expectation) that is a big hit for the effect set in the mosaic setting mode as another setting mode is compared with an expected value (expectation) that is a big hit for the effect set in the grayscale setting mode. Can be set higher.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the hold change suggestion effect accompanied by the gray scale effect shown in FIGS. 194 (r) to 195 (u), all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are gray. All images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIGS. 194 (c) to 195 (f) in the pending change suggestion effect without the scale effect have been converted to gray scale. As for the background image 1645, the left decorative pattern 1650a, the middle decorative pattern 1650b, and the right decorative pattern 1650c, in one frame of screen data that defines the above-described screen, a full-color image is produced without using the grayscale setting mode. , In one frame of screen data that defines the screen described above for the hold display It may be recommended a performance by the gray scale image by using the grayscale setting mode. Accordingly, it is possible to perform a grayscale effect on a part of the display region of the effect display device 1600, which is an area to be displayed on hold.

  Further, in the present embodiment described above, one effect display device 1600 is provided on the game board 5 as the effect display device. However, a plurality of effect display devices may be provided on the game board 5, and in addition to the game board 5, A plurality of effect display devices may be provided in the vicinity of the pressing operation unit 303 of the door frame 3 or in the door frame right side decorative body 419 shown in FIG. In this case, for example, when the hold display is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the display of the effect display device 1600 in the hold change suggestion effect accompanied by the gray scale effect shown in FIGS. 194 (r) to 195 (u). As all the images displayed in the area, all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIGS. 194 (c) to 195 (f) in the pending change suggestion effect without the grayscale effect are grayscale. On the other hand, with respect to another effect display device that does not perform such hold display, an effect using a full-color image is recommended without a grayscale effect.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, when the color of the hold display is changed, sound effects corresponding to the color of the hold display are output from various speakers (for example, the vibration speaker 354 provided on the door frame 3 or the body frame 4, the top speaker, etc.). The center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4, etc.) have been used, but the same sound effect may be output when the color of the hold display is changed. . In this way, in the grayscale effect, it is difficult to determine from what color the color of the hold display has changed due to the sound effect, and the grayscale effect is completed and the super reach is developed. In this effect, the expected value is released by switching the hold display hidden by the grayscale effect to the final color of the hold display, so that a more novel effect can be provided to the player.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the color of the hold display is changed, as the sound effect corresponding to the color of the hold display, for example, when the color of the hold display is white, the sound effect flows as “pico”. If the color of the hold display is blue, the sound effect flows as “P”, and if the color of the hold display is yellow, the sound effect flows as “Pe, Pico”, and the color of the hold display is red. In the case of, the sound effect is played as “pico-piko”, but when the color of the hold display is changed, a sound effect that is difficult to determine may be played. For example, in addition to the reference time (1 second) as the time for playing the sound effect “pi”, the color of the hold display is increased or shortened from white to red in units of 0.2 seconds. The number of repetitions of the sound effect “pi” may be increased or shortened from white to red in the hold display color, or may be reduced as the sound effect corresponding to the hold display color. You may combine the time which plays "pi" and the number of times of repeating the sound effect "pi". In this way, in the grayscale effect, it is difficult to determine from what color the color of the hold display has changed due to the sound effect, and the grayscale effect is completed and the super reach is developed. In this effect, the expected value is released by switching the hold display hidden by the grayscale effect to the final color of the hold display, so that a more novel effect can be provided to the player.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has been described as an example. However, the gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to the pachinko machine, but a gaming machine other than the pachinko machine, for example, a slot machine (rotating type). The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine) or an integrated gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated (a slot game using a game ball). Here, a slot machine as a spinning-type gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 202 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

  As shown in FIG. 202, the slot machine 6000 includes a front door 6002 and a main body 6004. The front door 6002 and the main body 6004 are connected to each other via a hinge (not shown). The front door 6002 can be opened from the main body 6004 by inserting a key into a keyhole 6005 provided on the right end of the front door 6002 and turning it clockwise with the hinge as a rotation center.

  A game panel 6006 is provided on an upper half of the front door 6002, and a projection protruding forward from the game panel 6006 is formed on a lower half of the front door 6002. A medal insertion slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 in this protruding portion. Further, a storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative board 6024 are arranged in the lower half of the front door 6002, and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative board 6024. These bet buttons 6010 and 6012, the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, the storage settlement button 6022, and the like are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. Have been. The main control board 1310 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is fixedly attached to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004.

  A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at a substantially central position of the game panel 6006. Through this display window, three variable rotating bodies (not shown) and an effect device (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 are provided. It can be seen through. The three variable rotators (not shown) are attached and fixed to a body-side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004. On the other hand, the effect device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side attachment member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door 6002.

  On these variable rotators, a translucent design band on which a plurality of types of designs (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as design information is affixed to each tubular frame. ing. Such a cylindrical variable rotator is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) is connected to each variable rotator. The drive of these stepping motors is controlled by a main control board 1310. When the output shaft of the stepping motor rotates, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously changed from the above-described display window from the top to the bottom. Has become visible.

  The effect device includes a plurality of movable effectors (not shown), the effect display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The peripheral control unit 1500 controls the operation of the plurality of movable effectors, the drawing control of the effect display device 1600, the light emission control of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards, and the like based on various commands from the main control board 1310. By performing various controls, the progress of the effect is controlled. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the above-described peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output board 1530. As described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are all made of a conductive resin made of polycarbonate and containing carbon, and the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to the back side by metal pan-head screws, these substrates are grounded to the ground (GND) and the same. It is configured to be a ground (GND).

  The main control board 1310 has a predetermined number of medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008 as a game medium, starts changing the symbol information based on the operation of the start lever 6014, and has a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, and a right stop button 6018. The change display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information has a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals as game media to the tray 6026.

  In the fusion machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes a ball slot 6008 ', and the main control board 1310 allows a predetermined number of game balls to be thrown into the ball slot 6008' as a game medium. Based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, or the elapse of a predetermined time, the fluctuation display of the symbol information is stopped. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit provision state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls as game media to the tray 6026.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine, 2 ... outer frame, 3 ... door frame, 4 ... body frame, 5 ... game board, 5a ... game area, 1300 ... main control unit, 1310 ... main control board, 1500 ... production control unit, 1501 ... Cover body 1502 Base body 1503 Wiring cover body 1510 Peripheral control board 1520 Peripheral data ROM board 1530 Liquid crystal output board 1600 Effect display device

Claims (1)

Performing a symbol variation game in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and when a winning result is derived as a result of the symbol variation game, a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is performed. A controllable gaming machine,
Operation effect execution means for executing a specific operation effect capable of accepting a predetermined effect operation during the symbol change game,
Volume changing means for changing the volume of the effect sound corresponding to the symbol fluctuation game, based on a predetermined volume adjusting operation being performed,
Light amount changing means for changing the light amount of the predetermined light emitting member based on the predetermined light amount adjustment operation being performed;
A volume change based on the volume adjustment operation, and a change disable unit that disables the light amount change based on the light amount adjustment operation,
The production operation accepted in the specific operation production is an operation on a special operation unit that is not operated when the volume adjustment operation is performed and when the light amount adjustment operation is performed,
While the light amount change based on the light amount adjustment operation is disabled over the entire period during the symbol change game,
The volume change based on the volume adjustment operation, while using a different operation unit from the special operation unit, during the symbol fluctuation game, during the execution period of the specific operation effect, before and after the execution period A gaming machine which is disabled during a special period including a period.